>!"*■ 


ic' 


0,  J-^-  ^•i''  > 


S^qu^alli^b  bg  lytm  to 
tly?  Sltbrarg  of  \ 

Prinretott  alljeolngtral  S^^mtttarQ 

:bsii4i 
.Leq 

1897 


>*^f^ 


ifilf 


.4 


^■■■r^' 


¥• 


,  v^-i^.-*- i'. ***i^  Jfevl-it" ^,^«.»"*'*  -■  ■  2*' •■ 


OUTLINES 


<^/f/ 


Special   Introduction 


TO   THE 


Books  of  the  Old  Testament 

With  an  Introductory  Statement  upon 
Old  Testament  Philology 


BY 


Rev.  J.  G.  LANSING,  D.  D. 

Gardner  A.  Sage  Professor  of  Old  Testament  Languages  and 

Exegesis  in  the  Theological  Sem-'-^^iry  at  New  Briins- 

ivicJc,  N.  J.,  and  Author  of  An  Arabic  Manual, 

Outlines  of  Old   Testament  Archceology, 

Etc.,  Etc. 


Neav  Brunswick,  N.  J. 
J.  HEIDIXGSFELD.  PUBLISHER 


COPYRIGHT  BY  J.  G.  LANSING 

1897 


PREFACE. 

These  Introduction  Outlines  were  first  printed  a  few 
months  ago  in  accordance  with  an  action  of  the  Gen- 
eral Synod  of  the  Reformed  Church  in  America,  for 
the  benefit  of  its  students  in  the  Theological  Seminary 
at  New  Brunswick,  N.  J.  Something  of  a  demand  has 
led  to  the  publication  of  these  Special  Introduction 
Outlines  with  a  slight  enlargement  at  a  few  points. 
Still  they  are  onlj^  Outlines,  summarizing  for  and  sug- 
gesting to  the  Old  Testament  student  and  reader  what 
may  be  found  more  fully  treated  in  the  larger  works 
referred  to  by  the  author  at  the  close  of  the  volume.- 
All  have  not  these  larger  works,  or  time  to  study  them ; 
while  others  desire  something  in  a  condensed  text  or 
reference-book  form.  Hence  this  little  volume  is  mod- 
estly offered,  with  the  deepest  sense  of  gratitude  to  the 
authorities  consulted  by 

THE  AUTHOR. 


Introductory  Statement 


UPON 


OLD  TESTAMENT  PHILOLOGY, 


I.— The  Original  Languages  of  the  Old  Testament. 

The  Old  Testament  was  originally  written  in  the 
Hebrew  language,  with  the  exception  of  a  few  por- 
tions, which  were  written  in  Chaldee.  The  Chaldee 
portions  are  Dan.  2:4-7:  28 ;  Ezra  4 :  8  -G :  18 ;  7  :  12-26  ; 
Jer.  10:11. 

The  Hebrew  language  is  a  member  of  the  large 
family  of  languages  called  Shemitic. 

II,— The  Shemitic  Languages. 

The  Shemitic  languages  belong  to  Palestine,  Syria, 
Phoenicia,  Mesopotamia,  Babylonia,  Arabia  and  Ethi- 
opia. 

These  languages  may  be  divided  into  three  groups, 
viz.  North  Shemitic,  Central  Shemitic  and  South 
Shemitic. 

North  Shemitic. 

1.  Eastern,     a.   Babylonian,     b.  Assyrian. 


INTRODUCTION  TOUTLINES. 


2.  Western.   Aramaic. 


East  Aramaic 


fa.  Syriac.  (Dialect 
•^J  ofEdessa.) 

it"  " 


b.  Mandean. 
Nabathean. 


^  West  Aramaic  ^ 


a.  Samaritan. 

b.  Jewish  Aramaic 

(Daniel,  Ezra, 
Targums,  Tal- 
(         mud.) 

c.  Palmyrene. 

I  d.  Egyptian    Ara- 
t        maic. 


Central  Shemitic. 

1.  Phoenician,     a.  Old  Phoenician,     h.  Late  Phoeni- 
cian or  Punic. 

2.  Hebrew. 

3.  Moabitish  and  other  Canaanitish  dialects. 


South  Shemitic. 


1.   Northern.     Arabic. 


pabaean  or   Himyaritic.  ]  «;  Mahri.^^^^.^^.^ 


2.  Southern. 


I 

I^Geez,  or  Ethiopic 


(a.  OldGeez. 
I  b.  Tigre. 
{  c.  Tigrina. 
I  d.  Ambaric. 
Le.  Harari. 


The  Shemitic  languages  were  developed  from  one 
original  mother-tongue,  which  has  become  lost,  except 
as  it  is  preserved  in  these  Shemitic  forms  of  speech. 

The  Shemitic  languages  in  all  probability  emigrated 
from  a  common  centre  in  the  desert  on  the  south  of 
Babylonia,  the  Arabic  group  separating  first,  next  the 
Aramaic,  then  the  Hebrew,  while  the  Babylonian  gained 
ultimately  the  mastery  of  the  original   Akkadian   of 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  7 

Babylonia,  and  the  Assyrian  founded  the  great  empir 
on  the  Tigris. 

The  principal  linguistic  features  common  to  the 
Shemitic  languages  are  as  follows : 

1.  Roots  consist  of  three  consonants,  generally  ac- 
companied by  a  vowel. 

2.  Inflections  are  obtained  mainly  by  internal  modi- 
fications. 

3.  The  fundamental  signification  is  contained  in  the 
consonantal  root. 

4.  Modifications  of  this  signification  are  obtained 
mainly  by  changing  the  vowels  of  the  root,  doubling 
root  letters,  and  shortening  or  lengthening  the  root. 

5.  Moods  and  cases  so  far  as  they  exist  are  expressed 
by  the  three  primary  pure  short  vowels. 

6.  Instead  of  tenses  there  are  two  states^  Perfect  and 
Imperfect^  relating  not  to  time,  but  to  the  complete- 
ness or  incompleteness  of  the  act  expressed  by  the  verb. 

7.  Particles  are  few,  and  therefore  the  clauses  of  a 
sentence  are  simple. 

8.  There  is  a  wondrous  wealth  of  so-called  synonyms. 

9.  An  intense  realism  is  another  marked  feature. 

10.  There  is  a  striking  correspondence  between  and 
indeed  a  subservience  of  the  language  to  the  thought : — 
the  idea,  thought,  emotion  being  the  principal  thing, 
and  bursting  forth  freely  and  boldly  without  any  exter- 
nal restraint  in  speech. 

III.— The  Alphabet  and  Alphabetical  Writing. 

The  discovery  of  the  Alphabet  and  of  Alphabetical 
Writing  belongs  to  the  ancient  Egyptians.  The  art  of 
writing  was  practiced  before  the  times  of  the  patriarchs 


8  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

and  probably  by  the  patriarchs  themselves.  For  while 
Moses  is  the  first  one  spoken  of  in  the  Bible  as  a  writer, 
the  art  is  not  represented  as  anything  new ;  as,  besides, 
we  read  of  the  seal-ring  of  Jiidah,  implying  a  knowl- 
edge of  the  art.  That  Moses  and  the  Israelites  at  the 
time  of  the  Exodus  understood  the  art  of  Alphabetical 
Writing  is  unquestionable.  The  special  calling  of  the 
Shoterim  of  Moses's  day  was  to  write.  In  Deuteronomy 
is  an  injunction  to  write  an  abstract  of  the  law,  imply- 
ing an  ability  to  write.  In  the  Book  of  Joshua  we 
learn  that  a  copy  of  the  law  of  Moses  was  written  on 
stones  prepared  for  the  purpose.  In  Judges  we  are 
told  of  a  young  man  who  is  able  to  write  down  a  long 
list  of  names  comprising  the  eldership  and  the  princes 
of  Succoth.  After  the  time  of  David  the  practice  of 
writing  in  all  its  forms  was  common  with  every  class 
of  the  people. 

From  the  time  of  Isaiah  it  would  appear  that  besides 
the  customary  written  character  there  was  another  rep- 
resenting a  more  running  hand,  and  possibly  letters  of 
a  smaller  size.  (Isa.  8: 1.)  Others  find  in  Isaiah's  "a 
man's  pen,"  an  indication  that  already  the  larger  Ara- 
maic character  had  been  introduced,  and  that  he  was 
directed  to  use  the  old,  rather  than  the  new^  style.  This, 
however,  is  questionable;  although  the  Aramaic  was 
doubtless  understood  by  some  persons  in  Israel  at  this 
date.  This  Aramaic  character,  which  is  the  one  now 
solely  in  use  in  our  Hebrew  Bible,  supplanted  the  origi- 
nal Hebrew  alphabet  after  the  Babylonian  Exile.  The 
latter  however  still  exists,  in  its  general  features,  in  the 
Samaritan  alphabet,  the  inscriptions  of  the  Moabite 
Stone,  belonging  to  the  ninth  century  B.  C.  and  on 
extant  coins  of  the  Maccabiiean  period. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  9 

IV.— The  Hebrew  Language. 

The  name  Hebrew  is  deriv^ed  by  some  from  Eher  the 
ancestor  of  Abraham  (Gen.  10:24,  25;  11:14;  14:13), 
and  by  others  from  tlie  Hebrew  word  eber — beyond^  and 
three — the  one  from  beyond^  referring  to  Abraham's  mi- 
gration, and  translated  "the  Hebrew"  in  Gen.  14:13. 

The  Hebrew^  language  was  already  considerably  de- 
veloped when  Abraham  entered  Canaan.  This  lan- 
guage, akin  to  his  own,  Abraham  in  all  probability 
learned  from  the  Cauaanites;  that  is,  he  adopted  the 
language  of  the  Canaanites.  The  expression  "Hebrew 
Language"  is  not  found  in  the  Old  Testament.  It  is 
there  called  the  "  language  of  Canaan,"  a  strong  inci- 
dental proof  of  the  origin  of  the  language  itself.  Most 
scholars  are  agreed  that  some  dialect  of  the  Hebrew  was 
spoken  in  Canaan  at  the  time  of  Abraham's  migration 
thither.  This  theory  is  confirmed  by  the  circumstance 
that  the  Phoenician  language,  still  preserved  in  numer- 
ous inscriptions,  is  strikingly  analogous  to  the  Hebrew, 
in  vocabulary,  and  in  many  characteristic  formations  of 
nouns  and  verbs.  The  language  spoken  by  Abraham 
previous  to  his  migration  was  also,  like  the  Hebrew, 
Shemitic;  but  it  was  probably  that  which  is  now  being 
brought  to  light  in  connection  with  the  Babylonian  and 
Assyrian  monuments  of  the  East.  This  ancient  Assy- 
rian and  Babylonian  are  nearer  to  the  Hebrew  and 
Phoenician  than  they  are  to  other  Shemitic  languages. 
The  original  dialect  of  Canaan  was  undoubtedly  largely 
developed  and  adapted  to  its  higher  use  in  connection 
with  the  immigration  of  Abraham  and  tiie  peculiar 
history  of  the  Israelitish  people.  By  Jacob  and  his 
descendants  the   Hebrew   language    was   cairied   into 


10  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Egypt,  preserved  there  during  their  sojourn,  and  then 
brought  back  again  to  its  original  home  in  Canaan. 

In  relation  to  the  rest  of  the  Shemitic  languages,  the 
Hebrew  is  remarkable  for  its  antiquitj^  purity  and  sim- 
plicity. In  richness  both  of  diction  and  grammatical 
forms  it  occupies  a  place  midway  between  the  poverty 
of  the  Aramaic  and  the  wealth  of  the  Arabic.  For  the 
most  part  it  has  admitted  foreign  words  only  in  the 
case  of  foreign  objects.  Especially  has  it  developed  a 
rich  store  of  ideas  in  the  sphere  of  religion.  Alongside 
of  its  prose  composition,  and  the  language  of  common 
life,  it  early  developed  a  peculiar  poetical  style  con- 
structed for  the  most  part  on  the  simple  principle  of  the 
parallelism  of  members.  Like  all  the  Shemitic  lan- 
guages, the  Hebrew  language  has  suffered  no  amazing 
changes,  but  has  remained  substantially  unmodified, 
either  by  accretion  from  other  languages,  or  by  any 
great  growth  of  development  within  itself,  during  its 
entire  literary  period.  And  finally  the  Hebrew  language 
is  above  all,  in  its  essential  spirit  and  genius,  a  re-, 
ligious  language,  the  holy  tongue  of  God's  holy  people. 

But  while,  like  the  rest  of  the  Shemitic  languages, 
the  Hebrew  language  has  undergone  no  amazing  change, 
still  three  stages  or  periods  of  linguistic  and  literary 
development  are  noticeable  in  it,  viz.  the  Mosaic,  the 
Davidic  and  Solomonic  and  the  Exilian  and  Post- 
Exilian. 

v.— Hebrew  Language  and  Literature  in  the  Mosaic  Period. 

The  language  of  the  age  of  Moses  bears  the  stamp  of 
greater  antiquity  as  compared  with  subsequent  periods. 
It  contains  archaic  and  poetic  words  and  forms  seldom 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  11 

found  elsewhere.  The  number  of  words,  forms  of 
words  and  phrases  are  greater.  Theie  is  a  poetical 
coloring  to  the  prose,  and  a  primitive  originality  to  the 
poetry.  Some  words  are  afterwards  found  to  have 
slightly  changed  or  developed  their  signification  or 
form.  A  slight  diffeience  is  also  found  between  the 
Book  of  Genesis  and  the  remaining  Books  of  the  Pen- 
tateuch, not  so  much  in  grammatical  respects,  but  in 
that  Genesis  contains  a  considerable  number  of  words 
and  phrases  which  in  the  time  of  Moses  had  already 
gone  out  of  use,  and  had  been  replaced  by  others. 

In  respect  to  literature,  Moses  the  founder  of  the 
Hebrew  State,  was  also  the  creator  of  the  Hebrew  Lit- 
erature. To  him  is  attributed  not  only  the  reduction 
to  writing  of  the  whole  legislation  that  takes  its  name 
from  him,  but  also  the  composition  in  willing  of  the 
entire  Pentateuch.  How  much  of  the  historical  ac- 
counts from  primitive  times  came  down  to  Moses  orally, 
and  how  much  had  been  written  down  earlier  than  the 
time  of  Moses,  we  cannot  determine.  Moses  gave  Israel 
commandments,  statutes,  and  judgments  which  he 
wrote  in  "the  Book  of  the  Covenant."  He  also  col- 
lected and  arranged  the  traditions  of  primitive  and 
earlier  times.  He  entered  in  the  Book  of  the  Law  all 
the  weighty  events  of  his  own  time,  both  for  his- 
torical and  didactic  purposes.  And  in  addition,  the 
Books  of  Moses  contain  prophetic  utterances,  poetical 
productions  and  songs,  either  composed  and  written  bj^ 
Moses,  as,  e.  g.  his  parting  song  and  blessing  (Dent. 
Chs.  32,  33),  or  transcribed  and  incorporated  by  him, 
as  e.  (j.  Balaam's  prophecies  (Nu.  Chs.  22-24),  and 
single  fragments  of  songs  out  of  "The  Book  of  the 
Wars  of  the  Lord  "  (Nu.  21 :  14,  17,  27-30). 


12  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.    ' 

y I.  -Hebrew  Lang-iiage  and  Literature   in   the   Davidic  and 
Solomonic  Period. 

The  second  or  intermediate  period  of  the  Hebrew 
language  and  literature  reaches  from  Samuel  to  Heze- 
kiah  (B.  C.  1100-700).  It  is  the  Golden  Age  of  the 
Hebrew  language  and  literature,  attaining  its  zenith 
under  David  and  Solomon,  whose  rich  mental  endow- 
ments in  the  department  of  literature  contributed 
greatly  to  the  cultivation  and  development  of  the 
language. 

Already  in  the  Book  of  Joshua,  the  last  Book  of  the 
Hexateuch,  linguistic  development  begins  to  be  observ- 
arble,  in  the  disappearance  of  archaisms,  in  new  con- 
ceptions and  expressions,  and  in  peculiar  formations  of 
words.  This  linguistic  development  becomes  of  greater 
importance  under  Samuel,  in  the  Books  of  Judges,  Ruth 
and  Samuel,  where  we  find  new  conceptions  and  words, 
formed  in  the  course  of  the  progressive  development  of 
the  domestic,  civil,  political,  and  religious  life  of  the 
nation;  besides,  a  large  number  of  words  in  the  Books 
of  Samuel,  that  do  not  previously  occur  in  prose,  but 
belong  mainly  to  poetical  and  prophetical  language. 
The  language  attained  its  highest  degree  of  culti- 
vated use  in  connection  with  the  poetry  that  flourished 
under  David  and  Solomon,  and  in  which  is  seen  a 
decided  enlargement  and  enrichment  of  the  vocabulary, 
the  grammatical  forms  and  the  intellectual  force  of  the 
language.  It  develoi^s  new  roots  and  words,  new  forms 
and  formations  of  words,  and  new  words  in  derivative 
significations.  And  not  only  poetry,  but  prophecy  also 
contributed  largely  to  tlie  cultivation  of  the  language 
by  means  of  its  enlarged  vocabulary,  its  oratorical  style, 
and  its  powerful  imagery  in  the  announcement  of  divine 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  13 

truth.  This  high  degree  of  cultivation  attained  by  the 
language  during  this  period,  and  as  displayed  in  its 
poetic  and  prophetic  literature,  is  owing,  in  part,  to  the 
increase  of  its  roots  and  its  formations  of  words,  ac- 
cording to  its  own  laws  for  making  these;  and,  in  part, 
to  the  adoption  of  words  and  forms  from  tlie  kindred 
Arabic  and  Aramaic  dialects.  This  latter  class  of 
words,  of  course,  belonged  to  the  common  Shemitic 
language,  but  the  words  had  been  retained  only  by  one 
or  other  of  the  branches  into  which  the  race  became 
divided,  and  especially  by  the  Arabic  branch,  until 
the  '  again  became  appropriated  by  the  Hebrews. 

The  Hebrew  literature  of  this  period  embraces  the 
historical  and  poetic  writings  falling  between  the  time 
of  Moses,  and  that  of  David,  the  Davidic  Psalms,  and 
the  older  prophetic  and  poetic  writings,  including  the 
lives  and  writings  of  David,  Solomon,  Isaiah,  Amos, 
Hosea,  Joel,  Jonah,  Micah  and  Nahum.  From  the  death 
of  Moses  till  the  time  of  Samuel  the  literature  is  chiefly 
historical,  with  occasional  bursts  of  exalted  poetiy  as, 
e.  g.  the  songs  of  Deborah  and  Hannah.  Under 
Samuel  and  his  "schools  of  tlie  prophets"  a  theocratic 
literature  becomes  revived  and  greatly  promoted. 
Under  David  and  Solomon,  who  were  endowed  with 
such  rich  and  profound  mental  attainments,  lyric  and 
didactic  poetr}'  nourishes.  As  affairs  became  dis- 
ordered towards  the  end  of  Solomon's  reign,  and  a 
growing  decadence  in  religious  life  became  more 
observable,  prophetic  literature  rose  continually  into 
increasing  importance.  Prophecies  became  more  ex- 
tended and  more  impressive  in  subject  matter.  This 
prophetic  literature  revolves  about  the  two  great  themes 
of  prophecy;  on  the  one  hand  prevailing  sin,  and  the 


14  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

divine  purifications  and  punishments  therefor;  and  on 
the  other  hand  the  gracious  and  glorious  designs  of  the 
theocracy,  when,  after  purification  by  these  judgments, 
days  of  blessedness  and  glory  should  dawn  by  the 
mission  of  Messiah  to  redeem  Israel,  and  to  bring  the 
saving  knowledge  of  the  Lord  to  all  nations.  This 
prophetic  literature  beginning  with  the  ninth  century, 
attains  its  climax  in  Isaiah,  during  the  Assyrian  period. 
This  prophetic  literature  designed  not  only  for  the  times 
in  which  it  was  produced,  but  chiefly  for  the  future, 
contained  also  much  of  historical  matter  written  in  a 
theocratic  spirit.  Prophetic  writings  appeared  in  refer- 
ence to  the  reigns  of  most  of  the  kings,  in  which  his- 
torical narratives  of  the  weightiest  events  were  united 
with  the  prophetic  utterances  which  they  called  forth, 
as  e.  g.  "The  words  of  Samuel,  Gad,  Nathan,  Shem- 
aiah,  Iddo,  Jehu,"  etc.  Individual  prophets  also  com- 
posed separate  historical  works,  from  a  prophetic  point 
of  view,  upon  individual  reigns,  as  e.  g.  Isaiah's  his- 
tory of  XJzziah  (2  Chron.  26 :  22)  and  the  prophet  Iddo's 
Midrash  (commentary  R.  V.)  upon  the  reign  of  Abijah 
(2  Chron.  13:22).  Besides  there  were  court  annalists 
who  recorded  the  principal  undertakings  and  events  of 
different  reigns  for  the  state  archives,  and  from  which 
records  were  subsequently  elaborated  the  general 
"  Chronicles  of  the  Kingdoms." 

VII.— Hebrew  Language  and  Literature  in  the  Exilian  and 
Post-Exilian  Period. 

The  third  period  of  the  Hebrew  language  and  litera- 
ture extends  from  the  time  of  the  Babylonian  Exile  to 
the  times  of  the  Maccabees,  and   is   marked   by  the 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  15 

approximation  of  the  Hebrew  to  the  kindred  Aramaic 
and  Chaldee. 

With  the  Assyrian  invasions  the  Aramaic  dialect 
began  to  spread,  and  to  act  as  a  restraint  upon  the 
continued  independent  development  of  the  Hebrew 
language.  Hebrew  words  and  grammatical  formations 
became  supplanted  by  newer  ones  for  the  most  part 
Aramaic;  the  understanding  of  the  old  language 
became  obscured;  its  force  and  operations  became 
weakened,  while  grammatical  niceties,  and  the  dis- 
tinction of  prose  and  poetical  diction  became  lost. 
During  the  exile  the  Aramaic  or  Chaldee  gained  such 
au  ascendancy  over  the  Hebrew,  that  on  their  return 
only  the  more  educated  of  the  people  still  understood 
the  mother-tongue,  while  the  nation  that  had  grown 
up  in  exile  spoke  Aramaic  or  Chaldee,  and  Hebrew 
ceased  to  be  the  living  language  of  the  people. 

In  the  literature  of  this  period  may  be  seen  to  a 
greater  or  less  extent  the  approximation  of  the  Hebrew 
to  the  kindred  Aramaic  and  Chaldee,  thus  in  Ezra, 
Nehemiah,  Chronicles,  Esther,  Haggai,  Zechariah, 
Malachi,  Jeremiah,  Ezekiel,  Daniel,  and  the  later 
Psalms.  The  literature  of  this  period  was  first  of  all 
I)rophetic,  the  prophets  rebuking  the  people  for  ingrati- 
tude; pledging  them  the  certain  fulfillment  of  the 
divine  promises;  and  foretelling  the  purifying  judg- 
ments that  awaited  the  old  theocracy,  the  close  of  the 
mission  of  the  prophets  of  Israel,  and  the  announce- 
ment of  Messiah's  forerunner  with  his  own  appearing 
for  the  judgment  of  the  ungodly.  For  a  short  time 
poetry  gave  utterance  to  the  praises  of  God  in  a  num- 
ber of  temple-songs  and  then  became  extinct.  Finally, 
the   prophetic   spirit   soon   entirely   disappeared  from 


16  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

history.  With  Malachi  the  spirit  of  the  ancient 
prophets  passed  away  from  Israel,  and  about  400  B.  C. 
Hebrew  canonical  literature  came  to  an  end. 

VIII.— Moabitish,  Old  and  Late  Phoenician. 

To  the  Central  Shemitic  group  belong  also  the  Moab- 
itish, the  Old  Ph(jenician,  and  the  Late  Phcpnician  or 
Punic  languages. 

The  alphabet  was  of  Egyptian  origin.  It  was  com- 
municated by  the  Egyptians  to  the  Phcjenicians.  From 
the  Phcpnicians  it  was  received  by  the  nations  round 
about  them. 

What  were  the  forms  of  the  Phoenician  letters  used 
on  the  eastern  side  of  the  Jordan  in  the  time  of  Ahab, 
we  learn  from  the  celebrated  Moabite  Stone.  The 
forms  employed  in  Israel  and  Judah  on  the  western 
side  could  not  have  differed  much ;  so  that  in  these 
forms  or  characters  we  see  in  general  the  mode  of 
writing  employed  by  the  earlier  prophets  of  the  Old 
Testament.  The  Moabite  Stone  was  discovered  in  1869 
among  the  ruins  of  Dhiban,  the  ancient  Dibon.  The 
Stone  is  of  black  basalt,  and  contains  an  inscription  of 
thirtj^-four  lines  in  the  letters  of  the  Phoenician  alpha- 
bet. The  inscription  is  a  record  of  Mesna,  king  of 
Moab,  of  whom  we  read  in  2  Ki.  Ch.  3,  that  after 
Ahab's  death  he  "  rebelled  against  the  king  of  Israel," 
and  was  vainly  besieged  in  his  capital,  Kirharaseth,  by 
the  combined  armies  of  Israel,  Judah  and  Edom. 
Mesha  describes  the  successful  issue  of  his  revolt,  and 
the  revenge  he  took  upon  the  Israelites  for  their  former 
oppression  of  his  country.  In  man}^  respects  the  in- 
scription reads  much  like  a  chapter  from  one  of  the 
historical  Books  of  the  Old  Testament.     Not  only  are 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  17 

the  phrases  the  same,  but  the  words  and  grammatical 
forms  are,  with  one  or  two  exceptions,  all  found  in 
Scriptural  Hebrew.  From  which  we  learn  that  the 
language  of  Moab  differed  less  from  that  of  the  Israel- 
ites than  does  one  English  dialect  from  another.  The 
story  told  by  the  Stone,  and  the  account  of  the  war 
against  Moab  given  in  the  Bible,  supplement  one 
another. 

But  as  the  writing  of  two  persons  will  differ,  so  the 
writing  of  the  Moabites  on  the  east  side  of  the  Jordan 
and  the  writing  of  the  Jews  on  the  west  side  must  have 
differed  to  some  extent.  Besides  there  must  have  been 
some  difference  between  the  cursive  writing  of  a  papy- 
rus roll  and  the  carefully  carved  letters  of  a  monument 
like  Mesha's.  This  seems  to  be  implied  by  Isa.  8:1. 
But  until  the  discovery  of  the  Siloam  inscription  we 
were  not  in  possession  of  any  Hebrew  inscription  of 
authentic  pre-exilic  date.  The  inscription  is  as  old  as 
the  time  of  Isaiah,  and  may  be  older.  It  was  discov- 
ered in  1880.  The  Pool  of  Siloam  is  supplied  with  water 
through  a  tunnel  excavated  in  the  rock.  This  tunnel 
communicated  with  the  so-called  Spring  of  the  Virgin, 
the  only  natural  spring  of  water  in  or  near  Jerusalem. 
It  rises  below  the  walls  of  the  city,  on  the  western  bank 
of  the  Kidron  Valley ;  and  the  tunnel  through  which  its 
waters  are  conveyed  is  consequently  cut  through  the 
ridge  that  forms  the  southern  part  of  the  Temple  Hill. 
The  Pool  of  Siloam  lies  on  the  opposite  side  of  the 
ridge,  at  the  mouth  of  the  valley  called  that  of  the 
Cheesemakers  (Tyropoeon)  in  the  time  of  Josephus.  The 
inscription  occupies  the  under  part  of  an  artificial  tab- 
let in  the  wall  of  rock,  about  nineteen  feet  from  where 
the  conduit  opens  out  upon  the  Pool  of  Siloam,  and  on 
[2  J 


18  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

the  right  hand  side  of  one  who  enters  it,  i.  e.  the 
southern  side.  The  inscription  consists  of  eight  lines 
and  relates  to  the  excavation  of  the  tunnel.  It  was 
executed  either  in  the  reign  of  Hezekiah,  2  Ki.  20 :  20 ; 
2  Chron.  32 :  30,  or  Ahaz,  Isa.  8 :  6,  or  possibly  Solomon. 
With  the  exception  of  one  word  the  language  of  the 
inscription  is  the  purest  Biblical  Hebrew,  and  the 
writing  and  characters  those  used  by  the  early  prophets. 
The  Old  Phoenician  and  the  Late  Phoenician  or  Punic 
languages  differ  but  little  from  the  Hebrew^  but,  on 
the  whole,  represent  a  later  stage  of  grammatical  struc- 
ture than  the  language  of  the  Old  Testament.  The 
Phoenician  literary  remains  are  for  the  most  part  con- 
fined to  coins,  topographical  names  preserved  by  class- 
ical writers,  proper  names  of  persons,  and  monumental 
inscriptions.  The  longest,  oldest  and  most  important 
monumental  inscription  is  on  the  sarcophagus  of 
Eshmunazar,  king  of  Sidon,  and  the  date  of  which 
falls  between  1000  and  700  B.  C. 

IX.— The  Aramaic  or  North  Shemitic. 

Taking  the  Hebrew  language  as  occupying  geogra- 
phically the  Middle  Territory,  the  Arabic  prevailed  to 
the  South,  and  the  Aramaic  to  the  Nortli  or  Northeast, 

The  two  dialects  constituting  the  Aramaic  language 
with  which  we  are  most  familiar  are  the  Syriac  and  the 
Chaldee.  The  Chaldee  is  again  classified  into  the 
Biblical  Chaldee,  those  portions  in  Ezra,  Daniel,  etc. 
cited,  and  the  non-Biblical  Chaldee,  i.  e.,  the  lan- 
guages of  the  Targums  or  Chaldee  paraphrases. 

The  Aramaic  language,  taking  the  place  of  the  Phoe- 
nician, became  the  language  of  intercourse  and  com- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  19 

merce  between  the  people  of  the  North.  The  language 
became  adopted  by  the  Jews  when  they  were  carried 
away  into  their  captivity  in  the  North.  It  continued 
to  be  the  language  of  the  Jews  during  the  Persian, 
Greek  and  Roman  periods,  and  was  the  common  speech 
of  Palestine  in  the  time  of  Christ. 

Harsh  in  its  consonants,  poor  in  its  vowels,  weak  in 
its  system  of  conjugations,  marked  by  a  general  pov- 
erty of  forms  and  vocalization,  and  not  infrequentlj^ 
weakened  and  corrupted  by  pleonasm  and  the  intro- 
duction of  foreign  words, — the  Aramaic  is  the  least 
opulent  and  least  cultivated  of  all  the  Shemitic  lan- 
guages. Still,  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  a  language  ad- 
mirably adapted  by  its  simplicit}^,  perspicuity,  pre- 
cision, and  definiteness,  with  all  its  awkwardness,  for 
the  associations  of  every  day  life.- 

The  Chaldee  or  Eastern  Aramaic,  known  to  us  from 
its  Jewish  monuments  (Daniel,  Ezra,  theTargums,  etc.), 
differs  frequentlj^  from  the  Syriac  in  the  province  both 
of  the  grammar  and  of  the  lexicon.  The  Syriac  or 
Western  Aramaic,  possessed  a  considerable  literature 
from  the  middle  of  the  second  century  and  onwards  to 
the  thirteenth,  being  especially  rich  in  works  on 
theology  and  ecclesiastical  history.  Its  most  flourishing 
center  was  Edessa. 

The  Assyrian  or  Assyro-Babylonian  language,  belong- 
ing also  to  the  North  Shemitic  group  dates  back  to  a 
remote  antiquity,  and  strongly  resembles  the  Hebrew. 
It  continued  in  use  until,  like  the  Hebrew  and  Phoeni- 
cian, it  was  supplanted  by  the  Aramaic,  and  became 
lost.  Its  rediscovery  or  decipherment  was  made  possi- 
ble by  the  help  of  trilingual  inscriptions,  just  as  the 
decipherment  of  the  Egyptian  hieroglyphics  was  made 


20  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

by  the  help  of  the  trilingual  Rosetta  stone  discovered 
in  1799.  The  system  of  Assyrian  writing  was  originally 
like  the  Egyptian,  hieroglyphic  and  pictorial.  The 
Assyrian  characters  are  composed  of  wedges ;  hence  the 
name  cuneiform  (from  c?/7iei^s= wedge).  These  wedges 
are  both  single  and  double,  and  as  to  position  are  hori- 
zontal, perpendicular  and  sloping.  The  characters 
contain  from  one  to  twenty  wedges  each,  and  represent 
either  syllables  or  words.  These  are  ideograms,  i.  e. 
signs  of  objects  or  ideas,  and  phonograms,  i.  e.  >igns 
for  sounds.  The  Assyrian  literature  is  considerable 
and  is  inscribed  on  bricks,  prisms,  slabs,  statues, 
obelisks,  walls  of  temples  and  palaces,  etc.  The  oldest 
known  writing  belongs  to  the  time  of  Sargon  I.  about 
B.  C.  3800. 

To  the  Aramaic  or  North  Shemitic  group  belong  also 
the  Samaritan  and  the  Pa^myrene. 

The  Samaritans  were  a  mixed  people,  arising  from 
the  fusion  of  the  Iraelites  who  remained  in  the  land 
after  the  breaking  up  of  the  kingdom  of  Israel  and  the 
deportation  of  its  inhabitants  by  the  Assyrians,  with 
the  foreign  Aramaean  colonists  who  were  planted  there 
by  the  conquerors.  Not  only  the  people,  but  also  the 
language  is  mixed.  That  is,  the  Samaritan  occupies 
an  intermediate  position  in  respect  to  Hebrew  and 
Aramaic,  and  is  marked  especially  by  changes  in  the 
gutturals,  and  by  the  large  number  of  non-Shemitic 
words  it  contains.  The  Samaritan  literature  is  conf  ned 
to  the  Samaritan  Pentateuch,  the  Samaritan  Targum, 
and  certain  Chronicles,  Liturgies,  and  Hymns. 

The  Palmyrene  is  known  to  us  in  the  Palmyrene 
inscriptions  of  the  ruins  of  Palmyra  or  Tadmor.  The 
inscriptions  are  chiefly  bilingual,  in  an  Aramaic  much 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  21 

like  the  common  dialect,  the  date  of  the  earliest  being 
A.  D.  49. 

The  Mandeans  dwelt  in  the  vicinit}^  of  the  Tigris  and 
Euphrates,  while  the  Nabatheans  extended  from  the 
North  Arabian  or  Syrian  desert  south  to  Petra  and  the 
Gulf  of  Akaba.  The  language  is  closely  allied  to  the 
Sja-iac. 

The  Egyptian  Aramaic  approximates  the  Chaldee. 

X,— The  Arabic  or  South  Shemitic. 

Of  all  the  Shemitic  tongues  the  Arabic  is  the  most 
opulent,  the  most  logical,  the  most  widely  diffused,  and 
the  most  important  in  the  study  of  the  other  Shemitic 
languages.  It  is  so  on  account  of  its  antiquity,  its 
purity,  its  affinity,  its  living  character,  its  immense  lit- 
erature, its  fertility  in  all  directions,  and  its  logical 
structure  and  development.  Arabic  writings  antedat- 
ing the  Muhammad  an  and  Christian  eras  exhibit  a  lan- 
guage alread}^  perfect  in  form  and  application.  The 
Arabic  retains  more  that  is  common  to  all  the  Shemitic 
languages  than  does  any  other  Shemitic  language.  Not 
only  separate  nouns,  but  the  radical  mateiials  of  lan- 
guage, such  as  numerals,  prepositions,  pronouns,  etc. ; 
and  not  only  separate  verbs,  but  grammatical  inflec- 
tions, show  the  great  antiquity  of  the  Arabic  in  which 
thej^  have  been  preserved,  while  becoming  lost  in  other 
Shemitic  branches.  The  Hebrew  of  the  Pentateuch, 
and  the  Assyrian  as  it  appears  to  us  even  in  the  oldest 
inscriptions,  show  greater  signs  of  linguistic  impair- 
ment and  disintegration  than  does  the  post-classical 
Arabic.  In  the  rejection  of  the  short  vowels  at  the  end 
of  a  word ;  in  the  disappearance  of  many  varieties  of 
inflection;  in  the  loss  of  an  earlier  wealth  of  forms  and 


22  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

significations,  by  assimilation,  substitutions  and  omis- 
sions, the  Hebrew  and  other  Shemitie  tongues  have 
suffered  loss,  while  the  Arabic  has  remained  pure  and 
rich  in  all  these  respects.  The  remarkable  affinity 
between  the  Arabic  and  Hebrew  is  well  known.  No 
two  Shemitie  tongues  are  so  closely  related.  More  than 
two-thirds  of  the  Hebrew  roots  are  to  be  found  in  the 
Arabic  under  corresponding  letters.  The  proportion  is 
much  greater  if  we  allow  for  the  changes  of  the  weak 
and  cognate  letters.  In  fact  over  ninety  per  cent,  of 
Hebrew  and  Arabic  words  have  a  common  origin.  The 
Arabic  contains  by  far  the  larger  proportion  of  the 
roots  that  are  common  to  all  the  Shemitie  languages. 
In  the  copiousness  of  its  vocabulary,  in  the  fertility  of 
its  literature  of  all  kinds  the  Arabic  surpasses  almost 
all  tongues.  Especially  in  its  grammatical  and  lexical 
laws  for  linguistic  construction  and  development  is  the 
Arabic  of  greatest  richness  and  importance.  No  She- 
mitie tongue  is  so  important,  and  in  some  cases  ab- 
solutely esssential  to  the  student  of  the  Old  Testament 
Scriptures,  not  only  in  respect  to  grammar  and  lexicon, 
but  also  in  respect  to  exegesis  and  interpretation. 

To  the  Arabic  or  South  Shemitie  group  belongs  also 
the  Himyaritic,  or  Himyaritic  Arabic  of  the  south  which 
dates  back  many  centuries  B.  C,  and  still  exists  archa- 
ically in  the  monumental  inscriptions  of  Yemen  and 
Hadramaut. 

To  the  Arabic  belongs  also  the  Ethiopic  (called 
Geez)  in  Abyssinia,  a  branch  of  the  Himyaritic,  simpler 
in  its  structure  than  the  Arabic,  and  in  general  use  in 
Abyssinia  as  a  written  language  until  the  end  of  the 
sixteenth  century,  when  it  was  supplanted  by  the 
Tigre  and  Amharic  dialects. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  23 


Introduction  Outlines 


OF 


OLD  TESTAMENT  BOOKS, 


GENESIS. 


I.  Name.— In  Hebrew  the  name  of  the  Book  is  taken 
from  the  first  word  of  the  first  verse,  viz.,  Braysheeth 
==  In  a  heginiiing.  The  name  Genesis  comes  from  the 
LXX  (Septnag'int)  Version,  and  is  derived  from  the 
Greek  rendering  of  Gen.  2:4,  the  particnlar  word  being 
Geneseos  =  Genesis  =  Generations. 

II.  Position.— The  first  of  the  sacred  canonical  Books, 
called  the  Bible;  the  first  of  the  five  Books  of  Moses, 
called  the  Pentatench;  and  the  first  of  th6  six  Books 
composed  of  the  Pentateuch  and  the  Book  of  Joshua, 
called  the  Hexateuch.  Standing  at  the  head  of  the 
Canon,  of  the  Hexateuch,  and  of  the  Pentateuch,  Genesis 
is  introductory  to  all  these,  not  only  according  to  posi- 
tion but  also  according  to  its  general  theme  or  subject 
matter. 

III.  Theme. — As  its  name  implies  the  Book  of 
Genesis  is  the  Book  of  Beginnings.  It  treats  of  the 
beginnings  of  the  human  race,  and  the  beginnings  of 


24  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

the  Hebrew  Theocracy.  In  the  main  it  treats  of  the 
beginnings  of  the  Hebrew  Theocracy.  In  doing  so  it 
traces  the  ancestry  of  Israel  back  to  the  first  apj)ear- 
ance  of  man  upon  the  earth,  while  it  also  defines  the 
position  and  relation  of  the  nationality  of  Israel  to  the 
other  nations  of  the  earth. 

IV.  Authorship,  Unity,  etc.— Two  principal  views 
obtain — 

1.  That  Moses  is  the  author  of  Genesis  and  the  Pen- 
tateuch. 

2.  That  the  Pentateuch  proceeds  from  a  number  of 
sources,  authors,  editors,  redactors,  etc. 

This  second,  the  divisive  or  partition  theory,  in 
respect  to  the  Pentateuch  has  been  held  in  various 
forms  at  different  times.  Certain  ancient  heretics, 
e.  y.  Clementine,  denied  the  Mosaic  authorship  of  cer- 
tain parts  of  the  Pentateuch,  on  purely  personal 
grounds.  But  the  Mosaic  authorship  of  the  Penta- 
teuch was  unquestioned  until  in  the  eleventh  century 
when  Isaac  ben  Jasos  maintained  that  Gen.  Ch.  36 
belonged  to  a  date  much  later  than  the  time  of  Moses. 
Aben  Ezra  in  the  following  century  found  certain 
expressions  in  certain  passages  that  he  regarded  as 
post-Mosaic  interpolations.  Peyrei'ius  (1G55)  discovers 
suspicious  references,  obscurities,  omissions,  transposi- 
tions, repetitions,  improbabilities  arguing  against  the 
Mosaic  authorship.  Spinoza  (16?0)  regards  a  number 
of  passages  as  non-Mosaic,  his  idea  being  that  Moses 
wrote  his  laws  from  time  to  time,  which  laws  were  sub- 
sequently collected  and  tlie  history  inserted  by  another, 
the  whole  being  finally  remodelled  by  Ezra,  and  called 
the  Books  of  Moses  because  he  was  the  principal  sub- 
ject.      Hobbes    (1651)    discovers    anachronisms,    and 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  25 

regards  as  Mosaic  only  Deut.  Chs.  11-27.  Richard 
Simon  (1685)  held  that  Moses  wrote  the  laws,  but  that 
the  historical  portions  w^ere  the  work  of  various  scribes 
or  prophets.  These  and  others  of  the  earlier  objectors 
were  ably  answered  by  Carpoz  (1731)  and  Witsius 
(1736).  The  later  objections  to  the  Mosaic  authorship 
of  the  Pentateuch  affect  its  form  rather  than  its  con- 
tents. It  is  asserted  that  the  constitution  of  the  Pen- 
tateuch shows  that  it  does  not  proceed  from  any  one 
writer,  but  that  it  is  composed  of  parts  of  diverse 
origin,  the  productions  of  different  writers,  these 
writers  belonging  to  a  time  long  posterior  to  the  age  of 
Moses.  These  later  objections  are  directed  first  against 
the  unity  of  the  Pentateuch,  and  then  against  its 
authenticity.  By  the  unity  of  the  Pentateuch  it  is 
understood  that  in  its  present  form  the  Pentateuch  is 
one  continuous  work,  the  product  of  a  single  writer, 
i.  e.  Moses.  This  writer,  Moses,  may  have  had  before 
him  various  written  sources  from  which  to  draw  his 
materials,  or  credible  tradition,  or  personal  knowledge, 
or  divine  revelation,  but  was  the  composition  of  the 
Pentateuch,  as  we  now  have  it,  his  own  ?  That  is,  in 
regard  to  the  unit}^  of  the  Pentateuch,  is  it  a  continu- 
ous production  from  a  single  pen,  whatever  may  have 
been  the  sources  from  which  the  materials  were  taken, 
or  is  it  a  comfjosite  production,  constituted  of  various 
writings  brought  together,  the  several  portions  of 
which  may  still  be  distinguished,  separated  and  as- 
signed to  their  respective  originals  ?  As  against  the 
single,  continuous,  Mosaic  composition  of  the  Penta- 
teuch, various  partition  hypotheses  have  been  main- 
tained, as  follows: 

1.    llie   Document  Hypothesis.     In   support  of  the 


26  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

credibility^  of  Genesis,  Vatringa  (1707)  expressed  the 
opinion  that  Moses  collected,  digested,  embellished, 
and  supplemented  the  records  left  by  the  fathers  and 
preserved  among  the  Israelites.  But  Astruc  (1753) 
could  not  agree  with  this,  and  declared  that  Genesis 
was  not  merely  based  on  preexisting  writings,  but  that 
it  was  framed  out  of  those  writings,  which  were  incor- 
porated in  it,  pieced  together,  each  retaining  its  own 
style  and  texture,  so  that  they  can  be  taken  apart  and 
the  original  sources  produced.  This  hypothesis  was 
adopted  and  elaborated  by  Eichhorn  (1782-1823). 
This  Document  Hypothesis  was  based:  a.  Upon  the 
dilfeience  in  the  usage  of  the  divine  names  Eloheem 
(=  God),  and  Jehovah,  h.  The  assertion  that  the 
Eloheem  and  Jehovah  sections,  tai^en  alone,  form 
a  regularly  constructed  and  continuous  narrative. 
c.  Modifications  in  alleged  parallel  passages  in  the  two 
documents,  d.  Diversity  in  style,  diction,  ideas,  in 
the  two  documents. 

2.  Tlie  Fragment  Hypothesis.  While  the  Document 
Hypothesis  was  still  being  agitated  a  more  extreme 
measure  of  a  divisive  Pentateuch  was  advocated  by 
Vater  (1805),  Hartmann  (1831),  and  others,  who  advo- 
cated what  is  known  as  the  Fragment  Hypothesis. 
This  Hj'pothesis  has  been  fitly  described  as  the  Docu- 
ment Hypothesis  run  mad.  Instead  of  two  continuous 
documents  j)ieced  together  to  constitute  the  Penta- 
teuch, we  have  now,  according  to  the  Fragment  H}-- 
pothesis,  the  paragraphs  and  sections  of  these  two 
documents  assigned  to  separate  and  independent 
sources.  The  arguments  adduced  in  favor  of  the 
Fragment  Hypothesis  are  in  the  main  the  same  as 
those  urged  in   favor   of   the   Document  Hypothesis. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  27 

This  Hypothesis  was  refuted  by  Ewald  in  his  earliest 
publication  (1823),  and  still  more  thoroughly  by  F.  H. 
Ranke  (1834-1840). 

3.  The  Supplement  Hypothesis.  The  Supplement 
H3^pothesis  advocated  by  Bleek,  Tuch,  Stahelin  De 
Wette,  Knobel,  and  others,  was  a  reaction  in  the  right 
direction  against  the  inconsistencies  and  incongruities 
of  the  Fragment  Hypothesis.  It  was  a  modification  of 
the  Document  Hypothesis,  retaining  the  Elohist  and 
Jehovist  of  that  older  theory.  But  instead  of  assign- 
ing to  them  the  authorship  of  independent  documents, 
it  is  supposed  that  the  Ehjhist  first  prepared  his  work, 
and  that  this  work  constitutes  the  basis  of  the  Penta- 
teuch. Then  later  came  the  Jehovist  who  prepaied  an 
enlarged  edition  of  this  older  history,  preserving  its 
form  and  language,  but  mailing  vai  ions  incorporations 
and  amplifications  according  to  the  materials  he  had 
on  hand  or  deemed  important.  Against  the  Supple- 
ment Hypothesis  and  in  support  of  the  unity  and 
Mosaic  authorship  of  the  Pentateuch  were  Drechsler, 
Havernick,  Keil,  and  Hengstenberg. 

4.  Crystallization  Hypothesis.  The  partition  critics 
were  not  satisfied  with  the  simplicity  of  the  Supi)lement 
Hypothesis.  Ewald  and  Hupfeld  attempted  to  remedy 
the  inconveniences.  Ewald  in  1843  proposed  what 
has  been  designated  as  the  Crystallization  Hj^pothesis. 
This  is  a  modification  of  the  SuiDplement  Hypothesis 
by  increasing  the  number  engaged  in  supplementing 
from  one  to  a  series,  operating  at  distinct  periods. 
Thus  first  there  were  four  primitive  fragments,  or 
treatises  existing  only  in  fragments.  Then  second 
came  the  Book  of  Origins,  which  in  turn  was  followed 
by  the  third,   fourth,    and   fifth   prophetic    narrators. 


28  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

each  adding  to  what  had  previously  been  recorded, 
while  the  last  with  his  additions  constituted  the  whole 
into  one  continuous  work.  Then  the  Deuteronomist 
wrote  Deuteronomy,  subsequently  incorporated  with 
the  work  of  his  predecessors.  So  the  Pentateuch,  or 
rather  the  Hexateuch,  for  the  Pentateuch  and  Joshua 
were  regarded  by  Ewald,  as  by  the  majority  of  modern 
partition  critics,  as  one  work,  so  the  Hexateuch  grew 
into  its  present  vast  and  divisive  dimensions. 

5.  Modified  Document  Hypothesis.  In  order  to 
remove  the  difficulties  connected  with  the  Supplement 
Hypothesis,  Hupfeld  in  1853  proposed  a  modification 
of  the  Document  Hypothesis.  According  to  Hupfeld 
there  are  three  independent  documents,  viz.  the 
Jehovist,  the  first  Elohist,  and  the  second  Elohist. 
The  second  Elohist  used  the  name  Eloheem,  but  he 
had  peculiarities  belonging  to  the  Jehovist.  These 
three  documents  were  then  put  together  in  their  pres- 
ent form  by  a  Redactor  who  had  unlimited  liberty  in 
his  treatment  of  the  materials. 

^^arious  symbols  are  used  to  denote  these  Penta- 
teuchal.  Documents.  In  the  nomenclature  now  gener- 
ally used  J  =  Jehovist,  E  =  Elohist  (formerly  the 
second  Elohist).  J  and  E  are  said  to  have  proceeded 
from  prophetic  circles,  the  former  in  the  southern 
kingdom  of  Judah,  the  latter  in  the  northern  kingdom 
of  Israel.  The  second  Elohist  having  been  separated 
from  what  was  formerly  known  as  the  Elohist  Docu- 
ment, the  remnant  has  been  designated  as  P  =  the 
priestly  writing,  in  distinction  from  the  prophetic  his- 
tories of  J  and  E.  The  critics  further  distinguish  J^ 
and  J^  El  and  E^,  pi,  ps  and  P^  D^  and  D^,  which 
rei3resent  different  strata  in  these  documents.     Differ- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  29 

ent  Redactors  are  in  general  represented  bj^  R,  thus 
Rj  who  combined  J  and  E,  Rd  who  added  D  to  J  E, 
and  Rh  who  completed  the  Hexatench  by  combining  P 
with  JED. 

The  arguments  adduced  in  support  of  these  various 
partition  hypotheses  are  in  the  main  as  follows : 

1.  The  alternate  employment  of  the  divine  names 
Eloheem  and  Jehovah. 

2.  The  alleged  fact  that  when  the  several  sections, 
respectively  assigned  to  the  supposed  writers  sepa- 
rately, are  put  together  they  form  a  continuous  and 
connected   whole. 

3.  Differences  in  the  accounts  given  of  what  is  sup- 
posed one  and  the  same  event  or  series  of  events. 

4.  Differences  in  respect  to  diction,  style,  etc. 

5.  Differences  in  point  of  view  relating  to  theological 
and  other  matter. 

As  against  these  various  partition  hypotheses,  the 
unity,  and  the  Mosaic  authorship  of  the  Pentateuch 
are  claimed  upon  the  following  grounds : 

1.  The  argument  from  Scripture.     We  have 

a.  In  the  New  Testament  Christ  and  his  apostles 
furnish  abundant  and  explicit  testimony  to  the  Mosaic 
authorship  of  the  Pentateuch.  Thus  Mat.  8:4;  19:7, 
8.  Mark  1:4;  10:3,5;  12:19,  26.  Luke  5:14;  16: 
29;  24:27,  44.  John  1:17;  5:46,  47;  7:19;  8:5. 
The  Acts  15  :  21  ;  28 :  23.     2  Cor.  3  :  15,  etc. 

h.  The  Old  Testament  outside  the  Pentateuch  testi- 
fies that  the  Pentateuch  was  the  production  of  Moses. 
Thus  Mai.  4:4.  Ezra  3:2;  6:18;  7:6.  Neh.  1:7,  8; 
8:1,  14,  18;  9:14;  10:29;  13:1.  Dan.  9:11,  13. 
1  Chron.  6:49;  15:15;  22:13.  2  Chron.  8:13; 
23:18;    25:4;    30:16;    33:8;    34:18,       1    Kin.    2:3. 


30  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

2  Kin.  18:6,  12;  14:6;  21:7,  8;  22:  8;  23:25.     2  Sam. 
6  :  13.     Judg.  3 :  4.     Josh.  1:7,  8,  etc. 

c.  The  Pentateuch  itself  bears  testimony  to  its 
Mosaic  authorship.  The  Pentateuch  has  been  roughly 
divided  into  two  principal  sections,  viz.:  1.  Genesis 
and  Exodus  to  and  including  Ch.  19,  historical.  2.  Ex- 
odus Ch.  20  to  and  including  Deuteronomy,  mainly 
legal. 

This  second  or  legal  portion  consists  of  three  distinct 
bodies  of  law,  viz.:  1.  The  Book  of  the  Covenant, 
embracing  Ex.  Chs.  20-23.  This  Moses  is  expressly 
said  in  Ex.  24 : 4  to  have  written.  2.  The  so-called 
Priest  Code,  relating  to  sanctuary  and  ritual.  This 
embraces  Ex.  Chs.  25-40  (excepting  Chs.  32-34),  and 
the  whole  of  Leviticus  and  Numbers.  But  in  all  its 
parts  this  Priest  Code  is  expressly  declared  to  have 
been  communicated  by  Jehovah  to  Moses  at  Sinai  and 
in  the  subsequent  wanderings.  3.  The  Deuteronomic 
Code,  embracing  the  legal  portign  of  Deuteronomy, 
delivered  by  Moses  to  the  Israelites  in  the  plains  of 
Moab.  This  also  Moses  is  distinctly  declared  to  have 
written  and  to  have  committed  to  the  custody  of  the 
Levites,  who  bore  the  ark  of  the  covenant  (Deut.  31:9, 
24-26). 

2.  The  argument  from  language,  style,  literary  form. 
The  language  is  archaic  in  respect  to  many  words, 
forms  and  expressions.  The  style  in  which  the  Penta- 
teuchal  laws  are  framed,  and  the  terms  in  which  they 
are  couched,  attest  their  Mosaic  origin.  Their  lan- 
guage points  back  to  the  land  of  Egypt,  then  to  the 
sojourn  in  the  wilderness,  and  then  forward  to  the 
land  of  Canaan  whither  God  was  bringing  them. 
Among  others  the  following  passages  are  to  be  noted 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  31 

in  this  connection,  viz.  Lev.  18:3;  Dent.  12:9;  15:4, 
7;  17:14;  Lev.  14:34;  Dent.  12:1,  5,  8,  9;  19:1; 
Num.  5:2-4;  Lev.  14:8;  16:21,  22;  4:12,  21;  6:11; 
13:46;  14:3,  8;  17:3;  8:2  sq.  Ch.  10;  16:1,  3,  21, 
22,  26,  27;  Num.  4:5  sq.;  Ch.  7;  Ch.  2;  10:2  sg.; 
19:3;  4,  7,  14,  16.  Besides  the  laws  of  Deuteronomy 
are  prefaced  b}^  two  farewell  addresses  delivered  by 
Moses  to  Israel  (Dent.  1:  5  sg.,  5: 1  sg.)  and  terminate 
with  a  prophetic  song  (Dent.  Ch.  32),  and  a  series  of 
blessings  upon  the  several  tribes,  ascribed  alike  to 
Moses  (Dent.  31 :  22;  33: 1).  There  is  then  in  the  lit- 
erary form  of  the  Pentateuch  a  demonstrable  unity  of 
structure,  and  such  an  interdependence  of  parts  as 
requires  a  single  rather  than  a  divisive  source  to 
account  for  it. 

3.  The  argument  from  history: — that  is,  relating  to 
chronological  order  and  data;  the  nature  and  coterapo- 
raneousness  or  proximity  of  events;  events  in  the  age 
immediately  succeeding  the  age  of  Moses  and  presup- 
posing the  Mosaic  legislation  and  history.  Thus  the 
relationship  between  Joshua  and  the  Pentateuch  is  so 
close  and  sequential  that  if  the  genuineness  and 
authenticity  of  the  latter  are  denied  so  also  must  be 
the  former.  The  Books  of  Chronicles,  at  every  period 
of  the  history,  furnish  explict  and  repeated  testimony 
as  to  the  existence  of  the  Pentateuch.  The  same  is 
true  in  respect  to  the  Books  of  the  prophets  and  Psalms 
where  we  find  allusions  to  Pentateuchal  facts,  institu- 
tions, and  at  times  the  precise  language  of  the  Pen- 
tateuch is  employed.  Moreover  it  is  abundantly 
attested  that  the  Pentateuch  was  known,  and  its  au- 
thority admitted  in  the  northern  kingdom  of  Israel 
from  the  time  of  the  schism  of  Jeroboam. 


32  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

4.  The  argument  from  doctrinal  development.  The 
doctrinal  teaching  of  the  Pentateuch  is  elementary, 
fundamental,  and  is  expanded  in  the  Scriptures  follow- 
ing. Hence  it  follows  that  the  Pentateuch  antedates 
the  rest  of  the  Old  Testament,  and  lies  at  the  basis  of 
the  divine  doctrine  more  fully  unfolded  in  the  Books 
that  follow.  Thus  e.  g.  the  doctrines  respecting  the 
future  state,  providential  retribution,  the  Messiah,  the 
angels,  etc.  Perhaps  the  single  exception  to  the  above 
is  the  Book  of  Job  which  we  assign  to  the  Mosaic 
period. 

5.  The  argument  from  Egyptology.  The  Pentateuch 
displays  a  large  and  accurate  knowledge  in  respect  to 
Egyptian  subjects  and  affairs.  Egyptian  words,  and 
allusions,  direct  and  incidental,  to  Egyptian  habits  and 
usages,  particularly  in  the  life  of  Joseph,  the  narra- 
tive of  the  residence  of  Israel  in  Egypt,  and  their 
journeyings  through  the  wilderness,  as  also  in  the  en- 
actments, institutions,  and  symbols  of  the  Pentateuch 
indicate  great  familiarty  on  the  part  of  the  author  and 
his  readers  with  Egyptian  matters.  All  this  agrees 
precisely  with  the  Mosaic  period,  and  the  Mosaic 
authorship  of  the  Pentateuch. 

[Note. — For  a  fuller  discussion  of  this  subject  see 
Dr.  Green's  Higher  Criticism  of  the  Pentateuch,  and 
Unity  of  Genesis.] 

V.  Divisions.— According  to  its  subject  matter  the 
Book  of  Genesis  may  be  regarded  as  having  two  gen- 
eral divisions  as  follows : — 

1.  Chs.   1-11.     The  beginnings  of  the  human  race. 

2.  Chs.  12-50.  The  beginnings  of  the  Hebrew 
Theocracy. 

The   Book   of  Genesis   may   be   further  subdivided 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  33 

upon  the  basis  of  the  priucipal  characters  that  appear 
in  this  history  of  beginnings,  as  follows: — 

1.  Chs.  1-3.  Adam,  the  first  ancestor  of  the  human 
race. 

2.  Chs.  4-9.  Noah,  the  second  ancestor  of  the  human 
race. 

3.  Chs.  10: 1-25:18.  Abraham,  the  first  ancestor  of 
the  Hebrew  Theocracy. 

4.  Chs.  25:  19-35:  29.  Isaac,  the  second  ancestor  of 
the  Hebrew  Theocracy. 

5.  Chs.  36-50.  Jacob,  the  third  ancestor  of  the 
Hebrew  Theocrac3^ 

VI.  Contents.- Ch.  1.  Creation  of  heaven  and  earth ; 
creation  of  vegetable,  animal  and  human  life;  man, 
male  and  female,  and  his  dominion. 

Ch.  2.  Review  of  the  act  of  creation;  location  of 
man  in  Eden ;  man  and  woman. 

Ch.  3.  Man's  temptation,  fall,  curse  and  expulsion, 
but  includiug  a  promise  of  redemption. 

Ch.  4.  Descendants  of  primitive  man;  Cain  and 
Abel  and  Abel's  murder  by  Cain;  the  line  of  righteous 
Abel  perpetuated  in  Seth,  third  son  of  Adam  and  Eve. 

Ch.  5.  Descendants  of  Seth  traced  in  genealogical 
succession,  to  Noah  and  his  three  sons,  Shem,  Ham  and 
Japheth. 

Ch.  6.  The  multiplication  and  corruption  of  human- 
ity. The  divine  judgment  and  the  preparation  for  its 
execution.  Noah,  the  one  righteous  man  instructed  to 
build  the  ark. 

Chs.  7,  8.  The  Deluge;  its  coming,  duration  and 
cessation.  Deliverance  of  the  inmates  of  the  ark,  and 
Noah's  sacrifice. 

[3J 


34  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Ch.  0.  God's  blessing  of,  and  covenant  with  Noah. 
Noah's  sons;  the  eurse  of  Canaan,  the  son  of  Ham, 
and  the  blessing  of  Shem  and  Japheth.     Noah's  age. 

Chs.  10:1-11:9.  Sons  of  Noah  and  the  nations 
sprung  from  them.  The  dispersion  of  mankind  over 
the  earth. 

Ch.  11:10-32.  Line  of  Shem  to  Terah,  the  father 
of  Abraham.  Generations  of  Terah  and  his  death  in 
Haran. 

Ch.  12.  God's  call  of  and  covenant  with  Abraham. 
The  famine  in  Canaan,  and  the  migration  of  Abraham, 
with  Sarah  his  wife  to  Egypt.  Abraham  summoned 
before  Pharaoh. 

Ch.  18.  Abraham's  return  to  Canaan.  Separation 
of  Abraham  and  Lot,  son  of  his  brother  Haran.  God's 
renewal  of  the  covenant  with  Abraham. 

Ch.  14.  Abraham's  war  with  the  heathen  kings  for 
the  deliverance  of  Lot.  Melchizedek  greets  and  blesses 
Abraham.     Abraham  and  the  king  of  Sodom. 

Ch.  15.  God,  the  defender  of  Abraham,  the  cham- 
pion of  the  faith.  Abraham's  desire  for  an  heir,  fol- 
lowed by  God's  promise  that  his  seed  shall  be  as  the 
stars  of  heaven ;  a  divine  pjroof  given  and  the  divine 
promise  repeated. 

Ch.  16.  God's  promise  renewed  to  Abraham.  Change 
of  the  name  Abram  to  Abraham.  The  covenant  of 
faith  and  the  sign  of  the  covenant,  circumcision.  Name 
of  Sarai  changed  to  Sarah.  Ishmael  blessed,  but  Isaac 
the  seed  of  promise. 

Chs.  18,  19.  Abraham  at  Mamre.  Theophany.  The 
promise  of  a  son  to  Abraham  and  Sarah's  doubt. 
Judgment  pronounced  upon  Sodom  and  Gomorrah. 
Abraham's  intercession.    Fall  of  the  cities  of  the  plain. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  35 

Lot's  deliverance.     Lot  and  his  daughters.     Moab  and 
Animon. 

Chs.  20,  2L  Abraham  and  Abimelech,  king  of 
Gerar.  Sarah's  exposure  and  preservation.  Abraham 
intercedes  for  Abimelech.  Birth  of  Isaac.  Expulsion 
of  Ishmael.  Treaty  of  peace  at  Beersheba,  with  Abim- 
elech. 

Ch.  22:1-19.  The  trial  of  Abraham's  faith.  Tlie 
sealing  both  of  Abraham's  faith  and  the  divine  promise. 

Chs.  22 :  20-23  :  20.  Descendants  of  Nahor,  Abra- 
ham's brother.     Death  and  burial  of  Sarah. 

Chs.  24-25:10.  Abraham's  instructions  as  to  the 
marriage  of  Isaac.  Isaac's  marriage  to  Rebekah. 
Abraham's  second  marriage.  Keturah  and  hei'  sons. 
Death  and  burial  of  Abraham. 

Ch.  25 :  11-34.     Isaac  and  Ishmael.     Jacob  and  Esau. 

Ch.  2G.  Isaac  in  Gerar.  The  Abrahamic  promise 
renewed  to  him.  J^xposure  of  Rebekah.  Isaac  jields 
to  the  Philistines;  migrates  to  Beer-Sheba.  Treaty  of 
peace  with  Abimelech.     Esau's  marriage. 

Chs.  27-28:9.  Isaac  favors  his  firstborn,  Esau. 
Rebekah  and  Jacob  deprive  him  of  the  theocratic  bless- 
ing. Esau's  blessing.  His  hospitality  to  Jacob. 
Preparation  for  Jacob's  flight  and  his  journey  with  a 
view  to  effecting  a  theocratic  marriage. 

Ch.  28:10-22.  Jacob's  journey  to  Mesopotamia. 
The  vision  of  the  heavenly  ladder. 

Chs.  29-30:  24.  Jacob  and  Laban's  younger  daugh- 
ter Rachel.  Contracts  between  Laban  and  Jacob. 
Jacob's  involuntary  marriage  with  Leah.  The  double 
marriage.  Leah's  sons.  Rachel's  dissatisfaction.  The 
concubines.  Children  of  Jacob  until  the  birth  of 
Joseph,  Rachel's  firstborn. 


36  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Chs.  30:25-31:55.  New  treaty  between  Jacob  and 
Laban.  Jacob  commanded  of  God  to  return  home. 
Jacob's  flight.  Laban's  persecution.  An  alliance 
concluded.     Departure. 

Chs.  32-33:16.  Jacob's  journey  liorae.  Met  by 
God's  host  of  angels.  His  fear  of  Esau.  His  wrestling 
with  God.  His  name  changed  to  Israel.  His  reconcil- 
iation with  Esau. 

Chs.  33:17-35:21.  Jacob  in  Canaan,  first  in  Suc- 
coth,  then  in  Shechem.  Dinah.  Simeon  and  Levi. 
Fanaticism.  Jacob  leaves  for  Bethel.  Journey  from 
Bethel  to  beyond  Bethlehem.  Benjamin's  birth. 
Death  of  Rachel. 

Ch.    35: 22-29.     Reuben's   sin.     Jacob's    sons.     He 
returns  to  Isaac  at  Hebron.     Death  and  burial  of  Isaac. 
Ch.  36.     The  generations  of  Esau. 
Ch.  37.     Jacob  and  Joseph.     Joseph's  dream.     Joseph 
sold  into  Egypt. 

Ch.  38.  Judah's  temporary  separation  fi'om  his 
brothers.     Judah's  sons.     Tamar. 

Chs.  39-41:52.  Joseph  in  the  house  of  Potiphar. 
In  prison.  Interprets  the  dreams  of  his  fellow  prison- 
ers. Interprets  the  dreams  of  Pharaoh.  Is  promoted 
to  the  premiership  of  Egypt.  Marries  Asenath,  daugh- 
ter of  the  piiest  of  On.  Manasseh  and  Ephraim  born. 
Chs.  41:53-45:28.  The  seven  years  of  famine. 
First  journey  of  Jacob's  sons  to  Egypt.  Second  jour- 
ney with  Benjamin.  Joseph  makes  himself  known. 
The  return  to  Jacob,  and  his  joy. 

Chs.  46,  47.     Israel  goes  to  Egypt  with  his  sons,  and 
settles  in  Goshen.     Jacob  before   Pharaoh.     Joseph's 
political  economy.     Jacob  arranges  for  his  burial. 
Chs.  48,  49.     Jacob's  illness.      He  blesses  the  sons 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  37 

of  Joseph.     His  blessing  on  his  own  sons.     Judah  and 
his  brethren.     Jacob's  last  charge,  and  his  death. 

Ch.  50.  Days  of  mourning.  Jacob's  funeral.  Jos- 
eph's generous  treatment  of  his  brothers.  Joseph's  last 
charge  and  death. 

VII.  Doctrine.— The  doctrines  made  prominent  in 
the  Book  of  Genesis  are 

a.  The  creation  of  man  by  God. 

h.  The  introduction  of  sin  and  its  consequences  into 
the  world  by  the  fall  of  man. 

c.  The  divine  ground-plans  and  promises  for  the 
redemption  of  man. 

VIII.  Messianic. —The  Messianic  prophecies  in  the 
Book  of  Genesis  are  as  follows : 

1.  Gen.  3:13-15.  The  Protevangelium.  The  seed 
of  the  woman. 

2.  Gen.  5:28-32.  Lamech-Noah.  Line  of  Seth. 
The  Comforter. 

3.  Gen.  9:18-27.  Salvation  through  the  race  of 
Shem. 

4.  Gen.  12: 1-3.  The  call  and  blessing  of  Abraham 
out  of  Shem. 

5.  Gen.  26: 1-5.  The  covenant  with  Isaac  of  Abra- 
ham's sons. 

6.  Gen.  28:10-17.  The  covenant  with  Jacob  of 
Isaac's  sons. 

7.  Gen.  49:8-12.  The  Blessing  of  Judah  out  of 
Jacob's  twelve  sons. 

See  Messianic  under  Exodus. 


38 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


GENEALOGICAL  TABLES  TO  GENESIS. 

1.    The  Antediluvian  Patriarchs. 

Table  to  Gen.  Ch.  5,  Comp.  9: 39.  According  to  the  Hebrew  Text. 


Names  of 

Age  at  birth 

Remainder 

Whole  dur- 

Year of 

Year  of 

the 

of 

of 

ation  of 

birth 

death 

Ten  Patriarchs 

Firstborn. 

Life. 

Life. 

A.  M. 

A.  M. 

Adam, 

130 

800 

930 

1 

930 

Seth, 

105 

807 

912 

130 

1042 

Enosh, 

90 

815 

905 

235 

1140 

Kenan, 

70 

840 

910 

325 

1235 

Mahalalel. 

65 

830 

895 

395 

1290 

Jared, 

162 

800 

962 

460 

1422 

Enoch, 

65 

300 

365 

622 

987 

Methuselah, 

187 

782 

969 

687 

1656 

Lamech, 

182 

595 

777 

874 

1651 

Noah, 

500 

450 

950 

•    1056 

2006 

To  the  Flood  =  UlO  years. 

From  Adam  to  the  Flood  ==  1656  years. 

1656  A.  M.  =  Shem's  98th  year. 

,11.  The  Postdiluvian  Patriarchs. 

Table  to  Gen.  Ch.  11.  Comp.  Chs.  21,  25,  29,  31,  35,  47. 
According  to  the  Hebrew  Text. 


Names  of 

Age  at  birth 

Remainder 

Whole  dur- 

Year of 

Year  of 

the 

of 

of 

ation  of 

birth 

death 

Patriarchs. 

Firstborn. 

Life. 

Life. 

A<  M. 

A.  M. 

Shem, 

100 

500 

600 

1558 

2158 

Arpachshad 

35 

403 

438 

1658 

2097 

Shelah, 

30 

403 

433 

1693 

2126 

Eber, 

34 

430 

464 

1723 

2187 

Peleg, 

30 

209 

239 

1757 

•1996 

Reu, 

32 

207 

239 

1787 

2026 

Seriig, 

30 

200 

230 

1819 

2045 

Nahor, 

29 

119 

148 

1849 

1997 

Terah, 

70 

135 

205 

1878 

2083 

Abrani, 

100 

75 

175 

1948 

2123 

Isaac, 

60 

120 

180 

2048 

2228 

Jacob, 

65 

82 

147 

2108 

2255 

INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  39 


EXODUS. 

I.  Name.—  We-elleli  she  moth  =  A)id  these  the  names. 
According  to  the  Jews  this  name  is  given  to  the  Book 
from  its  opening  words.  Fiom  the  Vulgate  we  have 
the  name  Exodus,  so  called  from  the  chief  event  related 
in  it,  i.  e.  the  departure  of  the  Israelites  from   Egypt. 

II.  Position.— The  connection  between  the  Book  of 
Exodus  and  that  of  Genesis  is  close.  Exodus  contin- 
ues the  historical  account  with  which  Genesis  closes. 
In  Genesis  God  enters  into  covenant  with  Abraham, 
promising  him  that  his  posterity  shall  inherit  the  land 
of  Canaan,  and  that  in  his  seed  all  the  families  of  the 
earth  should  be  blessed.  In  the  same  Book,  however, 
this  promise  is  followed  by  the  statement  to  Abraham 
that  befoie  his  descendants  shall  possess  that  land, 
they  shall  be  strangers  in  another,  in  which  they  shall 
serve  and  be  afflicted,  that  this  nation  whom  they 
served  God  would  judge,  after  which  they  should  come 
forth  with  great  substance  in  the  fourth  generation. 
To  this  corresponds  the  first  chapter  of  Exodus,  and 
thus  the  connection. 

III.  Tlieme.— The  Book  treats  of  the  history  of  the 
Israelites  as  a  nation  from  the  death  of  Joseph  to  the 
erection  of  the  Tabernacle  by  Moses  in  the  second  year 
of  the  Exodus.  It  opens  with  a  reference  to  Jacob's 
descent  into  Egypt,  after  which  follows  the  historical 
account  of  the  oppression  of  the  Israelites,  their  deliv- 
eiance  from  the  Egyptians  through  the  divinely  com- 
missioned Moses,  the  wanderings  in  the  desert,  the 
giving  of  the  law  from  Sinai,  the  instructions  for  build- 


40  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

ing  the  altars  of  sacrifice  and  the  tabernacle,  and  vari- 
ous precepts. 

IV.  Authorship.— See  Authorship  under  Genesis. 

V.  Divisions.— The  Book  divides  itself  into  three 
principal  parts  which  m^y  be  respectively  titled — 
Bondage,  Redemption,  Establishment; — as  follows: 

1.  Chs.  1-11.  Bondage.  Events  preliminary  to  the 
deliverance  of  the  Israelites  from  Egypt. 

2.  Chs.  12-19:2.  Redemption.  The  last  plague, 
the  departure  of  the  Israelites  from  Egypt,  and  their 
journey  to  Sinai. 

3.  Chs.  19:3-40:38.  Establishment.  Israel  at 
Sinai.     The  establishment  of  the  Theocracy. 

VI.  Contents.-l.  Chs.  1,  2.  Increase  of  Jacob's 
posterity  in  Egypt.  Measures  instituted  by  a  new 
king  to  check  this  increase.  Birth,  education  and 
flight  of  Moses. 

2.  Chs.  3,  4.  The  divine  call  of  Moses  to  be  the 
deliverer  of  Israel,  and  his  return  to  Egypt  in  obe- 
dience to  this  call. 

3.  Ch.  5:1-21.  The  first  attempt  on  the  part  Of 
Moses  and  Aaron  to  prevail  upon  Pharoah  to  let  the 
Israelites  go  results  only  in  increasing  the  Israelites' 
burdens. 

4.  Chs.  5 :  22-7 :  7.  Additional  pieparation  of  Moses 
and  Aaron  for  their  mission,  together  with  a  table  of 
their  genealogies. 

5.  Chs.  7:8-11:10.  Narrative  of  the  successive 
signs  and  plagues  by  which  the  deliverance  of  Israel 
from  Egypt  was  effected. 

6.  Chs.  12,  13.  I'he  last  phigue;  the  departure 
from  Egypt.  The  institution  of  the  Passover,  and  the 
feast  of   Unleavened  Bread.     The  death  of  the  first- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  41 

born.  The  journey  from  Ramses  to  Succoth.  The 
law  respecting  the  dedication  of  the  firslborn.  The 
march  from.  Succoth  to  Etham. 

7.  Chs.  14,  15.  The  passage  of  the  Red  Sea.  Moses's 
song  of  triumph.     The  journey  to  Marah  and  Elim. 

8.  Chs.  16-18.  The  journey  from  Elim  to  Sinai. 
The  quails  and  manna;  the  miraculous  supply  of 
water  at  Rephidim.  The  conflict  with  Amalek.  The 
arrival  of  Jethro  and  the  council  given  by  him  to 
Moses  respecting  the  civil  government  of  the  people. 

9.  Chs.  19-24: 11..  The  establishment  of  the  Theoc- 
racy at  Sinai  on  the  basis  of  the  Ten  Commandments, 
and  of  a  code  of  laws  regulating  the  social  life  and 
religious  observances  of  the  people  called  the  Book  of 
the  Covenant;  followed  by  the  promise  of  an  angel  to 
guide  the  people,  and  the  people's  ratiflcation  of  the 
Covenant. 

10.  Chs.  24:12-31:18.  Instructions  to  Moses  on 
Sinai  respecting  the  tabernacle,  the  ark,  the  mercy 
seat,  the  altar  of  burnt  offering,  the  consecration  of 
Aaron  and  his  sons  as  priests,  the  altar  of  incense,  the 
laver,  the  holy  oil,  the  selection  of  Bezaleel  and  Oho- 
liab  to  execute  the  skilled  work  that  was  necessary  and 
the  deliverance  to  Moses  of  the  two  Tables  of  the  Law. 

11.  Chs.  32-34.  The  incident  of  the  golden  calf; 
the  intercession  of  Moses  on  behalf  of  the  people,  and 
the  renewal  of  the  covenant. 

12.  Chs.  35,  40.  The  construction  of  the  Taber- 
nacle and  its  appurtenances  in  accordance  with  the 
•directions  given,  and  its  erection  on  the  first  day  of 
the  second  year  of  the  Exodus. 

VII.  Doctrine.— The  doctrines  more  prominently 
l^rought  out  in  the  Book  of  Exodus  are 


42  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

1.  Redemption  through  the  shedding  of  blood. 

2.  The  theocratic  organization  of  the  redeemed. 

0.  Divine  law  requiring  man's  obedience. 

4.   Divine  ordinances  regulating  man's  worship. 

VIII.  Messianic— The  book  of  Exodus  contains  no 
direct  Messianic  Proj)hecy.  There  is  unquestionably, 
however,  a  strong  Messianic  element  of  a  typological 
character.     The  types  of  Scripture  may  be  classihed  as 

1.  Personal;  that  is,  Scripture  characters  whose 
lives  illustrate  some  truth  or  principle  of  redemption; 
and  in  so  far  point  forward  to  the  peisonal  Redeemer, 
who  is  the  antitype.  Such,  e.  y.  are  Adam,  Melchize- 
dek,  Abraham  in  the  Book  of  Genesis,  and  Moses,. 
Aaron,  the  Priest  in  the  Book  of  Exodus. 

2.  Historical;  that  is,  where  great  historical  events 
are  made  to  foreshadow  the  greater  things  that  are  to 
come;  as,  e.  g.  the  deliverance  from  Egj^pt,  the 
wilderness  journey,  the  conquest  of  Canaan,  etc. 

3.  Institutional;  such,  e.  g.  as  the  passover,  the 
priesthood,  the  altar,  the  sacrifices,  etc. 

Tlie  types  of  Genesis  are  for  the  most  part  personal 
and  historical;  while  those  of  Exodus  are  found  under 
all  three  heads  of  the  classification.  Thus  we  have 
personal  types,  as,  e.  g.  Moses  and  Aaron ;  historical 
types,  as,  e.  g.  the  deliverance  from  Egypt,  and  the 
wilderness  journey;  institutional  types;  as,  e.  g.  the 
priesthood,  and  the  sacrifices.  The  great  truth,  doc- 
trine taught  b}^  the  types  of  Exodus  is — redemption  ta 
God  by  blood  and  through  a  personal  Redeemer.  The 
blood  of  the  paschal  lamb  is  at  the  basis  of  Israel's 
relation  with  God,  while  it  also  prefigured  the  redemp- 
tion that  Christ  was  to  accomplish.  Ex.  15: 13,  16,  17; 
1  Cor.  5:7. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  43 

TABLE  OF   SACRED  SEASONS,    FEASTS,    SACRIFICES. 

See   Ex.  Chs.  12,  13,  23,  34.     Lev.   Chs.  2,  4,  5,  6,  13,  14,  15, 
17,  19,  23.     Num.   Chs.  9,  15,  19,  28,  29.     Deut.   Ch.   16. 

I.  Sacred  Seasons  and  Feasts. 

-  1.   The  Sabbath.     Gen.  2:2.  3.     Ex.  20:8-11. 

a.  The  Sabbatical  Month,  i.  e.  7th  month. 

b.  The  Sabbatical  Year,  i.  e.  7th  year. 

c.  The  Year  of  Jubilee,  /.  e.  the  50th  year,  following  7X7. 

2.  The  Passover.     Ex.  Ch.  12. 

3.  The  Feast  of  Unleavened  Bread.  Ex.  Chs.  12,  13.  Lev.  23. 
Num.  28.     Deut.  16. 

4.  The  Feast  of  Weeks  or  Pen teeost.  Lev.  Chs.  15,  23.  Num. 
Ch.  28. 

~  5.   The  Feast  of  Tabernacles.     Lev.  Ch.  23.     Num.  Ch.  29. 

—  6.   The  Neiv  Moon,  or  Trumpets.     Num.   10: 10. 

7.  The  Day  of  Atonement.  Ex.  Ch.  30.  Lev.  Chs.  16,  23. 
Num.  Ch.  29. 

8.  The  Feast  of  Purim.  One  of  the  later  feasts.  Esth.  3:7, 
13;  9:24,  27. 

9.  The  Feast  of  Dedication.  A  late  feast.  Dates  from  the 
reconsecration  of  the  altar  and  temple  at  Jerusalem  after  their 
defilement  by  Antiochus  Epiphanes. 

II.  Sacrifices,  Offerings,  etc. 

A.  Classified  :  Animal  and  vegetable,  or  bloody  and  unbloody 
offerings. 

1.   The  Vegetable  Offerings:  included 

a.  The  regular  meal  and  drink  offering.     See  below. 

b.  The  first  sheaf  at  the  Passover. 

c.  The  shew  bread,  and  the  pentecostal  loaves. 

B.  Animal  Sacrifices.     The  ceremony  of  offering  required 

a.  The  presentation  of  the  victim. 

b.  The  laying  on  of  hands  by  the  offerer. 

c.  The  slaying  of  the  victim. 

d.  The  sprinkling  of  the  blood  of  the  victim. 

e.  The  burning  of  some  part  of  the  animal  on  the  altar. 
These  Animal  sacrifices  included. 

1.  The  Burnt  Offering.     Lev.  Chs.  8,  9,  14,  etc. 


44  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

2.  The  Peace  or  Thank  Offering.  Two  kinds,  required  and 
voluntary. 

3.  The  Sin  Offering.  Lev.  Chs.  4,  5.  Ideas; — atonement, 
satisfaction,  restitution. 

4.  The  Trespass  or  Guilt  Offering.  Idea; — atonement,  expia- 
tion.    Offered  for 

a.  Unwitting  sin  as  to  "  holy  things."     Lev,  5: 15,  16. 
h.  Unintentional  transgression  of  a  divine  command.     Lev. 
5:17-19. 

c.  Unjust  treatment  of  a  neighbor.     Lev.  6:  2-7. 

d.  Criminal  intercourse  indicated  in  Lev.  19: 20-22. 

e.  In  the  ceremony  for  purifying  a  leper.     Lev.  Ch.  14. 
/.  In  case  of  defilement  of  a  Nazarite.     Num.  6 : 6-12. 

g.  In  case  of  men  who  had  married  foreign  wives.    Ezra  10:19. 

C.  "Holy"  and  "Most  Holy"  Offerings. 

1.  Most  Holy;  e.  g.  burnt,  sin  and  trespass  offering,  and  the 
lambs  at  pentecost  for  a  public  peace  offering. 

2.  Holy;  e.  g.  the  remaining  public  peace  offerings. 

D.  The  Meal  Offerings.     Two  kinds,  viz. : 

1.  Those  constituting  offerings  of  themselves,  viz.: 
a.  The  offering  mentioned  in  Lev.  2:1-3.     Voluntary. 
h.  The  oblation  mentioned  in  Lev.  2 : 4.     Voluntary. 

c.  Similar  offering  mentioned  in  Lev.  2:  5.  6.     Voluntary. 

d.  The  meal  offering  mentioned  in  Lev.  2:  7.     Voluntary. 

e.  The  meal  offering  of  first  fruits.  Lev.  2:14—16.  Voluntary. 
/.  The  meal  offering  of  jealousy.  Num.  Ch.  5.  Voluntary. 
g.  The  sin  offering  of  poverty.     Lev.  5:11-13.     Required. 

h.  The  consecration,  and  daily  offering  of  the  high  priest. 
Lev.  6:19-23.     Required. 

i.  The  meal  offering  in  purification  of  a  leper.  Lev.  14: 10,  20. 
Required. 

2.  Those  brought  with  and  as  accompaniments  of  other  offer- 
ings, i.  e.  with 

a.  The  daily  morning  and  evening  sacrifices. 
h.  The  additional  daily  festival  sacrifices  including  the  Sab  - 
bath. 

c.  The  burnt  offering  on  presenting  the  first  fruits  at  passover 
and  pentecost. 

d.  The  burnt  and  sin  offerings  for  the  unwitting  sin  of  the 
congregation. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  45 

e.  The  Nazarite's  offering  upon  completing  his  vow. 

E.  The  Daily  Sacrifices.     They  were 

a.  A  burnt  offering  of  a  lamb  with  its  meal  offering. 
h.  The  meal  offering  of  the  high  priest. 

c.  The  offering  of  incense  at  the  altar  of  incense. 

d.  The  drink  offering  for  the  preceding  meal  offering. 

e.  On  the  Sabbath  two  lambs,  burnt  offerings,  with  meal  and 
drink  offerings, 

F.  Ceremonial  Purifications.     Three  kinds  of  ceremonial  im- 
purities required  animal  sacrifices,  viz. : 

a.  Contact  with  the  dead  of  men  or  animals.     Num.  19: 1-22. 
h.  Leprosy  in  men.  houses  or  clothing.     Lev.  Chs.  13,  14. 
c.  Morbid  fluxes  of  the  human  body.     Lev.  Ch.  15. 

G.  Vows.     Not  required   but  regulated  by   Scripture.     Two 
kinds,  viz.: 

a.  Positive  vows:— the  dedication  of  something  to  Jehovah. 
Gen.  28 :  20-22. 

h.  Negative  Vows: — abstaining    from  something    to    honor 
Jehovah,  e.  g.  Nazaiite  vow. 
H.   Circumcision. 


LEVITICUS. 

I.  Name.—  Wa-  Yikrah  =  And  he  called.  The  Book 
is  so  called  by  the  Jews  from  its  opening  word.  The 
name  Leviticus  comes  from  the  Vulgate,  and  is  so 
called  because  the  Book  treats  mainly  of  the  Levitical 
service. 

II.  Position.— The  Sinaitic  legislation,  begun  in  Ex- 
odus, is  further  developed  in  Leviticus.  The  taberna- 
cle being  built,  and  Aaron  and  his  sons  being  ready  for 
the  consecration  to  the  divine  service,  Moses  issues  in- 
structions relative  to  the  offerings  to  be  made  to  Jeho- 
vah, and  sets  forth  the  duties  of  the  priests. 


46  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

III.  Theme.— Priestly  legislation  as  to  divine  service. 

IV.  Authorship.— See  Authorshiji  under  Genesis. 

V.  Divisions.— The  main  divisions  of  the  Book  are: 

1.  Chs.  1-7.     The  law  of  sacrifice. 

2.  Chs.  8-10.     The  law  of  priestly  consecration. 

3.  Chs.  11-16.     The  law  of  purification. 

4.  Chs.  17-20.     ^J^he  law  of  holiness. 

5.  Chs.  21-25.     The  law  of  priestly  purity. 

6.  Ch.  26.     The  law  of  obedience. 

7.  Ch.  27.     The  law  of  vows  and  tithes. 

VI.  Contents.-l.   Ch.  1.     The  burnt  offering. 

2.  Ch.  2.     The  meal  offering. 

3.  Ch.  3.     The  peace  offering. 

4.  Ch.  4.  The  (unintentional)  sin  offering:  includ- 
ing— a.  The  sin  of  the  chief  priest,  b.  The  sin  of  the 
whole  people,  c.  The  sin  of  a  ruler,  d.  The  sin  of 
an  ordinary  Israelite. 

5.  Ch.  5.  Examples:  including — a.  Regulations  as 
to  the  sin  offering,  h.  Regulations  as  to  the  guilt  offer- 
ing. 

6.  Chs.  6,  7.  Priestly  directions:  including — a.  Di- 
rections in  sacrificing  the  burnt  offering,  b.  Directions 
in  sacrificing  the  meal  offering,  c.  The  High  Priest's 
daily  meal  offering,  d.  Directions  to  be  observed  in 
the  sin  offering,  e.  Rites  as  to  the  guilt  offering. 
/.  The  peace  offering,  g.  Things  not  to  be  eaten. 
h.   Historical  subscription  to  these  commands. 

7.  Chs.  8-10.  The  consecration  and  inauguration  of 
the  priests:  including — a.  Ch.  8.  Aaron  and  his  sons 
consecrated  according  to  Ex.  29 : 1-37.  b.  Ch.  9.  Aa- 
ron and  his  sons  enter  upon  their  office,  c.  Ch.  10 : 1-7. 
Punishment  of  Nadab  and  Abihu.  d.  Ch.  10:8-11. 
Priestly  prohibition  as  to  wine  while  officiating,     e.   Ch. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  47 

10:12-15.  Tlie  priest's  i)ort ion  in  the  meal  offerings 
and  peace  offerings.  /.  Ch.  10:1(1-20.  The  flesh  of 
the  people's  sin   offei'ing  to  be  eaten   by  the  priests. 

8.  Chs.  11-1(3.  Laws  of  purification  and  atonement : 
Including — a.  Ch.  11.  Clean  and  unclean  animals. 
b.  Ch.  12.  Purification  after  childbirth,  c.  Chs.  13, 
14.  Diagnosis,  kinds  and  purification  of  leprosy. 
d.  Ch.  15.  Purification  after  certain  natural  secre- 
tions, e.  Ch.  16.  Rules  as  to  the  observance  of  the 
Day  of  Atonement. 

9.  Chs.  17-20.  Israel's  law  of  holiness  distinguish- 
ing it  from  heathen  nations :  including — a.  Ch.  17 : 1-^9. 
Animal  sacrifices  to  be  offered  at  the  central  sanctuary. 
h.  Ch.  17:10-16.  Blood  and  the  flesh  of  animals 
dying  naturally,  or  torn  by  beasts,  not  to  be  eaten, 
c.  Ch.  18.  Unlawful  marriages,  unchastity  and  Mo- 
lech  worship,  d.  Ch.  19.  Laws  regulating  religious 
aud  moral  conduct,  e.  Ch.  20.  Penalties  for  trans- 
gressions of  the  law  of  holiness. 

10.  Ch.  21,  22.  Rules  concerning  priests  and  offer- 
ings: including — a.  Ch.  21:1-15.  Rules  relative  to 
domestic  life.  5.  Ch.  21 :  16-24.  Priestly  rules  as  to 
bodily  perfection,  c.  Ch.  22:  1-16.  Conditions  of  par- 
taking of  sacrificial  food.  d.  Ch.  22:17-25.  Perfec- 
tion of  sacrificial  animals,  e.  Ch.  22 :  26-30.  Special 
injunctions  touching  sacrifices.  /.  Ch.  22:31-33. 
Closing  appeal. 

11.  Ch.  23.  The  calendar  offcasts;  including — a. 
Ch.  23: 1-8.  The  Sabbath  and  unleavened  bread,  h. 
Ch.  23  :  9-14.  The  sheaf  of  first  fruits,  c.  Ch.  23  :  15- 
22.  Feast  of  Weeks,  d.  Ch.  23:  23-25.  New  Year's 
Day.  e.  Ch.  23 :  26-32.  Day  of  Atonement.  /.  Ch. 
23:33-36.     Feast  of  Booths  or  Tabernacles,     g.   Ch. 


48  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

23:H7,   38.     Subscription,     h.   Ch.    28:39-43.      Addi- 
tional instructions  as  to  the  Feast  of  Booths. 

12.  Ch.  24.  Treats  of —a.  Ch.  24:1-4.  The  lamps^ 
in  tlie  Tabernacle,  h.  Ch.  24:5-9.  The  Shewbread. 
c.  Ch.  24:10-23.  Laws  relative  to  blasphemy,  and 
certain  cases  of  injury. 

13.  Ch.  25.  Treats  of— a.  Ch.  25:1-7.  The  Sab- 
batical years,  h.  Ch.  25:8-55.  The  year  of  Jubilee, 
followed  by  instructions  relative  to  the  right  of  re- 
demption and  usury. 

14.  Ch.  26.  Treats  of— a.  Ch.  26:1,  2.  The  pro- 
hibition of  idolatry  and  the  observance  of  the  Sab- 
bath, b.  Ch.  26:3-45.  Exhortation  following  the 
deliverance  of  the  foregoing  code.  c.  Ch.  26:46. 
Subscription. 

15.  Ch.  27.     Regulations  relative  to  vows  and  tithes. 

VII.  Doctrine.— The  doctrines  more  especially  em- 
phasized in  the  Book  of  Leviticus  are 

1.  Access  to  God  through  mediatorial  agencies. 

2.  Sin,  before  and  after  justification,  and  its  deserts. 

3.  The  holiness  of  God,  and  the  holiness  that  God 
requires  through  the  sanctification  of  the  people. 

VIII.  Messianic. —As  in  the  Book  of  Exodus,  so  in 
the  Book  of  Leviticus  there  is  no  direct  Messianic 
prophecy ;  but  there  is  a  pervading  and  complex  Messi- 
anic element  of  a  typological  character.  Tlie  priest, 
the  altar,  the  victim,  the  blood,  the  fire,  the  water, 
the  incense,  etc.,  all,  declaring  by  their  very  nature 
and  multiplicity  their  own  insufficiency,  point  for- 
ward to  Him  who  was  Priest,  and  Offerer,  and  Vic- 
tim in  one,  and  who  in  his  person,  and  by  his  work, 
became  the  one  efficient  Mediator  between  God  and 
man,  the  man  Jesus  Christ.     He  was  the  substitution, 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  49 

as  the  life  of  the  Levitical  victim  was  substituted  for 
that  of  the  offender.  He  received  the  imputation  of 
the  punishment  due  the  sinner,  as  the  head  of  the 
Levitical  victim  received  the  imputed  penalty  of  the 
guilty  party  by  the  symbolic  laying  on  of  the  liands  of 
the  offerer.  And  as  the  Levitical  victim  was  slain  in 
the  execution  of  the  penalty  incurred  by  the  offender, 
so  He  suffered  death  for  the  sinner.  John  10: 11,  17, 
18;  Heb.  10:10;  11:14;  Gal.  2:20. 
See  Messianic  under  Exodus. 


NUMBERS. 

I.  'Saine.—Bemidbar^=In  the  desert.  The  Book  is 
so  called  by  the  Jews  from  the  fifth  word  of  the  first 
verse;  sometimes  called  JVayedaber  ==  And  he  said, 
from  the  first  word  of  ver.  1.  Called  in  the  LXX 
Arithmoi,  and  in  the  Vulgate  Numeri,  hence  the 
name  Numbers.  So  cnlled  from  the  double  enumera- 
tion of  the  Israelites  in  Chs.  1-4  and  26. 

II.  Position.— The  Book  of  Numbers  continues  the 
historical  narrative  of  the  Israelites  to  the  fortieth  year 
of  the  Exodus.  The  Book  opens  on  the  first  day  of 
the  second  month  in  the  second  year.  There  follows 
an  account  of  the  departure  from  Sinai;  the  arrival  in 
the  wilderness  of  Paran  (or  Kadesh) ;  the  mission  of 
the  spies;  the  defeat  at  Hormah;  the  arrival  in  the 
desert  of  Zin  (or  Kadesh) ;  and  Aaron's  death. 

III.  Theme.— The  history  of  Israel  from  the  time  of 

[4J 


50  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

the  departure  from  Sinai  to  the  arrival  at  the  frontiers 
of  the  Promised  Land. 

IV.  Authorship.— See  Aidhorship  under  Genesis. 

V.  Divisions.— The  main  divisions  of  the  Book  are 

1.  Chs.  1 :  1-10:  10.     Preparations  for  leaving  Sinai. 

2.  Chs.  10:11-14:45.  The  journe}'  from  Sinai  to 
the  borders  of  the  Promised  Land. 

3.  Chs.  15-19.  Legal  enactments,  and  historical 
events. 

4.  Chs.  20-36.     The  history  of  the  last  year. 

VI.  Contents.— 1.  Ch.  1.  Census  of  the  twelve 
tribes  exclusive  of  the  Levites.  Result  of  this  census, 
number  of  males  above  twenty  years  old,  603,550. 
The  Levites,  not  included  in  this  census,  are  appointed 
guardians  of  the  Tabernacle,  and  located  in  the  center 
of  the  camp. 

2.  Ch.  2.  Position  of  the  tribes  in  the  camp,  and 
their  order  on  the  march. 

3.  Chs.  3,  4.  Separate  census  of  the  Levites,  who 
are  delegated  to  assist  the  priests,  in  lieu  of  the  first- 
born, in  doing  the  service  of  the  Tabernacle.  Their 
number,  position  and  duties. 

4.  Chs.  5,  6.  Laws  relative  to — a.  Exclusion  of  the 
unclean  from  the  camp.  h.  Restitutions  to  be  made 
to  the  priest.  c.  Wifely  unfaithfulness.  d.  The 
Nazarites.     e.   Form  of  priestly  benediction. 

5.  Ch.  7.  Offerings  of  the  twelve  princes  of  the 
tribes  at  the  dedication  of  the  Tabernacle,  viz.  a. 
Six  litters  for  the  transport  of  the  materials  of  the 
Tabernacle  by  the  Gershomites  and  Merarites.  h. 
Vessels  for  use  at  the  altar,  and  animals  for  sacrifice. 

6.  Ch.  8.  Instructions  relative  to — a.  The  superin- 
tendence of  the  golden  candlestick,     b.  The  consecra- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  51 

tion  of  the  Levites  to  their  service,  c.  The  term  of 
service  for  the  Levites,  i.  e.  from  twenty-five  to  Mty 
years  of  age. 

7.  Ch.  9.  Treats  of — a.  A  second  observance  of 
the  Passover  a  month  after  the  general  observance  of 
the  Passover  at  the  regular  time,  and  for  the  benefit  of 
those  who  were  prevented,  by  defilement,  from  ob- 
serving it  at  the  regular  time.  h.  The  regulations  of 
the  march  and  halt  by  the  cloud  and  fire. 

8.  Ch.  lU.  Treats  of— a.  The  use  of  the  silver 
trumpets  in  giving  signals  for  marches,  halts,  assem- 
blies, wars  and  festivals,  h.  Departure  from  Sinai, 
and  the  order  of  the  march,  c.  Services  of  Hobab, 
father-in-law  of  Moses,  secured  as  guide  through  the 
wilderness,  d.  The  chant  accompanying  the  moving 
and  resting  of  the  ark. 

9.  Chs.  11,  12.  Treat  of — a.  The  murmurings  of 
the  people  at  Taberah  and  Kibroth-hattaavali.  h.  The 
appointment  of  seventy  elders  to  assist  Moses,  c. 
Quails  sent  to  satisfy  the  people,  d.  The  Leprosy  of 
Miriam. 

10.  Chs.  13,  11.  The  spies  and  the  people:  em- 
bracing the  sending  of  the  spies;  their  report;  the  peo- 
ple's refusal  to  enter  Canaan ;  their  consequent  rejec- 
tion; their  rash  attack  upon  the  Amalekites;  their 
defeat. 

11.  Ch.  15.  Treats  of — a.  Enactments  relative  to 
the  Meal  and  Drink  offerings  and  other  sacrifices. 
h.  An  example  of  punishment  for  Sabbath-breaking, 
c.   Instructions  as  to  "  fringes  "  or  "  tassels." 

12.  Chs.  IG,  17.  Narrative  of  the  rebellion  of  Korah, 
Dathan  and  Abiram,  followed  by  a  confirmation  of  the 
priestly  prerogatives  enjoyed  by  the  tribe  of  Levi. 


52  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

13.  Ch.  18.  Treats  of — a.  Duties  and  relative  posi- 
tions of  priests  and  Levites.  h.  Revenues  of  the 
priests  defined,     c.  Tithes. 

14.  Ch.  19.  Instructions  as  to  purification  after  de- 
filement. 

15.  Chs.  20: 1-22:  1.  Death  of  Miriam ;  murmurings 
of  the  people  for  water;  sin  of  Moses  and  Aaron  at 
Meribah ;  Edom's  refusal  to  pass  the  Israelites ;  death 
of  Aaron,  and  investiture  of  Eleazar  as  his  successor; 
defeat  of  the  king  Arad;  impatience  of  the  people;  the 
brazen  serpent ;  Sihou's  refusal  to  pass  Israel ;  defeat 
of  Sihon  and  Og;  arrival  at  the  plains  of  Moab. 

16.  Chs.  22 :  2-24 :  25.     History  of  Balaam. 

17.  Ch.  25.  The  fall  of  Israel  into  idolatry  and  im- 
morality.    The  zeal  of  Phinehas  rewarded. 

18.  Ch.  26.  Second  census  of  Israel.  Number  of 
males  above  twenty  years  old,  and  exclusive  of  the 
Levites,  601,730.  Number  of  Levites,  niales,  from  one 
month  old,  23,000. 

19.  Ch.  27.  Treats  of — a.  Legislation  respecting 
the  inheritance  of  daughters,  h.  Moses  warned  of  his 
death,  and  Joshua  appointed  his  successor. 

20.  Chs.  28,  29.     Calendar  of  sacrifices. 

21.  Ch.  30.     The  law  of  vows. 

22.  Ch.  31.     The  conquest  of  Midian. 

23.  Ch.  32.  Apj)ortionment  of  the  transjordanic  ter- 
ritory to  the  tribes  of  Gad,  Reuben,  and  the  half  tribe 
of  Manasseh. 

24.  Ch.  33.  Review  of  the  journey  from  Ramses  to 
the  plains  of  Moab  followed  by  instructions  as  to  the 
occupation  of  Canaan. 

24.  Ch.  34.  Boundaries  of  Canaan  and  the  names 
of  those  appointed  to  allot  its  territory. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  53 

26.  Ch.  35.  Appointmeut  of  forty-eight  cities  for 
the  Levites,  and  of  six  among  them,  three  on  each  side 
of  the  Jordan,  as  Cities  of  Refuge  with  regulations  per- 
taining thereto. 

27.  Ch.  36.     Regulations  respecting  heiresses. 
VII.  Doctrine.— The  doctrines  more  especially  em- 
phasized are 

1.  Divine  Providence; — as  witnessed  in  the  main- 
tenance of  the  host  of  Israel,  for  forty  years,  in  the 
wilderness  of  the  wanderings. 

2.  Divine  Law; — its  transgression,  penalty,  remedy, 
so  abundantly  illustrated  in  this  Book. 

3.  The  pilgrim  life  of  the  people  of  God;  defining  at 
once  the  character  of  this  world,  and  implying  the  exist- 
ence of  another. 

VII E.  Messianic— The  direct  Messianic  prophecy  in 
the  Book  of  Numbers  is  that  uttered  by  Balaam  in 
24: 15-19  concerning  the  people  of  God  as  constituting 
a  theocratic  kingdom,  whose  Messianic  Ruler  is  yet  to 
appear,  and  to  whose  scepter  all  nations  will  be  sub- 
dued. 


DEUTERONOMY. 

I.  'Name,— Elleh  Hadharim  =  These  tJie  ivords.  This 
title  of  the  Book  is  taken  from  its  initial  words.  The 
English  title  Deuteronomy  like  the  LXX  and  Vulgate 
is  derived  from  the  inexact  rendering  of  the  words  in 
17: 18  Mishna  liaftorah  Jta.zoth  =  a  repetition  or  dupli- 
cate of  this  Icno. 

II.  Position.— The  Book  records  the  events  of   the 


54  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

last  month  of  the  fort^^-years  wanderings  of  the  Israel- 
ites, and  so  directly  connects  itself  with  what  precedes 
in  the  history  of  the  nation.  The  Book  closes  with  the 
termination  of  Moses's  mission  as  the  hero  of  that  his- 
tory. 

III.  Theme.— The  discourses  of  Moses  to  the  Israel- 
ites on  the  boi'dersof  the  Promised  Land,  and  just  pre- 
vious to  his  death.  These  discourses  set  before  the 
people  the  laws  which  they  are  to  obey,  and  the  spirit 
in  which  they  are  to  obey  them,  when  they  are  settled 
in  the  Promised  Land. 

IV.  Authorship.— See  Aidhorshlp  under  Genesis. 

V.  Divisions.— The  general  divisions  of  the  Book  are 

1.  Chs.  1:  1-4:43.  Historical  introduction,  first  dis- 
course, and  historical  appendix. 

2.  Chs.  4 :  44-20 :  19.  Historical  introduction,  second 
discourse,  and  hortatory  appendix. 

3.  Chs.  27:1-34:12.  Historical  introduction,  third 
discourse,  and  historical  appendix. 

VI.  Contents.— 1.  Ch.  1:1-5.  Historical  introduc- 
tion setting  forth  as  to  the  discourses  following, — the 
speaker,  persons  addressed,  place  where,  and  time  when 
the\^  were  delivered.  Speaker,  Moses;  persons  ad- 
dressed, all  Israel;  place,  the  land  of  Moab;  time,  the 
eleventh  month  of  the  last  year  of  their  wanderings, 
i.  e.  the  fortieth  year  after  their  Exodus  from  Egypt. 

2.  Chs.  1 :  G-4:  40.  First  discourse  of  Moses  consist- 
ing of — a.  A  review  of  the  events  of  the  forty-years 
wanderings,  particularl}'  those  events  that  had  a  more 
especial  bearing  upon  their  occupancy  of  the  Promised 
Land.  h.  An  enumeration  of  the  campaigns  in  which 
they  had  been  engaged,  and  in  which  their  victories 
had  always  depended  upon  their  obedience ;  the  under- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  55 

lying  pi'ineiple  of  which  oMoses  illustrates  by  reminding 
them  of  the  exclusion  of  the  former  generation  from  the 
Promised  Land  on  account  of  disobedience,  and  also 
the  like  exclusion  of  himself,  not  so  much  however  be- 
cause he  was  disobedient,  but  because  "  the  Lord  was 
wroth  with  meforyour  sakes."  c.  Upon  the  basis  of  this 
past  history,  experience,  Moses  concludes  with  a  prac- 
tical and  powerful  appeal  to  remember  and  obey  the 
divine  commandment  impressed  upon  them  at  Horeb. 

3.  Cli.  4:41-43.  Historical  appendix  recording  the 
appointment  by  Moses  of  three  Cities  of  Refuge  east  of 
the  Jordan. 

4.  Ch.  4:44-49.  Historical  introduction  to  the  sec- 
ond discourse  of  Moses  as  that  which  is  to  treat  of  the 
legislation  proper,  and  in  view  of  the  occupation  of 
Canaan. 

5.  Chs.  5-2G.  Second  discourse  of  Moses  embracing 
the  legislation  proper,  and  consisting  of  two  principal 
parts: — a.  Chs.  5-11.  The  decalogue,  as  the  basis  of 
the  whole  Mosaic  Code,  and  especially  an  exposition  of 
the  first  commandment,  its  spirit  and  the  spirit  in 
which  it  was  to  be  observed  by  the  nation,  h.  Chs. 
12: 1-26  :  15.  Code  of  special  laws  treating  of — Relig- 
ious Statutes,  Official  Functions,  and  Social  Usages, 
c.  Ch.  26: 16-19.  To  these  two  parts  of  the  chief  dis- 
course, an  appeal  is  added,  urging  obedience  and 
promising  reward. 

6.  Chs.  27-30.  Third  discourse  of  Moses,  closely 
connected  with  the  preceding  discourse,  while  in  it  the 
elders  of  Israel  are  associated  with  Moses.  It  comprises 
a.  Ch.  27.  Description,  in  anticipation,  of  the  accept- 
ance by  the  nation  of  the  preceding  code,  after  taking 
possession  of  Canaan,     h.   Chs.  28 : 1-29  : 1.     In  view  of 


56  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

the  preceding  code,  a  setting  forth  of  the  consequences 
to  follow  its  observance  or  neglect,  c.  Chs.  29  :  2-30 :  20. 
The  body  of  the  final  discoiise  treating  of  the  establish- 
ment of  a  fresh  covenant  between  God  and  the  people, 
the  promise  of  pardon  upon  penitence,  and  the  choice 
set  before  Israel. 

7.  Ch.  31:1-29.  The  farewell  of  Moses  including 
the  commission  of  Joshua,  and  the  delivery  of  the  Deu- 
teronomic  law  to  the  Levitical  priests. 

8.  Chs.  31:30-32:52.  The  song  of  Moses  closing 
with  historical  notices. 

9.  Ch.  33.     The  Blessing  of  Moses. 

10.  Ch.  34.     The  Death  of  Moses. 

VII.  Doctrine.— The  two  principal  doctrinal  teach- 
ings emphasized  are 

1.  Obedience; — its  spirit,  imperativeness  and  bless- 
edness. 

2.  Disobedience; — its  origin,  heinousness  and  entail- 
ment of  misery. 

VIII.  Messianic. -In  Deut.  18:15-19  occurs  the  di- 
rect personal  Messianic  promise  of  the  Prophet  like 
unto  Moses,  wherein  the  Messiah,  as  the  future  Media- 
tor of  salvation,  is  set  forth  in  his  prophetical  character 
as  afterwards  he  is  in  his  kingly. 


JOSHUA. 


I.  Historico-Prophetical  Books.— The  Pentateuch, 
according  to  the  Jews,  constitutes  the  first  great  divis- 
ion of  the  Old  Testament,  and  it  is  called  the  Torah, 
or  The  Law.     The  second  great  division  of  the  Old 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  57 

Testament,  according  to  tiie  Jews,  embraces  the  Books 
of  Joshua,  Judges,  1st  and  2nd  Samuel,  and  1st  and 
2nd  Kings.  The  collective  name  given  to  tlie  Books 
of  this  second  division  Nebeim  Rishonim,  that  is  the 
Earlier  or  Former  Prophets.  The  Pentateuch  con- 
tains an  account  of  the  founding  of  the  Old  Testament 
kingdom  of  God,  and  the  laws  of  that  kingdom  given 
of  God  to  and  through  Moses.  These  Books  of  the 
"Former  Prophets"  trace  the  historical  development 
of  this  kingdom  of  God  from  the  death  of  Moses,  the 
mediator  of  the  old  covenant,  to  the  dissolution  of  the 
kingdom  of  Judah,  and  the  Babjdonian  captivity; — 
a  period  of  nearly  nine  hundred  years.  These  Books 
are  called  the  prophetical  Books  of  History,  because, 
in  the  main,  they  describe  the  history  of  the  Old  Tes- 
tament covenant  nation  and  kingdom  of  God  in  the 
light  of  the  divine  plan  of  salvation,  setting  forth  the 
divine  revelation,  as  it  was  accomplished  in  the  his- 
torical development  of  Israel.  Hence  these  Books  do 
not  contain  a  general  history,  a  complete  and  detailed 
account  of  the  natural  development  of  the  Israelii ish 
nation  from  a  political  point  of  view,  but  trace  the 
history  of  the  people  of  God,  or  Israel,  in  its  theocratic 
development  as  a  covenant  nation,  and  as  the  channel 
of  that  salvation  which  was  to  be  manifested  to  all 
nations  in  the  fulness  of  time.  Whatever  has  no 
direct,  vital  connection  with  this  loftier  purpose  and 
peculiar  vocation  of  Israel,  is  omitted,  or  briefly  re- 
ferred to,  and  only  that  recorded  which  affected  bene- 
ficently or  otheiwise  the  development  of  the  divine 
kingdom  in  Israel. 

II.  Name.—  Yehosh uu=  Josli  ua=Jehovah-Sa viour. 
The  Book  of  Joshua  derives  its  name  from  Joshua,  the 


58  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

successor  of  Moses,  and  the  leader  of  the  Israelites  in 
the  conquest  of  Canaan. 

III.  Position.— While  on  the  one  hand  the  Book  of 
Joshua  bears  an  independent  character,  still  it  is  also 
intimately  lelated  to  the  Pentateuch  in  the  nature  of 
its  contents,  in  its  literary  structure,  and  in  its  fur- 
nishing the  account  of  the  final  stage  in  the  historj-  of 
the  Origines  of  the  Hebrew  nation.  It  is  thus  closely 
connected  with  the  Book  of  Deuteronomy  inasmuch  as 
it  is  a  continuation  of  the  history  of  Israel  from  the 
death  of  Moses  to  the  deatli  of  Joshua. 

IV.  Theme. —  Being  ])hophetico-liistorical  the  Book 
of  Joshua  is  not  simply  a  continuation  of  the  history 
of  Israel  under  the  leadership  of  Joshua.  The  chief 
design  of  the  Book  is  to  set  forth  Jehovah's  covenant 
faithfulness  in  the  fulfillment  of  his  promises,  so  that^ 
by  his  almighty  help,  the  people  of  Israel  make  con- 
quest and  take  possession  of  the  land  of  Canaan  as 
their  promised  inheritance. 

V.  Date.— As  to  the  date  of  its  composition,  Joshua 
was  evidently  written  before  the  time  of  Ahab  (915- 
89G  B.  C.)  by  a  comparison  of  Josh.  6:26  with  1  Ki. 
16:34.  It  was  evidently  written  before  the  time  of 
Solomon,  as  at  the  time  of  the  writing  the  Canaanites 
were  still  dwelling  in  Gezer  (Josh.  16:10),  whereas 
during  Solomon's  reign  (1013-973  B.  C),  Pharaoh 
drove  the  Canaanites  from  thence  and  destroyed  them 
(1  Ki.  9  :  16).  As  at  the  time  of  the  writing  of  Joshua 
the  Jebusites  were  still  inhabiting  Jerusalem  (Josh. 
15:63),  whereas  David  drove  the  Jebusites  out  of 
Jerusalem  (2  Sam.  5:6-9),  therefore  the  composition 
of  Joshua  antedates  David's  reign  (1053-1013  B.  C). 
Joshua  was  evidently  written  before  Judges,  inasmuch 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  59 

as  Judges  begins  where  Joshua  leaves  off,  and  inas- 
much as  Judges  seems  to  nuike quotations  fi-om  Joshua, 
and  to  give  abridged  statements  of  liistorieal  incidents 
more  circumstantially  related  in  Joshua.  Moreover 
the  date  of  the  composition  cannot  have  been  many 
years  after  the  death  of  Josliua,  inasmuch  as  the 
writer  in  6:  25  speaks  of  Rahab  in  such  a  manner  as 
to  iinpl}'  that  she  was  still  living;  while  in  5:1  he 
refers  to  himself  as  if  he  were  among  those  who  crossed 
the  Jordan. 

VI.  Authorship. -The  authorship  of  Joshua  cannot 
be  determined  with  certainty.  According  to  Higher 
Criticism  it  proceeded  fioni  the  same  complex  source 
as  the  Pentateucli,  in  the  main  from  the  hands  of  the 
Deuteronomist.  (See  Authorship  under  Genesis.) 
Aside  from  other  considerations,  the  differences  in  lan- 
guage decidedly  antagonize  this  view.  Certain  por- 
tions of  Joshua  were  doubtless  written  by  Joshua 
himself;  and  what  he  wrote  probably  sei-ved  as  the 
basis  for  the  Book  as  we  now  have  it,  the  authorship 
of  which  might  possibly  be  assigned  to  Eleazar  or 
Phi  n  eh  as. 

VII.  Biogrraphy  and  the  Monuments.— Joshua,  the 
assistant  and  successor  of  Moses,  was  the  son  of  Xun, 
of  the  tribe  of  Ephraim,  and  was  born  in  Egypt.  He 
is  first  mentioned  as  being  the  victorious  commander 
of  the  Israelites  in  their  battle  against  the  Amalekites 
at  Rephidim.  Ex.  17:8-16.  He  accompanied  Moses 
part  of  the  way  when  the  latter  ascended  Sinai  to  re- 
ceive for  the  first  time  the  two  Tables  of  the  Law. 
Was  one  of  the  twelve  sent  to  explore  the  land  of 
Canaan  and  one  of  the  two  who  brought  back  a  favor- 
able   report.      Nu.    13:17;  14:6.     Shortly   before  his 


60  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

death,  Moses,  being  so  directed  {Nu.  27:18),  invests 
Joshua  with  definite  authority,  in  connection  with 
Eleazar  the  priest,  over  the  people.  Deut.  3:28. 
After  this  God  directly  charges  Joshua  by  the  mouth 
of  Moses  (Deut.  31:  14,  23),  which  charge  is  renewed 
under  the  direction  of  God  (Josh.  1:1),  whereupon 
Joshua  assumes  command  of  the  people  at  Shittim, 
sends  spies  into  Jericho,  crosses  the  Jordan,  fortifies  a 
camp  at  Gilgal,  circumcises  the  people,  keeps  the 
Passover,  and  is  visited  by  the  Captain  of  the  Lord's 
Host.  The  Book  that  bears  his  name  continues  and 
completes  the  biograph}^  of  Joshua  as  the  hero  of  the 
wars  of  conquest  for  the  possession  of  Canaan. 

One  of  the  most  important  of  recent  discoveries  is 
that  of  the  Tell  Amarna  Tablets  unearthed  in  1887 
from  the  ruins  of  the  palace  of  Amenophis  IV.,  mid- 
way between  Thebes  and  Memphis,  about  180  miles 
by  river  south  of  Cairo,  Egypt.  The  tablets  are  brick, 
dating  about  1480  B.  C,  inscribed  in  Aramaic,  resem- 
bling Assyrian.  The  inscriptions  consist  of  a  large 
mass  of  political  correspondence,  letters  written  by 
Phoenicians,  Amorites  and  Philistines  to  Amenophis 
III.  of  Egypt.  The  events  recorded  in  these  letters 
include  the  conquest  of  Damascus  by  the  Hittites,  of 
Phoenicia  by  the  Amorites,  and  of  Judea  by  the 
Hebrews.  They  refer  to  the  conquest  of  the  country 
between  Mt.  Seir  on  the  east,  Ajalon,  Lachish,  Asca- 
lon  and  Gezer  on  the  west,  and  Shiloh  and  Rimmon  on 
the  north.  They  also  contain  the  name  of  one  of  the 
kings  killed  by  Joshua,  viz.  Japhia  (Josh.  10:3),  and 
also  the  name  of  Jabin,  king  of  Hazor,  whom  Joshua 
attacked  (Josh.  11:1).  In  these  letters  the  Hebrews 
are  called  Ahiri,  and  are  said  to  have  come  from  the 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  (U 

desert,  and  from  Mt.  Seir.  The  date  of  these  letters 
is  exactly  that  which  is  to  be  derived  from  the  Bible, 
1  Ki.  6: 1,  for  the  Hebrew  invasion  of  Canaan. 

VIII.  Divisions.— The  principal  divisions  are  two: — 

1.  Chs.  1-12.  Account  of  the  passage  of  the  Jordan, 
and  the  series  of  victories  by  which  the  conquest  of 
Canaan  was  effected. 

2.  Chs.  13-24.  Account  of  the  distribution  of  the 
land  among  the  tribes,  and  of  the  closing  events  in 
Joshua's  life. 

IX.  Contents.— 1.  Chs.  1,  2.  Preparations  to  cross 
Jordan  and  make  conquest  of  Canaan.  Joshua  divinely 
encouraged.  Promised  help  from  the  2i  east-Jordanic 
tribes.  Mission  of  the  spies  to  Jericho  and  compact 
with  Rahab. 

2.  Chs.  3,  4.  Passage  of  the  Jordan.  Two  monu- 
ments erected  commemorating  the  event.  Gilgal  head- 
quarters of  the  Israelites. 

3.  Chs.  5-8.  Joshua  circumcises  the  people  and  ob- 
serves the  Passover  at  Gilgal.  He  receives  instruc- 
tions as  to  the  conquest  of  Jericho.  The  city  taken 
and  "  devoted,"  Rahab  and  her  household  being 
spared.  Joshua's  advances  against  Ai,  and  is  repulsed 
on  account  of  Achan's  offense.  Achan  having  been 
punished,  Ai  is  possessed.  Joshua  erects  an  altar  on 
Ebal,  and  carries  out  the  instructions  of  Deut. 
27 :  2-8. 

4.  Ch.  9.  The  Gibeonites,  by  craft,  secure  immunity 
for  their  lives,  and  are  retained  in  the  community  as 
slaves. 

5.  Ch.  10.  The  conquest  of  Southern  Canaan. 
Joshua  defeats  at  Beth-horon  the  five  kings  of  Jerusa- 
lem, Heshbon,  Jarmuth,  Lachish,    Eglon.     Afterwards 


62  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

he   gets   possession    of   Makedclah,    Libiiah,    Lachish, 
Gezer,  Eglon,  Hebron,  Debir. 

6.  Ch.  11.  The  conquest  of  Northern  Canaan. 
Joshua  defeats  Jabin,  king-  of  Hazor,  at  the  waters  of 
Merom,  and  takes  the  towns  belonging  to  him.  Re- 
view of  Joshua's  victories. 

7.  Ch.  12.  Supplementary  list  of  kings  defeated  by 
the  Israelites,  east  and  west  of  Jordan. 

8.  Ch.  13.  Being  insti'ucted  Joshua  proceeds  to  dis- 
tribute the  conquered  territory.  Limits  and  cities  of 
the  transjordanic  tribes. 

9.  Ch.  14.  Joshua  and  Eleazar  prepare  to  distribute 
the  land  by  lot.  Caleb  receives  liis  portion  at  Hebron 
according  to  Deut.  1 :  36. 

10.  Ch.  15.  Borders  of  Judah.  Caleb's  conquest  of 
Hebron.  Othniel's  conquest  of  Kirjath-sepher  (Debir). 
Cities  of  Judah  arranged  by  districts. 

11.  Chs.  16,  17.  The  children  of  Joseph,  i.  e.  west 
half  of  Manasseh  and  Ephraim.  South  border  of  the 
two  tribes  treated  as  one.  Borders  of  Ephraim  with 
cities  belonging  to  it  but  located  in  Manasseh.  Bor- 
ders of  Manasseh  with  cities  belonging  to  it  but  located 
in  Issachar  and  Asher.  Permission  to  the  joint  tribes 
to  extend  their  territory. 

12.  Ch.  18.  Assembling  of  Israelites  at  Shiloh.  Tent 
of  meeting  erected.  Joshua  directs  a  survey  of  the 
land  still  undistributed.  Its  distribution  by  lot  to  the 
seven  remaining  tribes.     Borders  of  Benjamin. 

13.  Ch.  19.  Lots  of  Simeon,  Zebulon,  Issachar, 
Asher,  Naphtali  and  Dan.  Assignment  of  Timnath- 
serah  in  Ephraim  to  Joshua. 

14.  Ch.  20.     The  appointment  of  cities  of  refuge. 

15.  Ch.  21.     The  forty-eight  cities  assigned  by  the 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  63 

Israelites    to    the    tribe    of    Levi   according  to  Num. 
35:1-8. 

K).  Ch.  22.  Division  of  the  land  completed.  The  2^ 
tribes  dismissed  to  their  home  east  of  the  Jordan.  Inci- 
dent of  the  altar  erected  at  the  point  of  the  crossing  of 
the  Jordan. 

17.  Ch.  23.  First  of  Joshua's  two  closing  discourses. 
Exhorts  the  people  to  faithfulness  to  the  law,  and  to 
abstain  from  intercourse  with  the  native  inhabitants  of 
Canaan. 

18.  Ch.  24.  Joshua's  second  closing  discourse  deliv- 
ered at  Shechera.  Review  of  God's  mercies  from  patri- 
archal days.  People  pledge  themselves  to  obedience. 
A  stone  witnessing  thereto  erected  at  Shechem.  Death 
and  burial  of  Joshua.  Burial  of  Joseph's  bones  at 
Shechem.     Death  and  burial  of  Eleazar. 

X.  Doctrine.— The  doctrines  emphasized  are 

1.  Faithfulness  on  the  part  of  God  to  fulfill  covenant 
promises. 

2.  Faithfulness  on  the  part  of  the  godly  to  possess 
the  promised  inheritance. 

XI.  Messianic— The  Messianic  element  in  the  Book 
of  Joshua  is  of  a  typological  nature.  See  Messianic 
under  Exodus.  As  a  type,  the  Book  of  Joshua  finds 
its  antitype  in  the  Epistle  to  the  Ephesians. 


JUDGES. 


I.  ^Siine.—Slioftivi  =  Judges.  The  Book  takes  its 
name  from  the  men  who  judged  or  ruled  in  Israel  in  the 
period  between  Joshua  and  Samuel,  and  whose  trans- 


64  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

actions  the  Book  chiefly  relates.  The  Book  is  not  a 
complete  history  of  the  times,  but  only  accounts  of 
part  of  the  nation  at  any  one  time. 

II.  Position.— The  second  of  the  historico-propheti- 
cal  Books.  See  under  Joshua.  Continues  the  annals 
of  the  Israelitish  nation  from  the  death  of  Joshua  to 
the  death  of  Samson,  and  the  rise  of  Samuel  the 
prophet. 

III.  Theme.— The  general  theme  of  the  Book  is, — 
Calamity  following  upon  apostacy; — Deliverance  fol- 
lowing upon  obedience.  To  illustrate  this  theme  the 
author  brings  together  the  most  important  data  of  He- 
brew history  between  Joshua  and  Eli. 

IV.  Date.— The  Book  of  Judges  was  evidently  writ- 
ten between  the  time  of  Saul,  and  the  middle  of  the 
reign  of  David,  from  the  following  comparisons: — 

1.  Judg.  1:21  compared  with  2  Sam.  5:6-8.  Ac- 
cording to  the  former  the  Jebusites  inhabiting  Jerusa- 
lem had  not  been  driven  out.  According  to  the  latter 
David  took  the  stronghold  of  Zion,  and  drove  out  the 
Jebusites. 

2.  Judg.  1 :  29  compared  with  1  Ki.  9:16.  Accord- 
ing to  the  former  the  Canaanites  had  not  been  driven 
out  of  Gezer.  According  to  the  latter,  Pharaoh,  dur- 
ing the  reign  of  Solomon,  captured  Gezer,  burnt  it  with 
tire,  and  slew  the  Canaanites  dwelling  in  it. 

3.  The  expression  in  Judg.  17  :  6  ;  18 : 1 ;  19  : 1 ;  21 :  25, 
that  "In  those  days  there  was  no  king  in  Israel,  "  where 
there  seems  to  be  a  comparison  between  the  times  of 
the  Kings  and  those  of  the  Jugdes,  and  from  which  it 
would  appear  that  the  Book  was  not  written  before  the 
time  of  Saul. 

4.  "  The  captivity  of  the  land"  in  18:30,   refers  to 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  65 

the  victory  gained  over  the  Israelites  by  the  Philistines, 
and  the  disastrous  results  to  Israel  that  followed  it,  as 
further  explained  by  ver.  31  following. 

Authorship.— Of  the  authorship  of  Judges  nothing 
is  positively  known.  The  weight  of  probability  assigns 
it  to  Samuel,  and  the  date  of  its  composition  about  the 
beginning  of  David's  reign.  As  the  Book  covers  a  long 
historical  period,  the  author  can  have  drawn  his  mater- 
ials only  from  written  sources,  or  oral  tradition,  most 
likelj^  the  former  in  view  of  the  historical  precision  that 
marks  most  parts  of  the  Book. 

VI.  The  Judges.— The  Judges  were  leaders,  deliv- 
erers and  governors  in  Israel;  not  simply  administra- 
tors of  civil  jurisprudence,  but  virtual  rulers.  1  Sam. 
8 :  5,  6.  The  Judges  were  not  always  the  general  au- 
thority chosen  b}^  prescribed  law,  nor  was  the  position 
an  hereditary  one.  During  the  period  of  the  Judges 
there  were  six  periods  of  servitude.  The  chronology  is 
as  follows : — 

Juflg.  3:7-11.    1st  Servitude  to  Cushan-Risliathaim For  Syears, 

Judg.  3 :  7-11.    Deliverance  by  Otlmiel,  Judge . . .'. 40 

Judg.  3 :  13-30.    2nd  Serv.  to  Eglon  of  Moab,  Amnion,  Amalek.  IS 
Judg.  3 :  12-30.    Deliverance  by  Ehud,  Judge  with  Shamgar.. ,"       SO 

Judg.  Chs.  4,  5.    3rd  Serv.  to  Jabin  of  Hazor  in  Canaan 20 

Judg.  Chs.  4.  5.    Dellv.  by  Deborah  and  Baral^,  Barak,  Judge.  40 

Judg.  6:1-8:  32.    4th  Servitude  to  Midian,  Amalek,  &c T 

Judg.  6  : 1-8 :  32.    Deliverance  by  Gideon,  Judge 40 

Judg.  8  :  3:3-9  :  57.    Abimelech  reigns 3 

Judg.  10: 1,  2.    Tola,  Judge 23 

Judg.  10 : 3,  5.    Jair,  Judge ^~ 

Judg.  10  : 6-12  :  7.    5th  Servitude  to  Ammonites,  Philistines.. .  is 

Judg.  10 : 6-12  :  7.    Deliverance  by  Jephth;i4. Judge.... <> 

Judg.  12  :  8-10.     Ibzan,  Judge ^ 

Judg.  12 :  11,  12.    Elon,  Judge 10 

Judg.  12:1.3-15.    Abdon,  Judge ^ 

Judg.  Chs.  13-16.    6th  Servitude  to  Philistines 40 

Judg.  Chs.  13-16.    Dehverance  by  Samson,  Judge I  '^    20 

[5J 


6(i  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

ISam.  1:1-4:18.    Eli,  Judge For  40  years. 

1  Sam.  7  : 2.    7th  Servitude  (of  the  Ark)  to  Philistines 20 

1  Sam.  7 :  15-25 : 1 .    Deliverance  by  Samuel,  Judge 12 

An  exact  chronology  of  the  period  of  the  Judges  is 
as  yet  unattained,  in  order  to  make  the  sum  total  of 
the  above  years,  plus  the  forty  years  wanderings,  the 
seven  years  of  Joshua's  conquest,  and  the  eighty  years 
of  Saul's  and  David's  reigns,  harmonize  with  the  state- 
ment in  1  Ki.  6:1,  which  assigns  480  years  to  the 
period  from  the  Exodus  to  the  fourth  year  of  Solomon's 
reign.  Nor  does  the  statement  in  The  Acts  13 :  20  settle 
the  disputed  points.  One  explanation  is  that  some  of 
the  periods  named  in  the  Judges  are  synchronous. 
Anothei-  is  that  the  years  of  Israel's  servitude  to  their 
heathen  oppressors  are  not  reckoned  in  the  480  years 
of  1  Ki.  6:1.  The  succession  of  events  ,is  regular  till 
the  close  of  Samson's  judgeship,  where  it  is  suddenly 
broken  off,  and  not  resumed  till  the  history  reopens 
with  First  Samuel. 

VII.  Divisions.— The  principal  divisions  are  three — 

1.  Introduction ;— Chs.  1:1-3:7. 

2.  History;— Chs,  3:8-16:31. 

3.  Appendix ;— Chs.  17-21. 

VIII.  Contents.— 1.  The  Introduction  is  twofold — 
general  and  special,  a.  Chs.  1:1-2:5.  General  in- 
troduction setting  forth  the  historical  connection  with 
what  precedes  in  Joshua,  and  furnishing  a  summary  of 
the  results  of  Joshua's  wars  of  conquest,  b.  Chs. 
2:6-3:7.*  Special  introduction  setting  forth  the  his- 
torical connection  with  what  immediately  follows,  and 
treating  of  the  people's  sins,  punishments  and  deliver- 
ances during  the  period  of  the  Judges,  thus  intro- 
ducing the  special  history  that  follows. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  67 

2.  Chs.  3:8-16:31.  History  of  the  Judges  and  of 
their  wars  of  deliverance.  See  chronological  table 
above. 

3.  Chs.  17-21.  Appendix.  The  history  of  the 
Judges,  abruptly  interrupted  at  the  close  of  Ch.  16,  is 
not  resumed  till  1  Sam.  opens.  Chs.  17-21,  falling 
between,  and  forming  a  sort  of  appendix,  are  still  not 
mere  appendix,  for  they  form  an  essential  part  of  the 
body  of  the  work,  while  the  events  they  chronicle  oc- 
curred in  the  earliest  part  of  the  period  of  the  Judges. 
These  events  are  mainl}^  two,  viz. — a.  Chs.  17,  18. 
Account  of  the  worship  of  images  by  Micah,  the 
Ephraimite,  and  the  transportation  of  that  worship  by 
the  Danites  to  Laish-Dan.  h.  Chs.  19-21.  Account 
of  the  infamous  conduct  af  the  inhabitants  of  Gibeah, 
and  the  war  of  revenge  which  was  waged  by  Israel 
against  the  tribe  of  Benjamin  as  a  punishment  for  the 
crime. 

The  Book  of  Joshua  may  also  be  divided  into  four 
periods  based  upon  the  four  principal  appearances  of 
the  Angel  of  Jehovah. 

IX.  Doctrine.— The  doctrines  emphasized  are — a. 
Disobedience  incurring  divine  judgments  which  are 
both  punitive  and  corrective.  h.  Penitence  and 
obedience  securing  pardon  and  power  over  one's 
enemies. 

X.  Messianic— There  is  no  direct  Messianic  element 
in  the  Book  of  Judges  save  that  connected  with  the 
doctrine  of  the  Angel  of  Jehovah, 


68  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


RUTH. 

I.  Name.— In  Hebrew  as  in  English,  Ruth.  The 
Book  takes  its  name  from  its  principal  character. 

II.  Position. -In  the  Hebrew  Bible  the  Book  of 
Ruth  stands  among  the  Ketubim  or  Hagiographa. 
According  to  the  LXX  and  A.  V.  the  Book  is  placed 
between  Judges  and  Samuel,  which  is  its  proper  place, 
as  it  is  a  supplement  to  the  former,  and  an  intro- 
duction to  the  latter. 

III.  Time.— The  events  described  in  the  Book  oc- 
curred during  the  period  of  the  Judges,  probably  dur- 
ing the  judgeship  of  Gideon. 

IV.  Design.— The  chief  design  of  the  Book  is  to 
give  the  ancestry  of  David  which  is  not  fuinished  by 
the  Books  of  Samuel,  except  as  to  the  names  of  his 
father  Jesse,  and  his  brethren.  (1  Sam.  16:1-13.) 
Especially  included  in  this  its  chief  aim,  the  Book  is. 
designed  to  show  how  Ruth,  a  daughter  of  Moab,  and 
a  member  therefore  of  a  people  not  only  outside  of 
Israel,  but  theocratically  hostile  to  Israel,  obtained  not 
only  an  eminent  position  among  Jehovah's  people,  but 
became  also  an  ancestor  of  the  illustrious  king,  David. 

V.  Authorship  and  Date.— The  authorship  of  the 
Book  is  not  known.  As  to  date  of  composition,  the 
weight  of  internal  evidence  assigns  it  to  the  time  of 
David.  The  social  usages  portrayed  in  the  Book  as- 
sign it  to  a  pre  rather  than  a  post-exilic  date.  The 
so-called  Aramaisms  are  ancient  Arabic  forms,  pre- 
served in  the  modern  Arabic,  and  moreover  forms  that 
occur  in  the  Hexateuch  and  the  Books  of  Samuel, 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  60 

VI.  Divisions  and  Contents.— Are  as  follows: — 

1.  Ch.  1.  Elimelech  of  Bethlehem,  his  wife,  Naomi, 
and  their  two  sons,  ^o  to  Moab,  where  Elimelech  dies. 
The  two  sons  marry  the  Moabitesses,  Orpah  and  Ruth. 
The  two  sons  dying,  Naomi  determines  to  return  to 
l^etlilehem,  but  bids  her  daughters-in-law  remain  in 
their  own  country.  Orpah  does,  but  Ruth  determines 
to  accompany  Naomi  back  to  Bethlehem. 

2.  Chs.  2-4.  After  their  return  to  Bethlehem,  Ruth 
gleans  in  the  fields  of  Boaz,  a  relative  of  Elimelech. 
Boaz  thus  becoming  acquainted  with  Ruth,  marries 
her.  The  offspring  of  their  union  was  Obed,  father  of 
Jesse,  and  grandfather  of  David. 

VII.  Doctrine.— The  doctrinal  thoughts  emphasized 
are — a.  God  calls  and  honors  whom  he  will.  h.  Faith 
in  God  and  devotion  to  the  godly. 

VIII.  Messianic— While  there  is  no  direct  Messianic 
prophecy  in  the  Book  of  Ruth,  still  there  is  a  Messianic 
trait  in  the  fact  that  Ruth,  a  heathen  woman,  of  a 
nation  so  hostile  to  Israel  as  Moab  was,  and  on  account 
of  her  faithful  love  to  the  people  of  Israel,  and  her 
entire  confidence  in  Jehovah,  the  God  of  Israel,  should 
have  been  thought  worthy  to  be  made  the  tribe-mother 
of  the  great  and  godly  king  David,  and  a  lineage- 
mother  of  Jesus  according  to  the  flesh. 


FIRST  AND  SECOND  SAMUEL. 

I.  Name.— The  name  of  the  two  Books  arises  from 
the  fact  that  Samuel  is  their  principal  character,  both 
as  concerns  himself,  and  the  part  he  took  in  consecrat- 


70  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

ing  the  two  kings,  Saul  and  David,  to  the  kingly  office. 
The  two  Books  formed  originally  a  single  Book.  By 
the  LXX  the  two  Books  of  Samuel,  and  the  two  Books 
of  Kings  were  regarded  as  a  complete  history  of  the 
two  kingdoms  of  Israel  and  Judah,  and  the  entire 
work  was  divided  by  them  into  four  Books  of  the 
Kings.  Hence  the  title  "The  First  Book  of  Samuel 
otherwise  called  the  First  Book  of  Kings,"  etc.  The 
Books  however  retain  the  general  title  they  bore  in 
the  Hebrew  MSS.,  i.  e.  1  and  2  Samuel,  and  1  and  2 
Kings. 

II.  Position.— The  Books  of  Samuel  are  closely  re- 
lated to  Judges  preceding  and  Kings  following.  The 
Book  of  Judges  treats  of  the  aifairs  of  the  Hebrew 
State  after  the  conquest,  when  the  nation  was  com- 
posed of  independent  provinces,  and  had  a  tribal  form 
of  government.  Then  came  the  change  from  the 
tribal  to  the  monarchical  form  of  government,  which 
radical  change  occurred  under  the  regency  of  the 
prophet  Samuel,  and  is  set  forth  in  the  first  Book 
bearing  his  name.  The  Books  of  Samuel  and  Kings 
are  closely  related  in  that  2  Sam.  closes  and  1  Kings 
opens  with  events  connected  with  the  close  of  David's 
reign. 

III.  Time.— The  i^eriod  of  history  included  by  the 
Books  of  Samuel  opens  with  an  account  of  Samuel's 
birth  and  early  call,  and  extends  to  the  close  of 
David's  public  life.  The  death  of  Saul  is  the  histori- 
cally dividing  point  between  1  and  2  Samuel. 

IV.  Theme.— As  in  the  case  of  the  other  prophetico- 
historical  Books  (see  under  Joshua),  the  design  is  not 
to  trace  the  history  of  the  nation,  in  the  ordinary 
sense,  but  to  trace  the  course  of  divine  revelation;  to 


iNTRODtrCTlON    OUTLINES.  tl 

set  forth  God's  method  of  dealing  with  his  chosen 
nation  that  he  might  instruct  and  establish  them  in 
ways  of  righteousness,  and  so  lay  a  foundation  for  the 
world-wide  work  of  Messiah.  The  history  therefore  is 
not  so  much  the  history  of  the  Kingdom  of  Israel  as 
the  history  of  the  Kingdom  of  God. 

V.  Date.— There  is  nothing  in  the  Books  that  points 
to  a  period  later  than  the  close  of  David's  reign,  or  the 
first  part  of  Solomon's  reign,  as  the  date  of  composi- 
tion. The  statement  in  1  Sara.  9 :  9  does  not  indicate 
a  later  date  than  this,  for  while  Samuel  is  called  a 
"seer"  (1  Sam.  9:9),  Nathan  and  Gad,  both  contem- 
poraries of  David,  are  called  "prophets"  (1  Sam. 
22:  5 ;  2  Sam.  7 :  2).  The  statement  in  1  Sam.  27 :  6  is 
no  proof  that  the  composition  should  be  assigned  to  a 
date  after  the  accession  of  Rehoboam,  and  the  division 
of  the  kingdom  into  the  kingdoms  of  Judah  and  Israel, 
for  aside  from  the  fact  that  the  LXX  and  Peshito- 
Syriac  read  Icing  and  not  kings  in  the  passage,  is  also 
the  fact  that  the  distinction  between  Israel  and  Judah 
existed  alread3'^  in  the  time  of  David,  and  grew  out  of 
the  fact  that  David  belonged  to  the  tribe  of  Judah, 
over  which  alone  he  had  first  ruled  seven  and  one-half 
years,  during  a  part  of  which  time  Lshbosheth,  Saul's 
son,  reigned  over  Israel.  1  Sam.  18: 16;  2  Sam.  24: 1. 
The  expression  "unto  this  day"  does  not  necessarily 
imply  a  long  period  of  time. 

VI.  Authorship.— The  authorship  of  the  Books  is 
unknown.  Four  theories  are  advanced:  (1)  Samuel; 
(2)  Samuel,  Nathan  and  Gad;  (3)  Nathan;  (4)  Com- 
posite. 

VII.  Divisions.— The  two  Books  of  Samuel  may  be 
divided    according  as  the  contents  group  themselves 


72  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

about  the  three  principal  characters  Samuel,  Saul  and 
David,  as  follows : — 

1.  1  Sara.  Chs.  1-12.     Samuel  and  the  establishment 
of  the  Monarchy. 

2.  1  Sam.  Chs.  lo-31.     Saul  and  the  beginnings  of 
the  Monarchy. 

3.  2  Sam.  Chs.  1-24.     David   and  the  succession  of 
the  Monarchy. 

VIII.  Contents.— 1.   1  Sam.  Chs.  1-12.     Samuel  and 
the  establishment  of  the  Monarch3^ 

Samuel's  birth  and  consecration  (Ch.  1).  Hannah's 
prayer  (2: 1-10).  Eli's  evil  sons,  and  the  prediction  of 
the  fall  of  Eli's  house  (2:11-36).  The  judgment  of 
Eli's  house  declared  to  him  by  Samuel  (3:1-18). 
Samuel  prophet  of  Israel  in  Shiloh  (3: 19-21).  Double 
defeat  of  the  Israelites,  and  capture  of  the  Ark,  by 
the  Philistines;  death  of  Eli's  two  sons,  of  Eli,  and 
birth  of  Ichabod  (4: 1-22).  Punishment  of  the  Philis- 
tines, and  recapture  of  the  Ark  (5: 1-7: 1).  Samuel's 
reformation  and  its  inauguration  at  Mizpah  (7:2-6). 
The  invading  Philistines  defeated;  Israelitish  posses- 
sions restored;  peace  established ;  Samuel's  judgeship 
of  Israel  in  a  circuit  of  four  cities  3^early  (7:  7-17). 
Samuel  appoints  his  sons  judges;  their  evil  conduct 
leads  to  the  demand  of  a  king;  Samuel  protests,  then 
divinely  directed,  yields  (8:1-22).  Saul,  visiting 
Samuel,  the  latter  anoints  him  king,  then  calls  a 
national  assembly  at  Mizpah  when  Saul  is  publicly 
elected  by  lot  as  king,  but  has  not  the  allegiance  of  all 
Israel  (Chs.  9,  10).  Saul  aids  the  men  of  Jabesh 
Gilead,  defeats  the  Ammonites,  is  recognized  king  by 
all  the  people  of  Gilgal,  where  Samuel  renews  the 
kingdom    (Ch.    11).     Samuel's   address;    justifies    his 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  73 

coarse,  urj^es  fidelity  to  God  and  the  king;  miracle 
(Ch.  12). 

2.  1  Sam.  Chs.  13-31.  Saul  and  the  beginnings  of 
the  Monarchy. 

Saul  and  Jonathan  defeat  the  Philistines  at  Geba; 
the  Philistines  mass  a  great  army,  whereupon  Israel  is 
dismayed,  and  Saul  impatient  at  Samuel's  delay,  him- 
self offers  sacrifice,  for  which  act  of  disobedience  he  is 
rejected  of  God  (13:1-14).  Jonathan  defeats  Philis- 
tines at  Michmash,  and  for  disobeying  Saul  is  spared  at 
the  demand  of  the  people  (13:15-14:  45).  Saul's  vic- 
tories, children,  relatives  (14:46-52).  Disobeying  the 
order  to  utterly  destroy  Amalek,  Saul  is  rejected  from 
the  kingdom  (Ch.  15).  Samuel  anoints  David  to  be 
king;  for  mental  relief  Saul  sends  for  David  (Ch  16). 
Philistines  against  Israel  in  Vale  of  Elah;  David  slays 
Goliath  (Ch.  17).  Jonathan's  and  David's  friendship, 
and  Saul's  murderous  jealousy  of  David  (Ch.  18). 
David  flees  to  Samuel,  is  sought  by  Saul;  learns  of 
Saul's  continued  enmity  from  Jonathan  (Chs.  19,  20). 
David  flees  to  Ahimelech  at  Nob,  to  King  Achish  of 
Gath,  to  the  cave  of  Adullam,  to  Mizpah,  to  Hareth ; 
Saul's  massacre  of  Ahimelech  and  the  priests  (Chs.  21, 
22).  David  delivers  Keilah  then  flees  from  Saul  to  the 
wilderness  of  Ziph,  then  to  En-gedi  where  he  spares 
Saul's  life  (Chs.  23,  24).  Samuel's  death  and  burial; 
David,  Nabal,  Abigail  (Ch.  25).  David  spares  Saul; 
finds  refuge  with  Achish;  Philistines  arm ;  Saul  con- 
sults the  witch  of  Endor;  Achish  dismisses  David  be- 
cause of  Philistine  suspicions;  his  vengeance  on  Amal- 
ekites,  who  had  desolated  Ziklag  (Chs.  26-30).  Death 
of  Saul  and  Jonathan  on  Mt.  Gilboa  (Ch.  31). 


74  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

3.  2  Sam.  Chs.  1-24,  David  and  the  succession  of 
the  Monarchy. 

David's  lament  over  Saul  and  Jonathan  (Ch.  1). 
David  made  king  of  Judah  at  Hebron ;  Ishbosheth 
king  of  Israel ;  battle  between  their  followers  (Ch.  2). 
David's  power  increases;  his  six  sons;  Abner  forsakes 
Ishbosheth  for  David,  is  slain  by  Joab,  lamented  by 
David  who  punishes  the  slayers,  after  which  David 
made  king  of  all  Israel  (3:1-5:3).  David  captures 
fortress  of  Zion  from  Jebusites;  his  friendship  with 
Hiram;  defeats  Philistines;  ark  removed  to  "City  of 
David"  (5:4-6:23).  Nathan  forbids  David  to  build 
the  Lord's  house;  the  Lord  will  build  David's  house 
(dynasty);  David's  prayer  (Ch.  7).  David's  wars,  vic- 
tories, ministers ;  friendship  for  Mephibosheth;  war  with 
Ammon  (Chs.  8-10).  David's  sin,  punishment,  peni- 
tence; Solomon  born;  Ammon  defeated  (Chs.  11,  12). 
Amnion's  criminal  assault  on  Tamar;  Ammon  slain  b}^ 
Absalom's  order;  Absalom's  flight ;  restored  after  three 
years  by  Joab  (Chs.  13,  14).  Absalom's  rebellion; 
David's  flight;  ark  returned  to  Jerusalem;  Ziba's 
treachery;  Shemei's  cursing;  Ahitophel's  suicide  (Chs. 
15-17).  Battle  in  forest  of  Ephraim;  Absalom's 
death ;  David's  sorrow ;  his  return  to  Jerusalem ;  Shi- 
niei,  Mephibosheth,  Barzillai;  rivalry  (Chs.  18,  19). 
Rovolt  of  Sheba;  Joab  slays  Amasa;  Sheba's  head  pre- 
sented to  Joab;  David's  ministers  (Ch.  20).  Three 
years  famine ;  satisfaction  to  Gibeonites ;  bones  of  Saul 
and  his  son  buried;  Philistine  giants  slain  (Ch.  21). 
David's  song  (Ch.  22;  Psa.  18).  David's  last  words; 
names  and  deeds  of  his  heroes  (Ch.  23).  The  census 
and  pestilence;  the  altar  and  offering  (Ch.  24). 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  75 

IX.  Doctrine.— The  official  and  national  institution 
of  the  office  of  prophet  and  king  in  the  sphere  of  reve- 
lation, and  the  development  of  the  Kingdom  of  God. 

X.  Messianic— Messianic  prophecy  in  the  Books  of 
Samuel  treats  for  the  most  part  of  the  Messianic  King 
and  Kingdom.  We  have — a.  In  1  Sam.  2:1-10,  The 
prayer  for  it.  h.  In  1  Sam.  2:27-36,  The  first  divine 
intimation  of  its  coming,  c.  In  2  Sam.  Ch.  v,  The 
covenant  with  David  constituting  him  and  his  seed,  as 
the  family,  house,  dynasty  in  whom  this  Messianic 
promise  is  to  be  developed,  and  through  whom  it  is  to 
be  realized  and  forever  eatablished.  d.  In  2  Sam. 
23:1-7,  The  theocratic  king,  and  his  theocratic  rule. 


H 


o 

CO 

CO  . 

05  .  ..  .00 

••t-1-^..CO             •                                                    T-l                                      -rH-^CQCQ 
-^  <-5     '.^       I  .   -^  O  i>  I  i>  i> 

J^^Oi     |T-iT-4..  ^        «D        05  Ci  CO  O        •r-iC? 

Wlh-^'-OtJh-^  ••  .•         i^' -^  r-l  V^     \     .  .         iO  ^ 

••S.-OtHthI  CO  2  ..  OJ....002         C5^ 

r;;  .^-  CO  ^  oi  .-,  "^      00  ^  T:  r-i    .  '^^    .    .  *^^  '-h  ^  ^  03 

lK»H-.--iO  .r-iO      •      '  oi  OO'^Oi        (^      ...CO     ...^-^^ 

5£_LI       lOI       llOt^l       I_!hC005^0     1       I       It-hI       IiOOt-h 
rC;C^T-H!>i.rHOJCQ<?;iOOOi|-o.pHGQCQ^i>'0*0     I    T-HTt^COi-iCQ 

O  r\>  '"^ T-l  T— I  (75  T— I 

^^    ••CQ— ilOiCOtO«OCDcr)CO':0  10  0> T-lr-iOCO!M 

•  -OjTH^r-I^T-lT-ITHT-I^T-ll-lTHCQT-lOOQOOiT-lT-lT-lirH-r-l 

H    S    ^.    ^-    ^-    ^-      .      •    ^-    ^-    ^      .      •    ^      •    ^ ^    ^      ■    ^ 

■'-iC<)-^'-'T^'-'i-i-r-iTHi--->-H^T-i^i-lT-JO"JCQOi03  0'>0')0?0305 


w 


"^  03  OS 


'^'^  fl' 


^'   =§pd   03^   03   03 


03  cS^ 


N  rQ 


O   O 


f3     S      S     03rd     Ce^     03,J3r^^--^rJd     03 

_  _  ^  ^  ^  :^-2  :!i?.2 1!!?.^  .2S  ^  "^  -22 .2  ^ 

COCOCOCOCO'XiCOT-iOt:'OCOCQiCOJ»OTt<t:"^COi^^t-iOQOt;: 

C5lO-.-ii>t-*OiOlOiO(MO^O"J<MT-tr-iOiOiOOOOOOOOt-iOCO=2 
000050iOi0505CiCiC50505Ci05GOoOOOOOGO<X)OOOOQOQD 


CO 

o  o 


::::::    >^  03  r  : 

CO  o 


ot-<MCOT-H.rHCOi-ic^"^i>oiOi-ic<jod'rHao«ooi>«o25 


+j4JHSo3<iiajo3aja>aia)a;ajacei»a)i:6:ea)ceo3aja>i:tf 
*S*—  '^ns  c^i^fO  c6  c3  o3  c^  cS  c^  cj^o  c^  c5<Tjrrt  Oj"^"^  to  cg"^ 

flflS=lg^r3rtfH;H'Mf-i;H;-i;Hr-;;H!Hrtr5;HS3'-'fHr3 

t— ih— Nt— N,^    ^  i^  L^    CO    OJ    QO    CO    C»    CC    CO^^    CO    COV-''-'    OJu'TuZ    ^    tCu— 
I— 'PPl-5HH'-5^-ti|-l|-|hHl— II— IhHI-H'-SMhHhSl-Sf-l'^'S'^l— l(-|hS 


CO     CO 
C^     Co 

O    O 


o  o 

:5  a 


O-^  03 


.r3  CO  ce  c^  CO 


2,^ 


^  03  ce  o3  c^   -..„.-.-- 
_occ'SfH^H'r!_'-3cecSc6N 


3'^  5^  S-s  ce'^  ^1^  BM  fl^^  grS^  ES^i^^^^  a 


•Sh 


JO 


zo 


O 

•  *2  ci  o  T-H 
oi  ■7'  oi  cQ  C9 

'-'  J^      I       I    J 
I    "^  '^  CO  ^ 

to  >o  10  »c  »o 


.00 

I  t- 

CO  c^ 

•  •  ^ 

ZO  ^ 

o   . 

o 
(?5 


o-?, 


00  th 

CO     I 

I    00 

IC  CO 


CO 
CO      . 

(M  01      . 

00     I    io 

1      T-l    Of 

r-t     ..       I 

•  •  CO  o 
Oi  Ot)  oj 

o?    .  .. 

.    t-t  CO 

rCSQ         . 


..  CO  ^ 

CO     I     •• 

CO  -^  CO 

..  CO 

u  «■     . 

J   CO     ^H 

^01 


zo   >-< 

co^ 

^^ 

o 


•  •  tH  CO  CO  CO  '^      .  o 
O  O'?  05  GQ  CO  OT  t-  O"? 

I    -i-i  C5  CO  O  ^      \    l- 
■r-tC'jT-iCJCOCOCO-^ 


ir  o 


CQ  CM  01  W  GQ  o^  (N  c<}  01 


o>  c<i  c^  C5  o?  CQ  01  w 


0) 

H 


03    rj 


WW 


,r3  (B 
cS   O 


III 

OSS 


c3  03  c6  :6  ^  ,^  .^ 
CD  CD  o)  <D  a;  jg  eg 


Mti^ffiWK^^^ 


rW  i-H   ^ 

C3    N    N 


-^-^  2  2  9  s  s  a 


0  b 

CO 

^  « 

CO  GO 

OOOCit-oO 

Oi 

COCO'— 'OSOiCJGOGO 

oS 

(MO 

t-  t'  t-  JO  i2  »o  ^ 

C3 

i"    G<JOirt<C00005ai 

5;  t>cococococo*Oio 

1 

|o 

00  GO 

j>  t-  i>  r^  t-  i>  t- 

i> 

^Cq 

^' 

i 

s 

i 

^^ 

12 

e                     03       03 
2                 ^     pa 

rO^ 

t/j 

^ 

-M  -+3    03 

03 

s:    03                -M  00  4^  02 

>^ 

§3 

ce " 

§gS:   :   :   - 

^ 

^ 

1    ^r    :    :    §  ?S  §  ^ 

CQ 

^' 

1 

aas. 

k. 

^  ^        a^a^ 

2^ 

T-C  W 

h2i 

CO  T-l  0  c^  S  ^  '^ 

"S 

OS 

^Ci»OG<Ji-HCO-r-iCOi-l 
^GQ*0         CO         ^         ^ 

^ 

^  IC 

<» 

tH        GQ  ^^ 

S 

§5 

0 

^r^ 

^ 

^  r^  ^  ^  r-H  ^  ^ 

1 

^ 

->* 

0  cS 

(D    C    CD    0    5^    eg    CS 

^^ 

<X) 

2   ceccceceoScgi^ce 

(5i 

& 

dni 

g  ce  cs  je  grjTJ 

cfi 

^g    rO  r^  ^^3  r§  n=i  rS  r^  r- 

(^ 

U     r^ 

J^ 

^   K   fe   S   OD   !^   S 

~ 

fe 

^ 

•^ 

hH  '"5 

•<?i 

1— 1  1— 1  1— 1  1— 1  H- 1  1-5  1-5 

•^ 

|_H 

,        l-5l-5l-5l-tH-5h-jK,l-5 

"0? 

►^ 

S^ 

<iS 

^ 

s 

^ 

o- 

^ 

s§ 

5^ 

2 

..^ 

^ 

•    F-l 

s 

g 

?^ 

^ 

|l 

^ 

1 

^ 

^ 

Zechariah 

Shallum 

Menahem 

Pekahiah 

Pekah 

Jotham 

Ahaz 

5 

1 

Suhjectu 
Hezekiah 
Manasseh 
Amon 
Josiah 
Jehoahaz 
Jehoiakim 
Jehoiachin 
Zedekiah 

^ 
^ 

78  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


FIRST  AND  SECOND  KINGS. 

I.  J^ame.—Melakim  =  Kings.  The  Books  are  so 
named  for  their  embracins:  the  history  of  the  kings  of 
Judah  and  Israel  The  two  Books  originall}^  constitu- 
ted but  one  Book. 

II.  Position.— The  Books  are  closely  related  to  the 
Books  of  Samuel  in  that  they  continue  the  history  of 
the  Israelitish  Monarchy,  tracing  it  through  the  various 
stages  of  its  prosperity,  decline  and  fall. 

III.  Time.— The  Books  of  Kings  cover  a  period  of 
about  450  years.  They  embrace  the  history  of  Israel 
from  the  period  of  David's  nomination  of  Solomon  as 
his  successor,  consequent  upon  the  rebellion  of  Adoni- 
jah,  to  the  release  of  Jehoiachin  from  prison  in  Baby- 
lon by  Evil-merodach,  562  B.  C,  that  is,  the  thirty- 
seventh  year  of  the  Babylonian  captivity. 

IV.  Composition:— Sources^  Date,  Authorship.  The 
Books  of  Kings  repeatedly  refer  to  written  documents 
w^hich  were  doubtless  used  by  the  author  in  the  compil- 
ation of  his  work.  These  written  documents,  or  sources 
employed  by  the  author  are 

1.  The  Book  of  the  Acts  of  Solomon.     1  Ki.  11:41. 

2.  The  Book  of  the  Chronicles  of  the  Kings  of  Israel. 
1  Ki.  14: 19,  and  referred  to  altogether  seventeen  times. 

3.  The  Book  of  the  Chronicles  of  the  Kings  of  Judah. 
1  Ki.  15: 17,  and  referred  to  altogether  fifteen  times. 

These  books  "of  Chronicles"  (2  and  3  above),  to 
which  reference  is  made,  were  evidently  historical  rec- 
ords written  during  the  reigns  of  the  kings  of  Israel  and 
Juhali,   and  not  historical  works  written  by  two  un- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  79 

known  private  iindividuals  in  the  last  stage  of  the 
Hebrew  monarchy.  The  last  time  No.  3  above  is  re- 
ferred to  is  in  2  Ki.  24:5,  in  connection  with  Jehoia- 
kim,  B.  C.  600.  Hence  it  is  supposed  that  "The 
Book  of  the  Chronicles  of  the  Kings  of  Judah  "  was 
the  work  of  a  writer  who  must  have  lived  at  the  be- 
ginning of  the  Babylonian  captivity.  This  view, 
however,  is  untenable  as  evidenced  by  statements  in 
the  Books  of  Kings  going  to  show  that  these  "  Chron- 
icles" were  composed  of  documents  written  at  an 
early  period.  For  example — a.  The  statement  in  1 
Ki.  9:21  refers  to  a  condition  existing  in  the  time  of 
Solomon,  and  the  writer  of  the  statement,  but  not  ap- 
plicable to  the  divided  kingdoms  of  Judah  and  Israel, 
and  certainly  inapplicable  after  the  deportation  of  the 
ten  tribes,  and  the  remnant  of  the  Canaanites  in  their 
territory  were  no  longer  tributary  to  them.  b.  It  is 
evident  that  the  statement  in  1  Ki.  12: 19  was  written 
before  the  ten  tribes  were  carried  away  captive  by 
Shalmaneser,  inasmuch  as  the  language  was  no  longer 
applicable  after  that  event,  c.  It  is  evident  that  the 
statement  in  1  Ki.  8:8  was  written  before  the  Baby- 
lonian captivity,  because  the  language  could  not  be 
used  respecting  the  staves  of  the  ark  when  the  temple 
had  been  destroyed  by  Nebuchadnezzar,  and  all  its 
sacred  utensils  had  been  removed,  d.  It  is  evident 
that  the  statement  in  2  Ki.  8:22  was  written  before 
the  Babylonian  captivity,  for  otherwise  the  language 
would  be  inapplicable,  as  Judah  was  then  carried 
away  captive. 

The  author  of  the  Books  of  Kings,  who  lived  during 
the  Babylonian  captivity,  did  not  change  the  language 
of  passages  like  the  above  as  being  no  longer  appli- 


80  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

cable  to  the  condition  of  the  people  in  his  time,  for  the 
reason  that  the  altered  circumstances  of  the  people  in 
his  time  were  well  known,  and  were  not  of  such  a 
nature  as  to  demand  that  he  should  change  the  lan- 
guage of  the  original  documents. 

Hence  we  conclude  that  "  The  Book  of  the  Chronicles 
of  the  Kings  of  Judah,"  and  "  The  Book  of  tlie  Chroni- 
cles of  the  Kings  of  Israel,"  were  the  annals  of  the  re- 
spective kings  of  the  two  kingdoms,  written  down  for 
the  most  part  during  the  reign  of  each  king.  These 
annals  were  evidently  written  by  the  person  who  held 
the  office  of  the  Mazkeer  of  his  time.  The  Mazkeer 
was  the  recorder^  historiographer,  the  king^s  annalist, 
whose  duty  it  was  to  record  the  deeds  of  the  king  and 
the  events  of  his  reign.  The  first  mention  made  among 
the  Hebrews  of  this  office  of  recorder  is  in  2  Sam. 
8: 16  where  we  are  told  that  in  the  time  of  David 
"  Jehoshaphat  the  son  of  Ahilud  was  recorder." 
He  is  also  mentioned  in  2  Sam.  20:  24;  1  Ki.  4:  3.  In 
the  time  of  Hezekiah  the  office  was  held  by  Joah  the 
son  of  Asaph,  and  in  the  time  of  Josiah  b}^  Joah  the 
son  of  Jehoaz. 

From  such  sources  the  author  of  the  Books  of  Kings 
drew  his  materials.  It  would  seem  that  this  author 
wrote  the  Books  of  Kings,  or  at  least  completed  his  his- 
tory, in  the  second  half  of  the  Babylonian  captivitj^, 
as  he  states  that  Evil-merodach,  king  of  Babylon,  re- 
leased Jehoiachin,  king  of  Judah,  from  prison  in  the 
thirty-seventh  year  of  his  captivity.  2  Ki.  25:27-30. 
On  the  other  hand  it  would  seem  that  the  author  com- 
pleted his  work  before  the  close  of  the  captivity  as  he 
makes  no  mention  of  that  event.  Who  this  author  of 
the  Books  of  Kings  was  is  not  known. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  81 

V.  Credibility.  — 77^6  Monuments.  The  liistory  of 
the  Books  of  Kings  is  admitted  to  be  distinguished  for 
its  fidelity  and  impartiality.  The  rulers  and  heroes  of 
Hebrew  history  are  estimated  according  to  the  impar- 
tial standards  of  the  divine  law,  and  justified  or  con- 
demned according  to  their  deeds.  Moreover  the  history 
being  derived  from  contemporary  annals,  rests  upon 
the  surest  basis  of  truth,  thus  possessing,  according  to 
sceptics  themselves,  a  very  high  degree  of  probability. 
The  history  of  the  Books  of  the  Kings  receives  con- 
firmation also  from  the  monuments.  The  Moabite 
Stone  discovered  in  1869,  was  erected  about  B.  C.  900, 
by  Mesha,  king  of  Moab,  in  commemoration  of  his 
deliverance  from  the  Israelites.  The  inscription  on 
the  Stone  agrees  with  Biblical  statements  pertaining  to 
that  period.  In  the  course  of  the  inscription  occur  the 
following  names,  that  also  occur  in  the  Hebrew  Scrip- 
tures, viz.  Jehovah,  Chemosh  (the  national  god  of  the 
Moabites),  Mesha,  Omri,  Moab,  Gad,  Israel,  Medeba, 
Atoroth,  Dibon  Baalmeon,  Nebo,  Jahaz,  Beth-dibla- 
thaim,  Aroer,  Iloronaim  and  Kirjathaira.  This  is 
strikingly  confirmatory  of  the  historicit}^  of  the  Scrip- 
ture narrative,  and  proves  that  the  names  in  the  Books 
of  Kings  have  come  down  to  us  in  their  integrity,  and 
that  they  represent  real  persons  and  places.  The  As- 
syrian monuments  furnish  similar  remarkable  con- 
firmations of  the  history  in  these  Books  of  Kings.  For 
example:  for  some  centuries  Samaria  was  known  to 
the  Assyrians  as  "  Beth-Omri"  =  "  house"  or  "city 
of  Omri,"  thus  agreeing  with  the  Hebrew  records  in 
the  importance  they  assign  to  this  king,  as  especially 
confirming  the  statement  in  1  Ki.  16:24.  Ahab, 
[6J 


82  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Oinri\s  son  and  successor,  is  mentioned  by  name  in  an 
Assyrian  contemporary  inscription,  which  in  liarmonj^ 
witli  the  account  in  1  Ki.  18:  4G ;  21 : 1 ,  2,  calls  him 
"Ahab  of  Jezreel."  The  Black  Obelisk  of  Shalmaneser 
contains  a  notice  of  the  Israelitish  king,  Jehu,  and  an- 
other of  the  Syrian  king  ]Iazael,  who  succeeded 
Benhadad,  Ahab's  contemporary.  The  statements  in 
2  Ki.  15:29;  16:9,  10,  29,  etc.,  receive  abundant  con- 
firmation from  the  Assyrian  monuments.  The  annals 
of  Tiglath-pileser  also  mention  the  Israelite  kings, 
Menahem  and  Hoshea.  The  annals  of  Sargon,  Shal- 
maneser's  successor,  note  the  events  connected  with 
the  capture  of  Samaria,  and  the  fall  of  the  northern 
kingdom  of  Israel,  and  assign  these  events  to  his 
(Sargon's)  first  year,  which  was  B.  C.  722,  721.  Thus 
an  exact  agreement  exists  between  the  Assj^'ian  and 
Hebrew  dates,  the  Hebrew  chronology  placing  the  fall 
of  Samaria  135  j'ears  before  the  capture  of  Jerusalem 
b}^  Nebuchadnezzar,  which  was  in  the  eighteenth  year 
of  that  king,  or  B.  C.  586,  and  B.  C.  586  -f-135-=B.  C. 
721.  There  is  a  like  close  agreement,  and  remarkable 
confirmation  in  the  Assyrian  and  Hebrew  accounts  of 
the  military  operations  between  Sennacherib  and 
Hezekiah:  the  annals  of  Sennacherib  compared  with 
2  Ki.  18 :  7,  13-16.  And  the  walls  of  Karnak  in  Egypt 
confirm  the  statement  of  1  Ki.  14:  25,  26. 

VI.  Divisions.— The  Books  of  Kings  may  be  divided 
upon  the  basis  of  their  three  principal  historical 
periods,  viz.  : 

1.  1  Ki.  Chs.  1-11.     Solomon. 

2.  1  Ki.  Chs.  12-22  and  2  Ki.  Chs.  1-17.  Israel  and 
Judah. 

3.  2  Ki.  Chs.  18-25.     Judah. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  83 

VII.  Contents.— The  Scripture  references  in  the  pre- 
ceding table  of  The  Kings  indicate  the  contents. 
Compare  also  tlie  Jiooks  of  those  prophets  who  were 
contemporaries  of  the  kings. 

VIII.  Doctrine.— The  two  principal  teachings  that 
receive  repeated  and  startling  enforcement  are — 

1.  Obedience  and  righteousness  procure  every  bless- 
ing. 

2.  Disobedience  and  apostas}^  work  general  ruin. 

IX.  Messianic.— 'Jlie  onl}''  Messianic  element  in  the 
Books  of  Kings  is  that  which  is  bound  up  in  the  theo- 
cratic development  of  the  kingdom,  and  in  its  typical 
characters,  e.  g.  Solomon. 


FIRST  AND  SECOND  CHRONICLES 

I.  Name.— D it* re  ha y y am inL  =  Registers  of  Days  or 
Journal  of  Affairs.  The  nature  of  the  work  gives  it 
this  name.  The  name  Chronicles  comes  from  some 
copies  of  the  Vulgate. 

II.  Position.— The  Books  of  Chronicles  originally 
constituted  one  Book.  Thej-  are  placed  at  the  end  of 
the  Hebrew  Canon,  being  included  in  the  Hagiographa. 
As  the  events  related  in  them,  however,  generall}^  be- 
long to  the  same  age  as  the  Books  of  Kings,  they  ap- 
propriately follow  those  Books,  as  in  the  A.  V. 

III.  Time.— Considering  that  the  Books  of  Chron- 
icles open  with  the  genealogies  found  in  Genesis,  they 
cover  a  period  of  time  beginning  with  Adam,  and  ex- 
tending to  the  proclamation  of  Cyrus  for  the  rebuild- 
ing of  the  temple  in  Jerusalem. 


84  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

IV.  Composition:— Sources,  Date  and  Authorship. 
The  author  of  Chronicles  refers  to  various  works  treat- 
ing of  the  main  portions  of  the  history  covered  by  his 
Books,  which  works  he  doubtless  used  in  the  composi- 
tion of  his  own  work.  These  works  are  in  addition  to 
the  earlier  historical,  canonical  Books  from  Genesis  to 
and  including  Kings.  The  first  mentioned  of  these 
additional  sources  are — The  Book  of  Nathan  the 
prophet,  and  The  Book  of  Gad  the  seer.  1  Ciir. 
29 :  29.  The  Prophecy  of  Ahijah  the  Shiionite,  and 
the  Visions  of  Iddo  the  seer,  are  also  mentioned  in  ad- 
dition to  the  Book  of  Nathan  the  prophet,  as  sources 
for  the  history  of  Solomon.  2  Chn  9:20.  Other 
sources  for  the  history  of  other  kings  are,  the  Book  of 
Shemaiah  the  prophet,  the  Book  of  Iddo  the  seer  con- 
cerning genealogies  (2  Chr.  12:15),  the  Midrash  or 
Commentary  of  the  prophet  Iddo  (2  Chr.  13:22),  the 
Book  of  the  Kings  of  Judah  and  Israel  (2  Chr.  16: 11; 
25:26;  28:26;  32:32);  the  same  work  or  works  re- 
ferred to,  as  the  Book  of  the  Kings  of  Israel  and  Judah 
(2  Chr.  27:7;  35:27;  36:8);  the  Book  of  the  Kings 
of  Israel  (2  Chr.  20:34;  33:18);  the  Commentary  of 
the  Book  of  Kings  (2  Chr.  24:27).  The  author  also 
refers  to  Isaiah  the  prophet  (2  Chr.  26:22),  and  to 
the  vision  of  Isaiah  the  prophet  (2  Chr.  32:  32).  Com- 
paring the  Books  of  Chronicles  with  the  Books  of  Sam- 
uel and  Kings  there  is  no  good  reason  to  doubt  that 
the  compiler  of  the  former  Books  not  only  made  use  of 
the  latter  Books,  but  that  they  were  for  him  in  many 
matters  the  chief  source  in  his  history  of  the  kings. 

As  to  the  matter  of  date : — as  the  history  in  these 
Books  of  Chronicles  terminates  with  the  proclamation 
of  Cyrus  for  the  rebuilding  of  Jerusalem  (2  Chr.  36 :  22, 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.        .  85 

23),  about  536  B.  C,  the  Books  could  not  have  been 
composed  before  that  monarch's  reign.  On  the  other 
hand  there  is  nothing  in  the  Books  of  Chronicles  be- 
longing to  an  age  later  than  that  of  Ezra,  which  is 
probable  proof  that  they  were  composed  in  his  time. 
The  supposition  that  the  genealogies  in  1  Chr.  3: 19-24 
extend  to  the  time  of  Alexander  the  Great  is  unfound- 
ed, for  the  list  goes  no  further  than  the  sons  of  Han- 
aniah,  the  son  of  Zerubbabel.  There  is  no  evidence 
that  the  names  following  in  the  list  were  those  of 
descendants  of  the  previous  ones,  but  rather  that  they 
are  parallel  genealogies.  And  this  is  confirmed  by  the 
fact  that  in  the  last  part  of  the  list  occur  names  of 
persons  found  also  in  Ezra,  who  speaks  of  them  as 
having  gone  up  with  him  in  the  reign  of  Artaxerxes. 
Accordingly  the  genealogies  in  Chronicles  do  not  come 
down  later  than  the  time  of  Ezra,  for  Zerubbabel 
went  up  to  Jerusalem  in  the  beginning  of  the  reign  of 
Cyrus,  536  B.  C,  and  the  grandchildren  of  Zerubba- 
bel, mentioned  in  1  Chr.  3:  19-21,  would  be  the  con- 
temporaries of  Ezra,  who  went  up  to  Jerusalem  in  the 
seventh  year  of  Artaxerxes,  about  457  B.  C.  Ezra 
7:6,  7. 

In  i3oint  of  authorship,  the  spirit,  the  style,  the  lin- 
guistic usages,  the  comparison  of  the  Books  of  Chron- 
icles and  Ezra — all  point  to  Ezra  as  the  author.     ^ 

V.  Credibility.— As  the  main  portion  of  the  historj^ 
in  Chronicles  is  the  same  as  that  contained  in  the 
Books  of  Kings,  the  Books  of  Chronicles  possess  all 
the  claims  to  be  considered  genuine  history  that  be- 
long to  the  narratives  in  the  earlier  Books.  Where 
the  author  of  Chronicles  furnishes  additional  matter 
he  refers  to  the  original  sources  whence  he  derived  his 


SG  INTKODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

inforination.  And  in  addition  to  this  the  historical 
credibility  of  the  author  is  confirmed  by  independent 
testimony,  and  canonical  authorities  not  named  by  the 
writer.  Thus  the  invasion  of  Jerusalem  b}'  the  Phil- 
istines and  Arabians  in  the  reign  of  Jehoram  (2  Chr. 
21:16-19),  not  mentioned  in  Kings,  is  confirmed  by 
Joel  3 :  4:-G.  And  the  wars  of  Uzziah  and  Ahaz  against 
the  Philistines,  described  in  2  Chr.  26:6;  28:18, 
agree  with  Isa.  14:  28;  Amos  6:  2.  In  respect  to  num- 
bers, e.  g.  ages  and  reigns  of  kings,  the  Books  of 
Chronicles  and  Kings  as  a  rule  agree.  In  a  few  in- 
stances numbers  in  Chronicles  are  excessive,  but  so 
excessive  as  at  once  to  indicate  that  the  fault  is  not 
to  be  ascribed  to  the  author,  but  to  a  corruption  of  the 
original  text. 

VI.  DesigD.— Althougli  the  Books  of  Samuel  and 
Kings  were  already  written,  still  the  author  of  Chroni- 
cles had  a  design  in  preparing  his  work  not  met  by 
the  former  Books.  This  design  was  in  the  first  place, 
to  furnish  the  genealogies  of  the  Israelites,  which  were 
but  partially  given  in  the  other  Books  of  the  Hebrew 
people.  In  the  next  place  his  design  was  to  give  a 
connected  history  from  the  death  of  Saul  to  the  pro- 
clamation of  Cyrus  for  the  rebuilding  of  the  temple  in 
Jerusalem.  In  carrying  out  this  design  he  confines 
himself,  after  the  separation  of  the  ten  tribes,  to  the 
house  of  Judah,  omitting  considerable  matter  found  in 
Samuel  and  Kings,  and  introducing  new  matter,  espec- 
ially such  as  relates  to  the  armies  of  David,  and  the 
service  of  the  priests  and  Levites  in  the  temple. 

VII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— These  are  as  fol- 
lows : 

1.   1  Chr.  Chs.  1-9.     A  series  of  genealogical  tables. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  87 

similar  to  those  found  in  Genesis,  beginnin"-  with 
Adam,  together  with  the  genealogies  of  the  Israelites 
in  the  times  following  the  history  in  the  Pentateuch, 
terminating  in  the  royal  line  with  the  sons  of  Elioenai 
(3 :  24),  who  lived  after  the  return  of  the  Jews  from  Baby- 
lon. Interspersed  with  the  genealogies  are  other  no- 
tices,— historical,  geographical  and  liturgical. 

2.  1  Chr.  Chs.  10-29  and  2  Chr.  Chs.  1-9.  Begins 
with  the  death  of  Saul  and  the  accession  of  David 
to  the  Kingdom  of  Israel,  and  giving  the  histories  of 
David  and  Solomon,   ends  with  the  death  of  Solomon. 

3.  2  Chr.  Chs.  10-36.  Begins  with  the  reign  of 
Rehoboam,  Solomon's  son  and  successor,  embraces  the 
history  of  the  kingdom  of  Judah  only,  and  extends  to 
the  proclamation  of  Cyrus  for  the  rebuilding  of  the 
temple  in  Jerusalem. 

VIII.  Doctrine.— Remembering  that  the  Books  of 
Chronicles  were  written  at  the  termination  of  the  Baby- 
lonian exile,  these  doctrinal  teachings  become  empha- 
sized : — 

1.  God's  dispensational  ways  from  the  beginning. 

2.  The  election  of  grace  and  the  reward  of  faithful- 
ness in  the  return  of  a  remnant  from  captivity  to  the 
Land  of  Promise. 

3.  The  abandonment  of  idolatry  and  the  attainment 
of  spirituality  through  divine  chastisement. 

IX.  Messianic— The  Books  of  Chronicles  close  with 
a  kingless  nation ;  but  a  nation  looking  forward  to  the 
near  coming  of  its  true  King,  Jehovah,  the  Messiah; — 
the  King  of  whom  its  David  and  Solomon  were  types. 


88  INTRODUCTION   OUTLINES. 

EZRA. 

I.  Name.— In  Hebrew  and  English,  Ezra.  The  Book 
is  so  called  from  its  principal  character,  Ezra,  and  per- 
haps also  from  his  being  the  reputed  author  of  tlie 
Book.  The  Book  is  written  partly  in  Hebrew,  partly 
in  Chaldee. 

II.  Position.— Formerly  the  Books  of  Ezra  and  Neh- 
emiah  constituted  one  Book.  But  in  modern  editions 
of  the  Hebrew  Bible,  as  also  in  the  LXX,  the  Peshito- 
Syriac,  and  the  Vulgate,  they  are  separated.  No  suffi- 
cient reason  exists  for  combining  Ezra  and  Nehemiah 
in  one  Book  as  if  they  were  the  work  of  one  and  the 
same  author.  The  language  with  which  Nehemiah 
opens, — "The  words  of  Nehemiah,  the  son  of  Hacha- 
liah,"  naturally  separates  the  two  Books.  The  list  in 
Ezra  Ch.  2  is  given,  with  slight  variation,  in  Neh. 
7  :  G-70.  If  the  two  Books  are  really  one,  and  the  work 
of  a  single  author,  wh}'  is  the  long  list  given  twice,  and 
with  variations  ? 

II.  Time.— The  Books  of  Ezra  and  Nehemiah  extend  . 
over  a  period  of  about  one  hundred  years,   i.  e.  from* 
the  return  of  the  exiles  under  Zerubbabel,  B.   C.   536, 
to  the  second  visit  of  Nehemiah  in  B.  C.  432. 

IV.  Theme.— The  Books  of  Ezra  and  Nehemiah  treat 
of — Restoration,  Reorganization  and  Reformation; — 
that  is,  the  restoration  of  the  Jews  from  the  Babylonian 
captivity,  their  reorganization  in  the  Promised  Land, 
and  the  reformation  as  to  certain  abuses  that  had 
crept  in. 

V.  Clironolog-y.— The  chronology  of  the  period  of 
Ezra  and  Nehemiah,  and  up  to  the  close  of  the  Old 
Testament  Canon,  is  in  brief  as  follows: 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  89 


B.  C.  536. 

Cyrus. 

B.  C.  444. 

Nehemiah's  first  visit  to 

'■•      529. 

Cambyses. 

Jerusalem. 

'•      522. 

Pseudo-Smerdls. 

"     432. 

Nehemiali's  second  visit  to 

'•      522. 

Darius  Hystaspis. 
Dedication  of  the  Temple. 

Jerusalem. 

"      516. 

^-     425. 

Xerxes  II. 

'•     485. 

Xerxes. 

''     425. 

Sogdianus 

"     465. 

Artaxerxes  I.    (Longima- 

•'      424. 

Darius  11. 

nus). 

^^      405. 

Artaxerxes  II. 

''     458. 

Mission  of  Ezra. 

VI.  Corn-position:— Authorship,  ZMity,  etc.  Clis. 
7:  27-9:15  are  generally  conceded  to  be  the  work  of 
Ezra.  The  remainder  of  the  Book  is  for  the  most  part 
assigned  b}^  critics  to  the  author  of  the  Books  of  Chron- 
icles. No  sufficient  reason  exists,  however,  against  as- 
<iribing  the  entire  Book  to  Ezra.  That  Ezra  speaks  at 
times  in  the  tirst  person,  and  at  other  times  uses  the 
third  person,  is  in  the  light  of  Scripture  usage,  no  suffi- 
<iient  reason  to  infer  diversity  of  authorship.  Ch.  10 
stands  in  such  close  connection  witli  what  precedes 
that  we  cannot  but  conclude  it  was  written  by  the 
same  author.  Moreover  it  is  not  at  all  probable  that 
Ezra  would  begin  his  narrative  with  7:27,  or  with  the 
letter  of  Artaxerxes  that  immediately  precedes  it  in 
7:12-26;  but  would  rather  prefix  to  it  an  introduction 
after  the  manner  of  7:1-10.  Hence  it  is  concluded 
that  Ezra  wrote  the  second  part  of  the  Book  bearing 
his  name,  i.  e.  Chs.  7-10.  But  the  first  part  is  also  to 
be  assigned  to  him  as  its  author.  Ezra  did  not  go  up 
to  Jerusalem  till  the  seventh  year  of  Artaxerxes,  about 
B.  C.  458.  He  therefore  had  no  active  part  in  the  af- 
fairs i-elated  in  the  first  part  of  the  Book,  and  ending 
■with  the  dedication  of  the  temple  and  tlie  observance 
of  the  passover  (6:15-22).  But  the  manner  in  which 
the  second  part  of  Ezra  opens,  viz. — "  Now,  after  these 
things,  in  the  reign  of  Artaxerxes,"  naturally  refers  to 
a  preceding  part.  As  Ezra  wrote  an  account  of  the 
second  companj^  of  exiles  who  returned  to  Jerusalem, 


90  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

it  was  the  most  natural  thing  for  hi  in  to  prefix  to  it  an 
account  of  the  preceding  company  who  had  returned. 
He  had  several  documents  to  furnish  him  with  the 
materials  for  this  part  of  his  histor^^  viz.  the  same  list 
that  Nehemiah  had  found  when  he  went  up  to  Jerusa- 
lem, and  incorporated  in  his  Book  (Neh.  7:5-?3);  the 
decree  of  C3^rus  in  favor  of  the  Jews;  the  letter  of  their 
enemies  to  Artaxerxes,  and  his  order  to  stop  building  the 
temple;  and  the  decree  of  Darius  for  its  rebuilding. 
These  documents  together  with  the  statements  of  those 
who  had  been  eye-witnesses  of  those  former  transac- 
tions furnished  Ezra  witli  the  material  for  writing  the 
history  of  the  first  part  of  his  Book,  Ohs.  1-G.  This 
history  is  consecutive,  and  directl}'  connected  with  the 
second  part.  Why  should  any  other  than  Ezra  write 
the  greater  part  of  the  Book  (C'hs.  1-G)  and  prefix  it  to 
a  writing  of  Ezra,  instead  of  calling  it  by  some  other 
name  ? 

VII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  Book  of  Ezra 
naturally  divides  itsely  into  two  parts. 

1.  Ezra  Chs.  1-G.  Account  of  the  first  company  of 
exiles  who  went  up  to  Jerusalem  from  Babylon  with 
Zerubbabel,  in  the  beginning  of  the  reign  of  Cyrus, 
and  the  restoration  of  the  temple.  The  account  in- 
cludes,— a.  Ch.  1.  Decree  of  Cyrus  permitting  the  Jews 
to  return  to  Jerusalem,  and  take  with  them  the  sacred 
vessels  Nebuchadnezzar  had  removed  to  Babylon,  b. 
Ch.  2.  Register  of  those  who  returned,  c.  Ch.  8. 
Altar  of  Burnt-olfering  set  up;  Feast  of  Booths  ob- 
served ;  foundations  of  the  temple  laid.  d.  Ch.  4. 
The  work  of  restoring  the  temple  impeded  till  the 
second  year  of  Darius,  e.  Ch.  5.  The  work  of  restor- 
ation resumed  under  the  impetus  given  b}^  the  prophets 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  91 

Haggai   and   Zecliariali.     f.    Ch.    6.     The   temple   re- 
stored, dedicated,  and  the  Passover  observed. 

2.  Ezra  Chs.  7-10.  Acconnt  of  tlie  going  up  to 
Jerusalem  of  Ezra  and  his  companions  in  the  seventh 
year  of  Artaxerxes,  and  the  reforms  they  introduced 
after  their  arrival;  embracing — a.  Ch.  7.  Tlie  permis- 
sion of  Ezra  and  his  company  to  return;  the  decree  of 
Artaxerxes;  Ezra's  gratitude  to  God.  h.  Ch.  8.  Ezra's 
companions  and  the  journey  to  Jerusalem,  c.  Ch.  9. 
Jews  in  Judah  having  contracted  marriage  with  foreign 
wives,  Ezra  makes  a  solemn  confession  to  God  in  the 
name  of  his  people,     d.   Cli.  10.     The  reform  of  abuses, 

VIII.  Doctrine.— The  history  of  Ezra  emphasizes — 

1.  God's  government  of  tlie  world  for  the  benefit  of 
his  people,  as  e.  (j.  in  the  decrees  of  restoration,  etc. 

2.  Restoration  to  God,  reorganization  of  the  worship 
of  God,  and  reformation  in  life. 

IX.  Messianic— While  there  is  no  direct  Messianic 
prophec3^  in  the  Book  of  Ezra,  still  a  number  of  Mes- 
sianic prophecies  were  uttered  in  the  times  of  Ezra 
and  the  restoration,  as,  e.  g.  in  the  Books  of  the 
prophets  Haggai  and  Zechariah,  and  in  the  post-exilic 
Psalms.     Zerubbabel  is  also  a  type  of  the  Messiah. 


NEHEMIAH. 

I.  Name.— This  Book  receives  its  name  Nehemiah 
from  the  fact  that  he  is  the  chief  character  in,  as  well 
as  the  author  of  the  Book.  This  Nehemiah  is  not  to 
be  confounded  with  the  Xehemiah  of  Ez.  2:  2. 


92  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

II.  Position.— The  Books  of  Ezra  and  Nehemiah, 
formerly  taken  as  one  Book,  are  in  modern  editions  of 
the  Hebrew  Bible,  in  the  LXX,  in  the  Peshito-Syriac 
and  Vnlgate,  separated  as  they  should  be.  The  Book 
of  Nehemiah,  nnlike  Ezra,  is  written  wholly  in 
Hebrew.  It  properlj^  follows  Ezra  as  it  supplements 
and  completes  the  account  of  the  return  of  the  Jews 
from  captivity,  recorded  in  Ezra. 

III.  Time. -Nehemiah  flourished  and  wrought  his 
w'ork  in  behalf  of  the  restored  captives  nearly  one 
hundred  years  after  Zerubbabel  reached  Judea.  The 
Book  itself  of  Nehemiah  covers  a  period  of  about 
twelve  years,  from  B.  C.  444  to  432.  See  Chroiiology 
under  Ezra. 

IV.  Biographical.— Nehemiah  was  cupbearer  to  Ar- 
taxerxes  Longimanus.  In  the  twentieth  3"ear  of  that 
monarch,  Nehemiali,  having  receiv^ed  intelligence  of 
the  distressed  condition  of  his  countrymen  in  Judah, 
obtained  permission  from  the  king  to  visit  Jerusalem 
and  to  rebuild  it.  After  this  the  Book  furnishes  an 
account  of  the  building  of  the  wall  of  Jerusalem  under 
his  administration,  the  dedication  of  the  rebuilt  wall, 
the  correction  of  abuses,  interspersed  with  various 
lists.     See  Introduction  to  Malachi. 

V.  Composition :— Authorship,  Unity,  etc.  The 
close  connection  that  exists  between  different  parts  of 
the  Book  of  Nehemiah  argues  a  single  authorship. 
The  opening  words  of  the  Book  assert  that  this  author 
is  Nehemiah  himself.  And  this  is  for  the  most  part 
conceded  with  one  or  two  exceptions.  Some  critics 
regard  Chs.  8,  9,  10  as  an  interpolation  made  by  the 
author  of  the  Books  of  Chronicles  upon  the  basis,  of 
contemporary  notes.     But  such  an  interpolation  in  the 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  93 

writinojs  of  one  who  held  the  position  Nehemiah  did, 
and  that  an  interpolation  too  in  the  middle  of  the  Book, 
is  most  unnatural.  Moreover  there  is  a  close  connec- 
tion between  the  incidents  recorded  in  this  so-called 
interpolated  section,  and  what  immediatel}^  precedes; 
6^.  ^.  compare  7 :  73  with  8:14-18,  and  9:1.  Besides 
the  minute  particulars  given  in  these  three  so-called 
interpolated  chapters  show  that  the}^  were  written 
down  by  an  eye-witness;  thus  note  the  writer's  use  of 
the  first  person  plural  in  Oh.  10,  showing  that  he  was 
a  participator  in  the  events.  Once  more  the  unity  of 
authorship,  the  unity  of  the  whole  Book  is  evidenced 
by  the  fact  that  there  are  linguistic  peculiarities  com- 
mon both  to  the  so-called  interpolated  section  and  the 
undisputed  parts  of  the  Book,  that  occur  rarel}^  else- 
where. As  to  12:1-16,  the  incorporation  of  such  a 
list  in  the  Book  is  altogether  appropriate,  as  its  object 
was  to  give  the  names  of  the  Levites  who  took  part  in 
the  dedication  of  the  wall  of  Jerusalem,  described  in 
12:24-47.  It  is  perfectly  consistent  with  Nehemiah's 
authorship  that  reference  should  be  made  in  12:  26,  47 
to  "the  days  of  Nehemiah  and  Ezra,"  for  these  words 
could  have  been  written  bj^  Nehemiah  after  he  had 
retired  from  the  governorship  if  not  before,  as  they 
refer  to  his  political  life.  The  historicity  of  the  Books 
of  Ezra  and  Nehemiah  is  confirmed  by  the  correspond- 
ence that  exists  between  them  and  other  prophetical 
writings. 

VI.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  principal  divi- 
sions are  three,  viz.  : 

1.  Chs.  1-7.  Embracing — a.  Chs.  1,  2.  Occasion 
of  Nehemiah's  visit  to  Jerusalem — the  restoration  of 
the  city's  walls,  etc.     6.   Chs.  3,  4.     The  opposition  to 


94  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

the  progress  of  this  work,  overcome,  c.  Ch.  5.  Se- 
cures just  enactments  in  certain  administrative  courses. 
d.  Ch.  6.  Another  attempt  to  hinder  the  completion 
of  the  walls  defeated,  e.  Ch.  7.  ]>eneficent  muni- 
cipal measures  adopted,  and  a  list  of  the  exiles  who 
returned  with  Zerubbabel  given. 

2.  Chs.  8-10.  Embracing— a.  Ch.  8.  The  people's 
request  to  have  the  Law  read,  granted;  the  feast  of 
Booths  observed,  h.  Ch.  9.  Confession  of  sin,  and  a 
solemn  covenant  made.  c.  Ch.  10.  The  terms  of  the 
covenant. 

3.  Chs.  11-13.  Embracing— a.  Ch.  11.  Residents 
of  Jerusalem  and  neighboring  towns,  b.  Ch.  12.  Le- 
vitical  lists;  account  of  the  dedication  of  the  walls; 
dues  of  the  priests  and  Levites,  and  the  liberality  of 
the  communit}^  c.  Nehemiah's  second  visit  to  Jeru- 
salem;  religious  measures  av^  reforms.  See  under 
Malachi. 

VII.  Doctrine  and  Messianic— See  under  Ezra,  and 
compare  Haggai,  Zechariah  and  Malachi. 


ESTHER. 

I.  ^2iTaie,~Aster  =  Esther  =^  star.  The  Book  is  so 
named  from  its  principal  character,  a  Jewish  maid 
called  originally  Hadassah,  but  Esther  after  she  be- 
came the  wife  of  Ahasuerus,  i.  e.  Xerxes  (B.  C.  485- 
465). 

II.  Time.— The  Persian  King  Ahasuerus  of  the 
Book  of  Esther  is  now  generally  identified  with  Xerxes, 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  05 

>y1io  i-eigned  B.  C.  485-4G5.  Tlie  events  therefore 
took  place  during  his  reign.  The  Book  opens  in  the 
third  year  of  his- reign  (1:3),  v.  e.  B.  C.  482.  See 
Chronology  under  Ezra. 

III.  Arg-iiment.— The  narrative  of  the  book  is, 
briefly,  as  follows: — King  Ahasuerus,  who  reigned  from 
India  to  Ethiopia,  in  the  third  year  of  his  reign  made  a 
g:reat  feast  in  Shushan,  the  palace.  During  the  feast 
he  ordered  Queen  Yashti  to  be  brought  in  that  he 
might  exhibit  her  beauty  to  his  guests.  Yashti  refused 
to  comply  with  his  request;  whereupon  he  deposed  her 
from  being  queen,  and  chose  in  her  stead  Esther,  a 
Jewess,  the  cousin  and  adopted  daughter  of  Mordecai. 
Haman,  prime  minister  of  Ahasuerus,  angered  because 
Mordecai  did  not  show  him  required  reverence,  ob-* 
tained  a  decree  from  the  king  for  the  slaughter  of  all 
the  Jews  in  the  Kingdom.  Esther  obtains  a  counter 
decree.  Mordecai  is  promoted  to  the  highest  i)lace  of 
honor,  and  Haman  is  hung.  The  Jews  slaughter  their 
enemies,  and  introduce  the  feast  of  Purim  in  commem- 
oration of  their  deliverance.  The  Book  concludes  with 
a  description  of  the  greatness  of  Ahasuerus. 

IV.  Credibility.— Against  the  credibility  of  the  his- 
tory in  Esther  it  is  urged  that  it  is  not  supposable  that 
the  king  w^ould  issue  a  decree  for  the  slaughter  of  all 
the  Jews  in  his  Kingdom  and  publish  that  decree  twelve 
months  before  it  was  to  take  effect.  It  is  also  consid- 
ered unnatural  that  the  king,  Xerxes,  instead  of  revok- 
ing the  bloody  decree,  should  issue  a  counter  decree 
giving  the  Jews  libert}^  to  arm  and  defend  themselves, 
resulting  in  the  slaughter  of  75,000  of  his  subjects. 
But  there  is  nothing  at  all  incredible  in  all  this,  or 
any  like  objections  that  are  urged  against  the  histori- 


96  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

city  of  the  Book.  They  correspond  precisely  with  what 
is  known  of  Xerxes  from  other  sources,  with  what  is 
known  of  many  another  despot.  The  historical  details 
furnished  are  too  numerous  atd  precise  to  regard  the 
Book  as  pure  fabrication,  and  to  regard  it  as  other  than 
genuine  contemporary  history.  The  universal  observ- 
ance of  the  feast  of  Purim  is  a  standing  attestation  of 
the  historicity  of  Esther.  The  fact  that  the  name  of 
God  does  not  occur  in  the  Book  of  Esther  is  certainly 
strange,  but  seems  also  to  be  by  design,  and  that  not 
simply  in  order  to  guard  against  the  profanation  of  the 
name  at  the  Purim  feast  when  it  was  intended  that  the 
Book  should  be  read,  but  also  in  this  way  to  give  peculiar 
emjjhasis,  to  render  all  the  more  conspicuous,  the  provi- 
dential work  of  God  which  is  so  obviously  present  and 
operative  all  through  the  history  of  the  Book. 

V.  Composition  :—Autliorsliip  and  Date.  The  au- 
thor of  the  Book  is  not  known.  It  was  probably  writ- 
ten by  a  Jew  at  Susa  during  the  Persian  dominion. 
The  minuteness  and  vividness  of  the  particulars  nar- 
rated would  seem  to  show  that  the  writer  lived  in  close 
proximity  to  the  events  recorded. 

VI.  Doctrine  and  Messianic— The  doctrinal  thought 
emphasized  in  the  Book  is  God's  government  in  provi- 
dence. While  there  is  no  direct  Messianic  prophecy 
in  the  Book,  still  throughout  it  there  is  a  Messianic 
symbolism.  The  Book  was  admitted  into  the  Canon 
because  it  contained  the  history  of  a  most  remarkable 
deliverance  wrought  out  by  Providence  in  behalf  of 
Israel,  a  deliverance  which  may  be  regarded  as  a  pre- 
figuring symbol  of  that  greater  deliverance  wrought 
out  by  Messiah  in  behalf  of  the  whole  Israel  of  God. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES,  '■>  i 

HEBREW  POETRY. 

Hebrew  poetry  goes  back  to  the  earliest  times,  ap- 
pearing already  in  Genesis.  A  number  of-  the  Books 
of  the  Old  Testament  are  entirely  poetical,  while  poeti- 
cal selections  are  preserved  also  in  the  historical  Books. 
The  Books  entirely  poetical  are  Job  (except  Prologue 
and  Epilogue),  Psalms,  Proverbs,  The  Song  of  Songs, 
and  The  Lamentations  of  Jeremiah.  Eeclesiastes 
approaches  the  form  of  gnomic  poetry.  Hebrew  poetry 
may  be  classified  as  ep/'c,  when  it  describes  God's  deal- 
ings with  his  people,  e.  g.  Job,  Psa.  78;  Itjric,  when  it 
expresses  in  song  the  religious  or  heart  experiences  of 
the  writer,  e.  g.  The  Song  of  Songs  and  most  of  the 
Psalms;  didactic  when  it  inculcates  the  duties  of  life, 
e.  g.  Proverbs;  elegiac  as  in  The  Lamentations  of 
Jeremiah.  There  is  strictly  no  dramatic  poetry  in  the 
Old  Testament.  Hebrew  poetry  has  properly  neither 
rhyme  nor  metre,  but  is  always  distinguished  by 
rhythm.  The  rhythm  of  Hebrew  poetry  consists  in  a 
certain  harmonious  relation  of  the  parts  or  members  of 
the  single  verses  to  each  other,  called  tJie  parallelism  of 
memhers.  This  parallelism  of  members  is  the  most 
distinguishing  feature  of  Hebrew  poetry.  It  is  classi- 
fied as  synonymous,  antithetical,  and  synthetical  par- 
allelism. 

1.  Synonj^mous  parallelism  consists  in  repeating  in 
different  form,  and  so  additionally  enforcing,  in  the 
second  member  of  the  verse,  the  thought  contained  in 
the  first  member;  e.  g.  Xum.  23:8;  Josh.  10:  12;  Psa. 
78:43.     lI.  Y. 

2.  Antithetic  parallelism  is  that  wherein  the  thought 

[7J 


98  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

of  the  second  member  stands  in  contrast  with  the  first, 
the  contrast  emphasizing  or  confirming;  e.  g.  Psa. 
1:6;  Prov.  10:1.     R.  V. 

3.  Synthetic  or  constructive  parallelism  consists  of 
several,  and  sometimes  of  many,  members,  closely  con- 
nected, and  illustrating  one  subject; — it  supplements 
or  completes;  e.  g.  Psa.  37:25,  26.     R.  V. 

4.  A  fourth  kind  of  parallelism,  though  of  rare  oc- 
currence, is  climatic  parallelism,  where  the  second 
member  takes  up  and  completes  the  thought  of  the 
first  member  in  the  manner  of  an  ascending  climax; 
e.  g.  Ex.  15  :  ]  6 ;  Psa.  29  :  1.     R.  V. 

By  far  the  greater  number  of  verses  in  the  poetry  of 
the  Old  Testament  consist  of  distichs,  i.  e.  two  lines, 
thus  examples  cited  above.  A  very  few  are  mono- 
sticlis,  consisting  of  a  single  line,  e.  g.  Psa.  16: 1.  In 
tristichs,  or  verses  of  three  lines,  sometimes  the  three 
lines  are  synonymous  (Psa.  5: 11);  sometimes  the  first 
and  second  members  are  parallel  in  thought,  and  the 
third  completes  it  (Psa.  2:2);  sometimes  the  second 
and  third  members  are  parallel  (Psa.  3:7);  and  some- 
times the  first  and  third  are  parallel,  and  the  second  is 
in  the  nature  of  a  parenthesis  (Psa.  4:2).  In  tetra- 
siicJis,  or  verses  of  four  lines,  generally  the  first  mem- 
ber is  parallel  to  the  second,  and  the  third  parallel  to 
the  fourth  (Gen.  49:7),  but  sometimes  the  first  is 
parallel  to  the  third,  and  the  second  parallel  to  the 
fourth  (Psa.  55:21),  and  occasionally  the  tetrastich 
takes  other  forms.  Of  rare  occurrence  are  pentastichs 
(Num.  24:8),  and  hexastichs  (Song  of  Songs  4:8). 
Using  the  term  strophe  in  the  modified  sense  as  signi- 
fying a  group  of  verses,  connected  together  by  a  cer- 
tain  unity   of   thought,    then   strophes   are   found  in 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  99 

Hebrew  poetry.  Such  strophes  appear  in  Psalms 
where  refrains  occur,  as  e.  g.  Psa.  42:  5,  11,  and  48:  5, 
the  two  Psalms  originall}^  constituting  one.  The 
progress  of  thought  in  poems  of  considerable  length 
are  also  marked  bj'  pauses  constituting  strophes. 
Manj^  of  tlie  Psalms  fall  logically,  as  well  as  poetically, 
into  groups  of  verses,  thus  also  constituting  strophes. 


JOB. 


I.'Satne.—Eyob  =  Joh=persecidecl  or  enduring. 
The  Book  is  so  called  from  the  name  of  its  principal 
character,  or  hero. 

II.  Position.— The  Book  of  Job  is  included  in  the 
Hagiographa,  the  third  division  of  the  Hebrew  Bible, 
called  according  to  the  Jews  Ketubim  or  Writings. 
The  Book  also  forms  a  part  of  the  so-called  ChoJchmah 
— or  Wisdom-Literature  (Job,  Proverbs,  Ecclesiastes) 
of  the  Hebrews.  This  Literature  is  so  called  on  ac- 
count of  the  philosophico-religious  character  of  its 
observations  and  discussions  upon  the  phenomena  and 
problems  of  human  life. 

III.  Time.— According  to  the  representations  of  the 
Book,  Job  and  the  events  recorded  in  the  Book  of  Job 
belong  to  the  patriarchal  period,  or  the  very  earliest 
part  of  the  Mosaic  period.     See  V  and  VI  below. 

IV.  Desig-n— Argument.— It  is  generally  conceived 
that  the  design  of  the  Book  of  Job  is  to  discuss  the 
problem—  Why  do  the  righteous  suffer  9  and  that  the 
result  of  the  discussion  is  a  failure  to  arrive  at  a  satis- 
factory solution  of  the  problem.     But  this  view  of  its 


100  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

design  is  contradicted  by  the  Book,  and  especially  by 
the  Prologue  and  Epilogue  of  the  Book  p^-ecisely  where, 
if  anywhere,  we  should  go  to  find  the  design  of  the 
Book.  According  to  the  Prologue  and  Epilogue,  and 
according  to  the  entire  l^ook,  the  one  great  design  of 
the  Book  is  not  to  discuss  the  problem  of — Why  do  the 
righteous  sulfer  ? — but  to  furnish  a  preeminent  ex- 
ample, and  that  example  teaching  precisely  this — 
Behold  hoiv  the  righteous  can  suffer^  and  still  endure 
stedfast  to  the  end ;  stedfast  to  his  God  and  to  his  in- 
tegrity. That  this  is  the  one  great  design  of  the  Book 
is  the  plain  and  emphatic  teaching  of  the  Prologue, 
especially  as  it  comes  out  in  God's  repeated  testimony 
and  challenge  with  respect  to  Job  and  there  is  none 
like  him  in  all  the  earth  in  being  perfect,  upright, 
fearing  God,  eschewing  evil,  and  holding  fast  his  in- 
tegrity to  the  end  and  against  all.  No  interpretation 
can  be  put  uj^jon  the  Book,  or  any  part  of  it,  that  does 
uot  agree  with  the  statement  of  God  in  regard  to  Job, 
and  accept  it  as  a  true  statement  of  Job's  i-eal  char- 
acter. Moreover  that  this  is  the  design  of  the  Book  is. 
the  evident  teaching  of  the  prophet  Ezekiel  (14:  14,  20), 
and  the  apostle  James  (5: 11,  R.  V.).  How  this  is  and 
that  this  is  the  design  of  the  Book  appears  also  from  the 
argument  of  the  Book  which  is  as  follows: — The  first 
Celestial  Council  meets  (1 :  G).  The  principal  char- 
acters in  this  Council  are  God,  Satan  and  Job.  The 
point  at  issue  is, — Which  is  the  greater  in  and  over 
man,  the  power  of  God,  or  the  power  of  Satan  ?  A 
test  of  this  is  to  be  instituted,  a  supreme  trial  of  it  is 
to  be  made.  Job  is  the  one  chosen  and  mutually 
agreed  upon  as  the  one  in  whom  the  test,  the  trial  is 
to  be  made.     God    issues   the   challeniie    to  Satan  in 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  101 

the  words — "Hast  thou  considefecl  my  servant  Job? 
fc  there  is  none  like  him  in  the  earth,"  etc.  Satan 
accepts  the  challenge  with  the  words, — "Doth  Job 
fear  God  for  nought  ?"  The  details  of  the  challenge 
are  then  arranged,  according  to  which  Satan  is  given 
permission  of  God  to  do  what  he  will  with  all  Job's 
possessions,  Satan's  object  being  to  force  Job  to  re- 
nounce God.  Accordingly  Satan  goes  forth  and  dis- 
possesses Job  of  all  his  estates,  and  all  his  children. 
Job  stands  the  test.  Though  his  possessions  and 
children  are  gone  he  refuses  to  renounce  God.  Satan 
is  discomfited.  But  God  challenges  Satan  a  second 
time,  and  again  Satan  accepts  the  challenge.  The 
only  stipulation  that  God  makes  is  that  Satan  shall 
spare  Job's  life.  Satan  goes  forth  to  do  his  utmost  to 
force  Job  to  renounce  (4od.  The  test  Satan  now  insti- 
tutes and  applies  to  Job  is  threefold.  1st.  He  smites 
Job  with  leprosy.  2nd.  He  turns  Job's  wife  against 
him.  3rd.  He  marshals  against  Job  three  false  friends 
who  b}^  the  shrewdest  arguments  of  devilish  clever- 
ness try  to  unbalance  Job's  reason,  and  overthrow  his 
convictions  as  to  God.  These  arguments,  constituting 
the  third  part  of  the  test,  occupy  the  larger  portion  of 
the  Book,  beginning  with  Ch.  o  and  terminating  with 
Ch.  32.  But  Job  endures  through  it  all,  stands  the 
test,  refuses  to  renounce  God.  Satan  seeing  his  de- 
feat does  not  appear  again  upon  the  scene,  in  the 
Epilogue,  when  Job,  having  stood  the  test,  is  blessed 
of  God  with  double  what  he  before  possessed.  Exam- 
ination will  show  that  this  conception  of  the  design 
and  argument  of  the  Book  alone  consistently  explains 
and  harmonizes  all  the  parts  and  statements  of  the 
l^ook. 


102  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

V.  Integrity— Historicity.— The  jj^enuineness  of  cer- 
tain parts  of  the  Book  of  Job  have  at  different 
times  been  called  into  question.  A  very  few  have 
questioned  the  genuineness  of  the  Prologue  and  Epi- 
logue, but  these  are  absolutely  necessary  to  the  under- 
standing and  completeness  of  the  Boolv.  Without 
these  parts  the  Book  is  devoid  of  anj^  evident  design, 
and  the  character  and  experiences  of  Job  are  entirely 
purposeless.  Some  critics  have  also  questioned  the 
genuineness  of  Chs.  27:11-28:28  owing  for  the  most 
part,  to  the  different  moods  and  attitudes  taken  by  Job 
therein.  The  real  difficulty  however  is  not  owing  to 
the  different  positions  taken  by  Job,  but  owing  to  a 
misconception  of  the  design  of  the  Book  on  the  part  of 
the  critics.  If  the  design  of  the  Book  be  as  stated 
above  under  IV,  then  the  difficulties  vanish  and  all  be- 
comes plain.  According  to  this  design  the  three  false 
friends  are  the  agents  of  Satan  in  the  attempt  to  effect, 
by  the  acutest  arguments  of  Satanic  plausibility,  the 
overthrow  of  Job's  reason,  and  force  him  to  renounce 
God.  Relentlessly  assailed  b}'  such  arts  and  arguments^ 
it  becomes  precisel}^  what  is  to  be  expected  that  Job 
would  manifest  different  moods,  be  subject  to  changes 
of  mind,  give  uttei-ance  to  sentiments  seemingl^^  con- 
tradictory, and  in  short  be  at  times  cast  down  to  the 
lowest  depths  of  doubt  and  despair,  as  well  as  times 
exalted  to  sublimest  heights  of  assured  faith  and  hope. 
But  the  genuineness  of  the  discourses  of  Elihu  (Chs. 
32-37),  has  been  especially  assailed,  and  the  discourses 
rejected  by  man}^  critics  as  spurious,  interpolations. 
But  the  grounds  upon  which  these  discourses  have  been 
rejected  as  being  spurious,  are  utterly  insufficient. 
These  grounds  are : — 1st.  It  is  objected  that  Elihu  is 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  103 

not  mentioned  either  in  the  Prologue  or  Epilogue.  But 
according  to  the  design  and  argument  of  the  Book  as 
stated  above  under  IV  he  would  not  and  ought  not  to  be 
so  mentioned ;  for  he  was  not  one  of  the  false  friends 
arrayed  to  assail  Job,  and  therefore  is  not  mentioned 
in  the  Prologue;  and  on  the  other  hand  being  a  true 
friend  and  counselor  of  Job,  and  occupying  the  same 
position  as  Job,  he  therefore  would  not  be  mentioned 
in  the  Epilogue  when  the  three  false  friends  are  sum- 
moned to  have  judgment  passed  upon  them.  2nd.  It 
is  objected  that  the  discourses  of  Elihu  are  attached 
but  loosely  to  the  poem  as  a  whole.  On  the  contrary 
we  assert  that  the  discourses  of  Elihu  furnish  the  final 
link  that  unites  all  the  discourses.  Among  other 
proofs  this  will  become  evident  by  comparing,  e.  tf. 
33 :  23,  24  with  19  :  25-27  ;  Ki :  10-22  and  9 :  32-35.  3rd. 
It  is  objected  that  Elihu  occupies  substantially  the 
same  position  as  the  three  friends,  especially  P^liphaz. 
On  the  contrary  we  assert  that  Elihu  occuj)ies  substan- 
tially the  same  position  as  Job,  and  directly  the  oppo- 
site of  that  of  the  three  friends; — the  passages  quoted 
above  in  proof.  Elihu's  i)osition  is  indicated  in  33:  23, 
24  and  corresponds  in  every  particular  with  Job's  posi- 
tion as  expressed  in  9:32-35;  10:19-22;  19:25-27. 
Elihu's  conceptions  of  sin  and  of  God  are  in  every  par- 
ticular truer  than  those  of  the  three  friends.  4th.  It 
is  objected  that  Elihu's  style  is  prolix,  labored.  On  the 
contrary  it  is  not  as  prolix  and  labored  as  that  of  the 
three  false  friends,  especially  Bildad  and  Zophar. 

In  regard  to  the  historical  character  of  the  Book,  and 
of  Job  its  hero: — We  regard  the  Book  as  being  in  the 
main  real  historj^  True  the  discourses  of  Job,  Elihu, 
and  the  three  friends  may  not  have  been  uttered  extem- 


lOJ:  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

pore  in  precisely  tlieir  present  form  and  fulness.  But 
that  the}-  were  uttered  for  tlie  most  part  extempore, 
and  substantial!}^  in  the  same  form,  and  with  almost 
the  same  fulness, — there  is  no  good  reason  to  doubt; 
especial!}^  when  we  remember  the  histor^^  of  those  re- 
markable literar}^  conventions  and  contests  which  in 
somewhat  later  days  were  held  in  the  same  country 
and  by  those  who  were  descendants  of  Job.  As  to  Job 
himself,  it  is  now  generally  conceded  that  he  was  a 
real,  historical  cliaracter.  The  Book  itself  certainly 
intends  to  convey  that  idea,  for  in  regular  historical 
narrative  form  it  gives  us  Job's  name;  it  tells  us  where 
Job  lived,  i  e.  in  the  land  of  Uz,  in  Xorthern  Arabia; 
it  states  the  number  of  his  children;  it  enumerates  his 
possessions;  it  describes  his  family  and  religious  life; 
it  gives  the  names  and  nativity  of  the  friends,  etc. 
And  in  addition  to  this  the  prophet  Ezekiel  and  the 
Apostle  James  testity  to  the  real,  historical  character 
of  Job.  To  refer  in  such  language  as  Ezekiel  uses  to  a 
fictitious,  unhistorical  character,  and  associate  him 
with  men  (Noah  and  Daniel)  who  had  a  real  existencCj 
is  to  say  the  least  extremely  unnatural. 

VI.  Authorship  Date.— The  authorship  of  Job  is 
not  positively  known.  Among  those  mentioned  as 
probable  authors  are  Job,  Moses,  Solomon,  Jeremiah, 
a  post-exilian  author,  etc.  The  most  probable  of  all 
is  Moses,  considering  the  thoroughly  extra-Palestinian 
character  of  the  Book  on  the  one  hand,  and  its  thor- 
oughly Arabian  and  Eg^^ptian  character  on  the  other 
hand.  In  its  structure  as  a  poem  ;  in  its  use  of  a  num- 
ber of  words  and  forms  of  words  occurring  nowhere 
else;  in  its  figures  of  speech;  in  its  allusions  to  many 
social   and    civil    usages;    in   its  reference  to  various 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  105 

natural  phenomena;  and  in  many  incidental  allnsions 
Avhich  oftentimes  constitute  .ne  surest  indication,  the 
Book  is  intensely  Arabian  and  Egyptian,  and  without 
exception  non-Palestinian.  It  is  in  the  highest  degree 
improbable  that  a  Post-Mosaic,  Palestinian  author 
should  have  so  thoroughly  detached  himself  from 
everj^thing  Palestinian,  and  have  become  so  thoroughly 
native  Arabian  and  Egyptian,  without  ever  once  be- 
traying himself.  Respecting  the  date  of  the  composi- 
tion of  the  Book,  a  similar  difference  of  opinion  pre- 
vails. Ezekiel  14:  14,  20  implies  that  the  Book  of  Job 
had  been  written  in  his  time.  Certain  passages  in  Jer- 
emiah and  Isaiah  indicate  a  knowledge  and  use  of  the 
Book  of  Job  by  these  prophets.  But  critics  strenu- 
ously object  to  having  the  date  of  the  composition  of 
the  Book  assigned  to  any  date  earlier  than  the  time  of 
these  X3rophets,  or  at  the  utmost  earlier  than  the  time 
of  Solomon.  Their  objections  are  mainly  and  strictly 
only  two,  viz. — 1st.  The  Book  exhibits  such  remarka- 
ble literary  finish,  culture,  power,  excellence  as  to  make 
it  impossible  to  assign  it  to  a  date  earlier  than  the  age 
of  Solomon,  /.  e.  the  mental  endowments  and  capacities 
of  the  human  race  were  not  sufficiently  developed  to 
produce  it  before  that  time.  2nd.  The  theological 
views  set  forth  in  the  Book  respecting  life,  God,  sin, 
deliveraiice,  immortality,  etc.,  are  so  clear,  true  and 
full  as  to  make  it  impossible  to  assign  to  the  Book  a  date 
earlier  than  Solomon  or  1)00  B.  C.  ;  inasmuch  as  before 
that  time  the  race  was  not  sufficiently  developed  to  ac- 
cept and  announce  such  perfect  theological  views  as 
articles  of  truth  and  faith.  We  deny  the  truth  and 
force  of  these  two  objections  on  these  three  grounds: 
1st.  They  are  rationalistic  in  nature.     2nd.  They  are 


106  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

untrue  to  fact.  3rd.  Tlie^'  charge  the  author  of  the  Book 
vvitli  misrepresentation.  They  are  rationalistic  in  na- 
ture in  that  they  limit  the  operations  of  God  in  revela- 
tion and  inspiration  to  what  the  human  mind  can  itself 
acquire  by  the  unaided  exercise  of  the  human  reason. 
They  are  untrue  to  fact  in  that  the  Ancient  Egyptians 
before  the  times  of  Abraham  held  to  a  pure  monotheistic 
conception  of  God,  announced  their  belief  in  immortal- 
ity, and  looked  to  a  divine-human  deliverer  to  deliver 
from  sin.  They  charge  the  author  of  the  Book  of  Job 
with  misrepresentation  in  that,  conceding  Job  to  be  a 
patrijnchal  character,  they  make  the  author  put  in  the 
moutli  of  Job  the  statement  of  views  and  beliefs  not 
possible  to  be  entertained  and  expressed  till  centuries 
after  that,  thus  making  the  author  guilty  of  anachronism. 

VII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  Book  of  Job 
may  be  divided  and  its  contents  indicated  as  follows: — 

I.  Chs.  1,  2.  The  Prologue.  Written  in  prose. 
The  author's  historical  statement  setting  forth  the  oc- 
casion and  design  of  the  Book,  and  consisting  of — 

1.  Ch.  1 : 1-5.  Statement  as  to  Job, — his  countr\^^ 
character,  possessions,  religious  life. 

2.  Ch.  1:6-22.  First  meeting  of  the  Celestial  Coun- 
cil, and  fii'st  trial  of  Job. 

3.  Ch.  2.  Second  meeting  of  the  Celestial  Council,, 
second  trial  of  Job  and  gathering  of  Job's  false  friends. 

II.  Chs.  3-31.  Debate.  Written  in  poetry.  Con- 
tains the  debate  between  Job  and  his  three  false 
friends,  Eliphaz,  Bildad  and  Zophar.  Ch.  3  is  Job's 
cry,  introductory  to  this  debate,  which  then  proceeds 
as  follows:— 

1.   Chs.  4-14.      First  debate;  consisting  of — 

a.   Chs.  4,  o.     Argument  of  Elipiiaz.     God  is  good. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  107 

No  man  so  good  as  to  be  exempt  from  suffering.     The 
ungodly  resent  suffering.     Let  Job  submit. 

b.  Clis.  6,  7.  Reply  of  Job.  Job's  sufferings  are 
exceptional,  but  his  guilt  is  not  exceptional;  hence 
the  argument  of  Eliphaz  does  not  meet  and  satisfy  his 
case. 

c.  Ch.  8.  Argument  of  Bildad.  God  is  not  un- 
just. Job  greatly  punished  must  have  greatly  sinned. 
Let  him  seek  God  for  mercy. 

f/.  Chs.  9,  10.  Reply  of  Job.  True  God  is  not  un- 
just; still  injustice  prevails  on  the  earth,  and  the  in- 
nocent are  involved  with  the  guilty.  Therefore  there 
must  be  another  cause  for  suffering. 

e.  Ch.  11.  Argument  of  Zophar.  God  detects  sin 
where  man  is  unconscious  of  it.  So  prominently  Job; 
therefore  let  him  forsake  sin,  and  seek  mercy. 

/.  Chs.  12-14.  Reply  of  Job.  lie  resents  Zophar's 
assumption  to  an  insight  of  God's  ways.  His  con- 
science gives  him  courage,  and  God  must  extend  hope. 

2.   Chs.  15-21.     Second  debate.     Consisting  of — 

a.  Ch.  15.  Argument  of  Elii)haz.  Job  assumes 
superior  wisdom.  Evil  does  not  go  unchecked  and 
unpunished,  as  a  tormenting  conscience  and  disas- 
trous end  prove. 

h.  Chs.  16,  17.  Reply  of  Job.  But  he  (Job)  is  in- 
nocent, and  yet  afflicted,  persecuted.  That  he  is  inno- 
cent he  has  in  heaven  a  Witness  who  will  attest  and 
vindicate  it. 

c.  Ch.  18.  Argument  of  Bildad.  Vexed  at  Job, 
and  his  protestations  of  innocence,  when  the  miserj^  he 
has,  and  the  dishonor  that  awaits  him,  aigue  the  con- 
trary. 

d.  Ch.  19.     Reply  of  Job.     Bildad's  argument  false. 


108  INTRODUCTION    OUVLINES. 

and  application  cruel.  Hence  appeals  for  pity.  At 
any  rate  his  vindicator,  Redeemer  liveth  who  will 
acquit,  and  reveal  himself. 

e.  Ch.  20.  Argument  of  Zophar.  He  is  unmoved 
by  Job's  language.  Declares  Job  perverse.  Job's 
brief  prosperit}',  and  present  destruction  a  proof  he  is 
wicked. 

f.  Ch.  21.  Reply  of  Job.  Facts  contradict  Zophar's 
argument.  The  wicked  prosper  and  die  in  peace  hence 
suffering  has  another  cause  and  reason  for  it. 

3.   C1is.  22-28.     Third  debate.     Consisting  of— 
a.   Ch.   22.     Argument   of   Eliphaz.     God   punishes 
only  for  impiety,  sin.     Eliphaz  unscrupulously  charges 
Job  with  inhumanity,   avarice,   abuse  of  power.     Let 
Job  repent. 

h.  Chs.  23,  24.  Reply  of  Job.  Makes  no  direct  re- 
ply to  the  false  accusations  of  Elij)haz,  but  discourses 
upon  the  mysteries  of  God's  providence. 

c.  Ch.  25.  Argument  of  Bildad.  Protests  against 
Job's  declaration  of  his  innocence.  (4od  is  great  and 
great  is  his  majesty. 

d.  Ch.  2G.  Reply  of  Job.  True  God  is  great  as  his 
works  show,  but  the  question  at  issue  turns  not  on 
God's  greatness,  but  on  his  justice. 

e.  Chs.  27,  28.  Zophar  failing  to  aijpear  Job  utters 
his  final  words  to  the  three  friends.  God  is  great,  wise, 
good,  and  requires  holiness  of  life. 

f.  Chs.  2{)-31.  Job's  final  survej'  of  his  whole  case, 
i.  e.  the  conclusion  or  summing  up  of  the  debate. 

III.   Chs.  32-37.    Discourse  of  P]lihu.   Consisting  of — 
a.  Ch.  32:1-5.     Introduction  of  Elihu  by  the  author. 
h.   Ch.  32 : 6-22.     Elihu's   introduction    to    his    dis- 
course. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  109 

c.  Chs.  3:3-37.  Elibu's  discourse.  (4od  not  Job's 
enemy.  God  does  not  afflict  unjustly,  but  in  affliction 
has  gracious,  disciplinary  designs. 

lY.  Chs.  38  : 1-42 :  (3.  Jehovah's  reply  to  Job.  Con- 
sisting of — 

a.   Chs.  38:  1-40:  2.      First  part  of  Jehovah's  reply. 

h.  Ch.  40:  3-5.  Job's  humble  confession  of  unworthi- 
ness. 

c.  Chs.  40:G-41:34.  Second  part  of  Jehovah's 
reply. 

d.  Ch.  42:1-6.  Job's  further  confession  of  God's 
greatness,  and  his  own  unworthiness. 

V.  Ch.  42:7-17.  Epilogue.  Concluding  historical 
statement  by  the  author  setting  forth  the  end  of  Job's 
trials;  the  condemnation  of  Eliphaz,  Bildad  and 
Zophar;  the  vindication  and  commendation  of  Job; 
the  restoration  of  Job  to  prosperity^  twofold  as  great  as 
that  which  he  enjo^'ed  before;  and  Job's  long  life  and 
death. 

VIII.  Doctrine.— 1.  Job's  conception  of  God  is  pure, 
monotheistic,  Biblical. 

2.  As  to  man  he  is  a  sinner  who  must  both  have  a 
divine  righteousness  imijuted  to  him,  and  himself  work 
righteousness. 

3.  Atonement  (kafar),  Redemption  (pada),  and 
Ransoming,  Restoring  {gcCal)^  are  clearly  defined  in 
their  relations,  nature  and  working. 

4.  The  doctrines  of  resurrection  and  immortality  are 
clearly  exj)ressed  as,  e.  y.  14  :  14;  19:  20,  etc. 

5.  In  its  practical  bearing  the  key-word  of  the  Book 
is  Endurance  (James  5:  11); — the  perseverance  of  the 
godly  based  on  preservation  hy  God. 

IX.  Messianic— While  there  is  no  direct   jjersonal 


110  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

reference  to  the  Messiah,  still  there  is  a  strong  Messi- 
anic element  in  Job.  Jehovah  is  the  Redeemer.  The 
great  offices  and  works  of  the  Redeemer  are  strongly 
brought  out  in  the  Messianic  sections  9 :  32-35 ;  16:19- 
22;  19:25-27;  33:23,  24. 


THE   PSALMS. 

I.  l!fa.nie.—Tehillim  =  Praises  or  Praise  Songs.  So 
called  as  setting  forth  the  main  object  of  the  Book,  vis. 
the  worship  of  God.  The  title  Psalms  is  derived  from 
the  LXX  rendering  of  the  Hebrew  name. 

II.  Position.— The  Book  of  Psalms  is  included  in  the 
Hagiographa,  the  third  great  division  of  the  Hebrew 
Bible.  In  this  division  the  Psalms  have  commonly  oc- 
cupied the  first  place,  and  hence  we  find  the  entire  Old 
Testament  summed  up  under  the  three  names  of  the 
Law,  the  Prophets,  and  the  Psalms.     Lu.  24:44. 

III.  Divisions.— In  the  Hebrew  Bible,  as  in  the  R. 
v.,  the  Psalter  is  divided  into  five  Books,  viz.  1.  Psas. 
1-41.  2.  Psas.  42-72.  3.  Psas.  73-89.  4.  Psas.  90- 
106.  5.  Psas.  107-150.  This  division  into  Books  is 
older  than  the  LXX  translation.  The  end  of  each  of 
these  five  Books  is  marked  by  a  doxologj^  The  150th 
Psalm  constitutes  the  doxology  of  the  fifth  Book. 

IV.  Collections.— The  Psalms  cover  a  period  extend- 
ing from  Moses  to  post-exilic  times.  The  Psalter  is  not 
the  work  of  a  single  compiler.  Originally  a  number  of 
smaller  collections  existed  independently,  which  were 
afterwards  united  in  one,  the  completed  Book  being 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  Ill 

thus  gradually  formed  out  of  preexisting  smaller  col- 
lections. It  is  reasonable  to  suppose  that  the  first, 
original  collection  of  Psalms  consisted  mainly  of  those 
Psalms,  mostly  David's,  now  classed  as  Book  I.  This 
collection  was  probably  made  by  David's  son  and  suc- 
cessor Solomon.  The  next  collection  was  probably 
not  completed  till  the  time  of  Hezekiah.  This  collec- 
tion probably  consisted  in  the  main  of  those  Psalms  of 
David,  Asaph,  and  the  sons  of  Korah,  composing  Books 
II,  III.  This  collection  was  probably  made  b}^  those 
"  men  of  Hezekiah  "  to  whom  we  owe  the  preservation 
of  many  proverbs  of  Solomon  not  included  in  the  first 
collection  of  his  proverbs.  (Prov.  25:1.)  This  also 
agrees  with  2  Chr.  29 :  30.  The  third  and  last  collec- 
tion was  made  in  exilian  or  post-exilian  times;  no 
further  additions  after  Hezekiah  having  been  made  to 
the  Psalter  till  the  times  of  Ezra  and  Nehemiah,  when 
it  was  enriched  bj'  a  large  number  of  songs  written 
during  and  after  the  exile.  To  this  period  are  due, 
in  the  main,  the  Psalms  composing  Books  IV,  V. 
With  these,  however,  were  incorporated  certain  Psalms 
belonging  to  earlier  times.  Thus  Book  IV  opens  with 
a  Psalm  or  Prayer  ascribed  to  Moses.  And  in  these 
Books  IV,  V  are  seventeen  psalms  ascribed  to  David, 
some  evidently  by  mistake,  but  others  again  unques- 
tionably David's,  as  e.  g.  Psa.  110.  Hence  it  appears 
that  while  a  general  chronological  order  has  been  ob- 
served in  the  order  of  the  Psalms,  still  sometimes  the 
chronological  order  has  been  displaced  by  an  order 
based  on  subject-matter. 

V.  Titles  or  Inscriptions.— Most  of  the  Psalms  are 
provided  with  titles  or  inscriptions,  all  except  thirty- 
four.     Of  the  antiquity  of  these  titles  there  can  be  no 


11^  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

question  inasmuch  as  they  are  found  in  the  LXX.  As 
to  the  authority  of  these  titles,  while  there  is  ground 
to  question  their  accuracy  in  some  particulars  still  they 
are  in  the  main  trustworthy.  These  titles  or  inscrip- 
tions of  the  Psalms  are  chiefly  of  three  kinds,  viz.  : 

1.  Those  which  define  their  musical  or  liturgical 
character. 

2.  Those  which  assign  them  to  particular  authors. 

3.  Those  which  designate  the  particular  circum- 
stances under  which  a  Psalm  was  composed. 

Any  of  these  may  occur  separately,  or  be  combined 
to  form  one  title.  A  brief  consideration  of  them  fol- 
lows. 

VI.  Titles  of  Character.— That  is,  those  Psalms  to 
which  notices  of  a  liturgical  or  musical  character  are 
prefixed.     Such  notices  are — 

1.  Lanuiasoynlt — "  For  the  Precentor."  Probably 
designates  the  leader  of  the  choir  who  was  to  set  it  to 
music,  and  superintend  its  practice.  Occurs  fifty-five 
times. 

2.  Lelammed — "  For  teaching."  Probably  a  Psalm 
to  be  taught  to  or  by  the  Levites.     Psa.  60. 

3.  Lehazkeer — "  To  bring  to  remembrance."  Prob- 
ably memorializing  Jehovah's  goodness.     Psas.  38,  70. 

4.  Letodah — "For  thanksgiving."  Probably  with 
the  thank-offering.     Psa.  100. 

5.  Mizmor — "A  Psalm."  A  general  name  for 
psalm.,  but  implying  instrumental  ac(       paniment. 

6.  Sheer — "A  Song."  Used  separately,  and  in  con- 
junction with  mizmor.     A  Psalm  in  celebration. 

7.  Miclitarn — "  Golden."     A  song  of  deep  import. 

8.  Maskeel—A  "  skillful  strain, "or  "  skillfully  con- 
structed son'4." 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  113 

0.  SJiiggayoii — An  "instrument,"  a  "melody,"  a 
"  lament,"  or  a  "  dithyrambic  ode." 

10.  7'e/uZ/a/i—"  A  hymn  of  praise."  For  occasions 
of  joy,  triumph,  thanksgiving. 

11.  Tefillah—''  A  Prayer."  So  a  whole  collection  of 
David's  songs.     Psa.  72:20. 

12.  Slieer  Yededotli — "  A  song  of  loves";  where  the 
subject  is  love.     Psa.  45. 

13.  Sheer  hammaaloth — "Song  of  accents."  Pil- 
grim festival  songs,  going  up  to  Jerusalem. 

14.  Particular  instruments  by  which  the  Psalm  was 
to  be  accompanied  are  hannaheloth—'^  flutes,"  and 
neginotli — "  stringed  instruments." 

15.  Particular  measures  are  alamoth,  slieinenitli,  get- 
tifli,  yedutun. 

16.  Particular  melodies  are  the  "  Hind  of  the  Dawn," 
"The  Dove,"  "The  Lily  of  the  Testimony,"  etr>. 

17.  Selali.  Probably  a  pause,  or  call  for  renewed 
attention. 

VII.  Authorship  Titles.— The  authors  of  the  Psalms 
according  to  their  titles  are  as  follows : — 

1.  Moses.     One  Psalm,  the  90th. 

2.  David.     Seventy-three  Psalms. 

3.  Solomon.     Two  Psalms,  72nd  and  127th. 

4.  The  Sons  ot  Korah.  Eleven  Psalms,  viz.  42-49, 
84,  85,  87.  Korah  was  the  grandson  of  Kohath,  son 
of  Levi.  The  Korahites  or  "  Sons  of  Korah  "  were  an 
important  branch  of  the  singers  in  the  Kohathite 
division  in  the  temple  service.  1  Chr.  5:33;  2  Chr. 
20:19. 

5.  Heman.  One  of  the  "Sons  of  Korah."  One 
Psa.,  88. 

[8] 


114  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

6.  Asaph.     Twelve  Psalms,  viz.  50,  73-83. 

7.  Ethan  the  Ezrahite.     One  Psalm,  the  89th. 
Asaph,  Heman,  Ethan  are  names  of  the  three  chief 

singers  of  David. 

The  remainder  of  the  Psalms,  about  a  third,  are 
therefore  anonymous. 

VIII.  Titles  of  Occasion.— The  titles  sometimes  con- 
tain historical  notices,  i.  e.  notices  purporting  to  give 
an  account  of  the  particular  occasion  for  which  a 
Psalm  was  composed.  Some  of  these  notices  are  trust- 
worth}^,  others  are  not.  They  occur  only  in  the 
Psalms  of  David,  and  refer  to  events  in  his  life.  Thus 
with  Psa.  3  compare  2  Sam.  Chs.  15-18.  Psa.  7 
comp.  1  Sam.  Chs.  24-26.  Psa.  18  comp.  2  Sam.  Ch. 
22.  Psa.  34  comp.  1  Sam.  21:1-15.  Psa.  51  comp. 
2  Sam.  Ch.  12.  Psa.  52  comp.  1  Sam.  Ch.  22.  Psa. 
54  comp.  1  Sam.  23:19-28.  Psa.  56  comp.  1  Sam. 
21:1-15.  Psa.  57  comp.  1  Sam.  22:1-24.  Psa.  59 
comp.  1  Sam.  19:11-18.  Psa.  60  comp.  2  Sam.  8:1- 
13.  Psa.  63  comp.  1  Sam.  22:3-5.  Psa.  142  comp. 
1  Sam.  22:1,  2;  2  Chr.  11:15-19,  etc.  The  historical 
occasion  of  other  Psalms,  not  noticed  in  the  titles, 
might  be  assigned  with  a  considerable  degree  of  prob- 
ability. 

IX.  Classifications. —The  Psalms  are  variously 
classified  upon  the  basis  of  their  subject  matter  or 
because  of  certain  peculiar  literary  features.  Thus  we 
have, — 

1.  Psalms  consisting  of  meditations  on  different  as- 
pects of  God's  providence  as  manifested  in  creation, 
history,  etc.  Such  are  Psalms  8,  19,  29,  33,  36,  65, 
103,  104,  107,  etc. 

2.  Psalms  consisting  of  reflections  upon  God's  moral 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  115 

government  of  the  world,  and  on  the  character  and 
conduct  that  is  pleasing  to  him ;  hence  these  Psalms 
are  of  a  didactic  character.  Such  are  Psalms  1,  15,  32, 
34,  37,  49,  73,  75,  77,  90,  92,   112,  etc. 

3.  Psalms  expressive  of  faith,  resignation,  joy  in 
God's  law  and  God's  presence.  Such  are  Psalms  11, 
16,  23,  26,  27,  42,  62,  63,  84,  91,  119,  121,  127,  128, 
130,  etc. 

4.  Psalms  having  a  more  distinct  reference  to  the 
circumstances  of  the  Psalmist,  as  petitions  for  help  in 
illness,  persecution,  or  other  trouble,  for  forgiveness  of 
sins,  besides  many  of  personal  thanksgiving.  In  these 
the  Psalmist  sometimes  includes  his  companions  or  co- 
religionists. Such  are  Psalms  3-7,  12,  13,  17,  22,  30, 
40,  116,  etc. 

5.  National  Psalms.  That  is,  Psalms  consisting  of 
complaints  of  national  oppression  or  disaster;  and 
again  expressions  of  thanksgivings  for  mercies  received 
or  promised;  and  still  again  prayers  for  the  welfare  of 
Jerusalem,  and  the  coming  glor}^  of  Zion  as  the 
metropolis  of  the  world.  Such  are  Psalms  14,  44,  46, 
47,  48,  60,  66,  68,  76,  79,  87,  118,  122,  124,  129,  144, 
etc. 

6.  Historical  Psalms.  That  is.  Psalms  consisting  of 
a  review  of  the  national  histor}^  with  a  reference  to  the 
lessons  deducible  from  it.  Such  are  Psalms  78,  81, 
105,  106,  114. 

7.  Royal  Psalms.  That  is.  Psalms  relating  to  the 
king  or  to  the  Davidic  dynast}^,  and  containing 
thanksgivings,  wishes,  promises,  supplications,  max- 
ims, etc.  These  Psalms  frequently  have  a  Messianic 
import.  See  below.  Such  royal  Psalms  are  2,  18,  20, 
21,  45,  72,  89,  101,  110,  132. 


116  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

8.  Penitential  Psalms.  So  called  on  account  of  their 
being  expressions  of  profound  penitence  for  sin. 
These  Psalms  are  seven  in  number,  viz.  6,  32,  38,  51, 
102,  130,  143. 

9.  Imprecatory  Psalms.  That  is,  those  Psalms  which 
seem  to  invoke  terrible  judgments  upon  the  enemies 
of  God  and  his  people.  Such  Psalms  more  particularly 
are  35,  69,  109,  137,  and  a  few  other  isolated  passages. 
The  usage  of  both  the  imxjeratwe  and  imperfect  is  to 
be  noted  in  the  discussion  of  these  imprecatory  passa- 
ages.     Compare  also  Rev.  Ch.  18. 

10.  Hallelujah  Psalms.  Psalms  beginning  with 
"Hallelujah"  are  so  called.  They  are  Psalms  106, 
111,  112,  113,  117,  135,  146-150. 

11.  Hodu  Psalms,  or  Thanksgiving  Psalms.  These 
are  so  called  because  they  begin  with  the  word  Hodu  = 
Give  thanks.     They  are  Psalms  105,  107,  118,  136. 

12.  The  Hallel.  Psalms  113-118  are  so  called  as 
being  those  Psalms  that  are  chanted  at  the  three  great 
feasts,  at  the  feast  of  the  dedication,  and  at  the  new 
moons  In  the  family  celebration  of  the  Passover 
night  Psalms  113,  114  are  sung  before  the  meal,  before 
the  emptying  of  the  second  festal  cup,  while  Psalms 
115-118  were  sung  after  the  meal,  after  the  filling  uf 
the  fourth  cup,  to  which,  after  the  institution  of  the 
Lord's  Supper,  which  was  connected  with  the  fourth 
festal  cup  Math.  26:  30,  Mk.  14:  26  probably  refer. 

13.  Alphabetical  Psalms.  That  is,  those  Psalms  in 
which  successive  verses,  half  verses,  or  groups  of 
verses  begin  with  the  successive  letters  of  the  Hebrew 
alphabet.  The  alphabetical  arrangement  is  not  fully 
carried  out  i»^  t^revy  instance.  Such  alphabetical 
Psalms  are  9,  10,  25,  34,  37,  111,  112,  119,  145. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  117 

For  Messianic  Psalms  see  below. 

IX.  Tlieolog-y.— Hebrew  poetry  is  the  poetrj^  of 
friendship  and  fellowship  between  God  and  man.  It  is 
preeminently  so  with  the  Psalms.  In  them  God  mani- 
fests himself  and  speaks  through  nature,  through  his- 
tory, through  personal  experience  to  Israel,  to  the 
Israelite.  And  in  them  the  true  Israelite,  the  soul, 
finds  its  completest  expression,  holds  blessed  communion 
with  God  to  whom  it  discloses  all  its  emotions,  desires, 
hopes,  fears.  The  God  of  the  Psalms  is  very  near, 
and  very  real,  and  communion  with  him  most  spiritual 
and  intimate.  The  Law  of  God  is  also  highly  magni- 
fied in  the  Psalms.  As  contrasted  with  its  merely 
ceremonial  enactments,  there  is  a  remarkable  recog- 
nition of  the  higher  and  more  spiritual  requirements  of 
the  Law,  and  an  intense  affection  expressed  for  it. 
The  confession  and  remission  of  sins,  purity  in  heart 
and  holiness  of  life,  the  blessedness  of  righteousness 
here  and  hereafter,  are  matters  repeatedly  and  boldly 
inculcated.  The  hope  of  a  future  life  glorifies  not  a 
few  Psalm  utterances. 

X.  Messianic— The  Messianic  hope  shines  strongly 
in  the  Psalms.  This  Messianic  element  is  for  the  most 
part  typical.  David  and  Solomon,  the  Priest  and 
Psalmist,  ap]3ear  therein  as  tj^pes  of  the  Messiah,  and 
of  the  Messiah  in  his  threefold  office  of  Prophet,  Priest 
and  King.  It  is  to  be  remembered,  however,  that  in 
the  Psalms  this  Messiah,  this  Anointed  One  in  whom 
are  bound  up  the  redemption  of  the  world  and 
the  glorifying  of  Israel,  is  not  in  the  first  instance, 
or  distinctly,  Christ  The  Messiah,  the  Anointed 
of  God,  is  David,  or  Solomon,  till  both  the  one  and  the 
other  fail  to  fulfil  the  hopes  of   men's  hearts.     But  the 


118 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


Advent  to  whicli  Israel  looks  forward  is  the  Advent  of 
Jehovah.  He  is  Israel's  true  King.  It  is  his  com- 
ing which  is  to  be  Israel's  redemption  and  glory.  The 
Messianic  Psalms  are  the  following: — 

Psalm    2.     The  Divine  and  Conquering  King. 

Psalm  16.     Jehovah  the  all,  in  all,  and  after  all. 

Psalm  22.     The  Typical  Sufferer. 

Psalm  40.     The  Offerer  and  the  Offering. 

Psalm  45.     The  Marriage  of  the  King. 

Psalm  69.     God's  Suffering  One. 

Psalm  72.     God's  Prince,  and  his  Dominion  of  Peace. 

Psalm  85.     The  Righteous  Restoration  and  Reign. 

Psalm  87.  Zion, — Mountain  of  God,  Metropolis  of 
Earth. 

Psalm  102.     The  Suffering  Soul,  and  Suffering  City. 

Psalm  110.     Tlie  Priest-King. 

Psalm  118.     Praise  Jehovah's  Loving  Kindness. 


THE  PROVERBS. 

I.  ^ame.—Mishlay  =  Proverbs.  The  Book  is  so 
called  from  the  nature  of  its  contents.  The  mashal  or 
proverb,  coming  from  the  verb  to  he  like,  denotes  a 
representation,  i.  e.  a  statement  not  relating  solely  to 
a  single  fact,  but  standing  for  or  representing  other 
similar  facts. 

The  statement  may  be  deducted  from  a  particular 
instance,  but  applicable  to  other  like  instances,  or  it 
ma}^  be  a  generalization  from  experience.  The  proverb 
concerns  itself  with  observations  relative  to  human  life 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  110 

and  character,  and,  by  striking  comparisons  and  con- 
trasts, expresses  the  trnth  in  a  pithy,  prei^nant  manner. 

II.  Position.— One  of  the  poetical  Books  of  the  Old 
Testament.  Stands  in  the  Hagiographa,  or  tliird  di- 
vision of  the  Hebrew  Bible.  Is  one  of  the  Books  in- 
clnded  in  the  Chokhmah — or  Wisdom  Literature  of  the 
Hebrews.     See  under  Job. 

III.  Desig-n.— The  Design  of  the  Book  is  clearly 
stated  in  1 :  2-4. 

IV.  Divisions  and  Contents.  These,  in  brief,  are 
as  follows: — 

1.  Chs.  1-9.  This  first  section  gives  a  masterly  de- 
scription of  wisdom,  treats  of  the  blessings  of  wisdom, 
and  warns  against  various  dangers  and  temptations, 
especially  unchastity. 

2.  Chs.  10: 1-22  :  16.  This  second  section  which  has 
the  superscription,  "The  Proverbs  of  Solomon,"  con- 
tains man}^  master  sentences  bearing  upon  practical 
life,  moral  and  religious  precepts,  and  prudential 
maxims.  Especially  emphasized  are, — Jehovah's  sov- 
ereignty; the  blessings  that  How  from  fearing  Him; 
righteousness  more  acceptable  than  sacrifice  with  Him; 
the  contrasted  aims  and  ends  of  the  wise  and  the  fool ; 
the  right  use  of  the  lips  or  tongue ;  parental  authority ; 
kingly  justice,  righteousness,  wisdom,  mercy,  faithful- 
ness, and  amenableness  to  divine  guidance. 

3.  Chs.  22:  17-24:  34.  In  this  section  the  method  of 
a  more  or  less  consecutive  argument  is  resumed,  as  in 
the  first  section.  The  proverbs  here  constitute  a  body 
of  maxims  interwoven,  addressed  with  a  practical  aim. 

4.  Chs.  25-29.  This  section  contains,  as  stated  in 
the  superscription,  the  "  Proverbs  of  Solomon  which 
the  men    of    Hezekiah,    king   of   Judah,  copied  out." 


120  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

On  this  superscription,  see  below.  The  proverbs  of 
this  sectio^^  do  not  differ  material Ij^  in  their  character 
from  the  foregoing. 

5.  Chs.  30,  31.  Ch.  30  is  ascribed  to  Agur  the  son 
of  Jakeh.  Neither  Agur  nor  Jakeh  is  named  else- 
where. The  Ch.  is  also  described  as  an  "  oracle,"  a 
term  usually  ajjplied  to  prophetic  utterances.  The 
proverbs  of  this  chapter  consist  of  moral  and  philosoph- 
ical reflections.  Ch.  31  contains  the  "  Words  of  King 
Lemuel,  the  proverbs  which  his  mother  taught  him." 
The  proverbs  enjoin  temperance,  justice,  etc. 

v.  Composition:— Gemdneness,  Authorslivp.  The 
second  division  of  the  Book,  Chs.  10:1-22:10,  begins 
with  the  superscription  "  The  Proverbs  of  Solomon." 
This  division  is  regarded  as  constituting  the  oldest  col- 
lection of  proverbs,  and  is  generall}^  conceded  to  have 
proceeded  from  Solomon.  The  section,  Chs.  22:17- 
24:34,  is  evidently  intended  to  go  with  the  preceding 
division,  as  belonging  to  Solomon;  nor  should  the  last 
twelve  verses,  24 :  23-34,  be  excluded, .  and  treated  as 
the  product  of  several  wise  men ;  an  unsuitable  inter- 
pretation of  24 :  23.  The  division  Chs.  25-29  bears  the 
superscription  "These  are  also  proverbs  of  Solo- 
mon, which  the  men  of  Hezekiah,  king  of  Judah, 
copied  out."  These  proverbs  were  not  floating  about, 
and  by  common  consent  attributed  to  Solomon,  for  the 
word  rendered  "  copied  out "  will  not  bear  that  con- 
struction. The  word  can  only  signify  that  these  men 
of  Hezekiah  "copied  out,"  i.  e.  transferred,  trans- 
scribed  from  one  book  into  another,  proverbs  that  were 
correctly  assigned  to  Solomon.  The  flrst  division,  Chs. 
1-9,  is  also  by  the  superscription  ascribed  to  Solomon. 
It  is  highly  improbable  that  the  flrst  nine  chapters  of 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  121 

the  Book  should  have  been  written  by  the  collector  of 
the'proverbs,  or  b}'  an  editor,  instead  of  by  Solomon, 
^nd  that  the  name  of  Solomon  should  be  placed 
at  the  head  of  them  when  the  collector  or  editor  him- 
self in  that  case  wrote  about  one-third  of  the  Avhole. 
Moreover  the  Book  shows  throughout  a  carefully  ex- 
ecuted intention  on  the  part  of  the  author  to  attribute 
the  proverbs  to  their  proper  authors,  so  much  so  that 
the  last  two  chapters  in  the  collection  are  with  a  clear 
discrimination  attributed  respectively  to  Agur  one  and 
to  King  Lemuel  one.  Once  more,  certain  peculiarities 
of  language  characterize  all  the  proverbs  attributed  to 
Solomon,  which  further  confirms  the  unit^^  of  the  au- 
thorship of  Chs.  1-29,  and  ascribes  that  authorship  to 
Solomon.  We  also  read  in  1  Ki,  4:  32  of  Solomon  that 
*'He  spake  three  thousand  proverbs:  and  his  songs 
were  a  thousand  and  five." 

VI.  Doctrine.— The  Book  of  Proverbs  is  the  Old 
Testament's  special  treatise  on  Ethics,  the  principal 
source  of  the  Old  Teatament  Ethics.  As  in  the  system 
of  Ethics  virtue  and  duty  must  ever  occupy  the  princi- 
pal place,  so  in  the  Book  of  Proverbs  the  special  doc- 
trine is  that  of  virtue  and  duty,  rectitude  and  law. 


ECCLESIASTES. 

I.  Name.— ivo/ie/e//^  =  One  addressing  a  public  as- 
sembly, a  preacher;  whence  LXX,  Vulgate,  A.  V., 
EccJesiastes  =  a  preacher. 

II.  Position.— This  Book  is  included  in  the  Hagio- 


122  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

graplia,  and  forms  a  part  of  the   Chol-lnnah—ov  Wis- 
dom Literature  of  the  Hebrews.     See  under  Job. 

III.  Design.— The  Book  discloses,  in  progress,  a 
mental  battle  between  old  faiths  and  new  doubts;  be- 
tween divine  providence  and  retribution  on  the 
one  hand,  and  human  doubt,  irresponsibility  and 
despair  on  the  other  hand.  It  both  summons  to  enjoy- 
ment, and  is  intensely  sad;  it  is  seemingly  skeptical  at 
times,  and  at  other  times  as  thoroughly  convinced  of 
the  ti'uth  of  the  divine  faith  it  inculcates.  On  the 
one  hand  it  is  a  discourse  upon  the  unsatisfactory  nature 
of  all  things  human,  with  a  recommendation  to  enjoy 
the  blessings  of  life,  while  on  the  other  hand  it  urgently 
insists  upon  the  importance  of  fearing  God  and  keeping 
his  commandments.  The  Book  cannot  be  charged  with 
any  skeptical  or  Sadducean  tendency,  for  the  whole 
Book  must  be  interpreted  in  the  light  of  its  closing 
utterance,  the  summary  of  the  discourse,—"  Fear  God, 
and  keep  his  comnmndments;  for  this  is  the  whole  duty 
of  man." 

IV.  Authorship— Date.— The  canonicity  and  unity 
of  the  Book  of  Ecclesiastes  have  seldom  been  ques- 
tioned. On  the  other  hand  the  authorship  and  date 
have  been  seriously  questioned.  Two  principal  views 
obtain : — 

1.  Until  about  1645  the  view  commonly  held  was 
that  Solomon  was  the  author  of  Ecclesiastes.  Prof. 
Douglas  in  his  additions  to  Keil's  Introduction  makes 
a  strong  but  unsuccessful  effort  to  show  that  the  Book 
proceeded  from  Solomon.     He  argues — 

a.  That  whereas  no  distinction  has  yet  been  estab- 
lished between  the  writer  and  an  imaginary  speaker 
whom  he  introduces  there  are  many  things  throughout 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  123 

the    Book   which  suit  Solomon  adiniral)]3%  and  which 
come  in  most  naturally  and  incidentally. 

h.  Much  weight  oui>ht  to  be  attached  to  the  un- 
broken chain  of  tradition  in  both  the  Jewish  and 
C'hristian  Church;  and  this  in  spite  of  the  obscurity 
hauiiiiiy  over  the  title  Koheleth,  which  is  generally  ren- 
dered 'Mhe  Preacher,"  but  which  has  also  been  inter- 
l)rete(l  as  meaning  "  Preaching  [Wisdom]." 

c.  'J'lie  predominant  ideas  in  the  Book  are  connected 
witli  wisdom  and  the  fear  of  God,  and  both  of  these  in 
their  practical  applications;  and  it  is  notorious  that 
these  are  the  features  of  that  ideal  character  which 
Solomon  set  before  himself,  and  which  predominates 
in  Proverl)s. 

(7.  Assigning  to  the  Book  of  Ecclesiastes  so  recent 
a  date  brings  with  it  difficulties  or  improbabilities 
peculiar  to  itself.  The  argument  at  this  point  is  weak 
and  illogical. 

e.  The  single  argument  in  favor  of  a  later  origin  is 
the  Aramaic  character  of  the  language,  which  Prof. 
Douglas  attempts  to  evade  by  changing  the  j^Zace,  in 
which  it  is  conceived  the  Book  was  to  be  read,  and  not 
the  time  at  which  the  composition  of  the  Book  is  dated. 

2.  Since  1G45  the  constantly  increasing  and  now  pre- 
vailing view  is  that  the  author  of  Ecclesiastes  is  not 
Solomon  but  a  post-exilic  writer,  and  that  this  anony- 
mous, post-exilic  author  composed  the  Book  of  Eccles- 
iastes between  the  time  of  Malachi,  who  lived  in  the  time 
of  Nehemiah's  second  visit  to  Jerusalem,  probably 
under  Darius  Nothus  (423-405  B.  C),  and  the  apocra-.,. 
phal  Book  of  Wisdom  which  at  the  earliest  was  written 
under  Ptolemy  Physkon  (145-117  B.  C).  Nearly  if 
not  quite  all  of  the  best  authorities  of  recent  times 


124  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

ascribe  tlie  Book  of  Ecclesiastes  to  an  anonymous  post- 
exilic  author.  Thus  e.  (J.  Grotius,  Heno-stenberg,  Luther, 
Stuart,  Evvald,  Keil,  Delitzsch,  Lange,  Plumptre, 
Wright,  Cheyne,  Ginsburg,  Bleek,  Harman,  et  al. 
Some  reasons,  in  brief,  upon  which  this  conclusion  is 
based  are  as  follows : — 

a.  The  argument  from  language.  Bernstein  is  right 
in  saying  that  the  histor}^  of  the  Hebrew  language  and 
literature  is  certainly  divided  into  two  epochs  by  the 
Babylonian  exile,  and  that  the  Book  of  Koheleth 
(Ecclesiastes)  bears  the  stamp  of  the  post-exilic  form 
of  the  language.  Delitzsch  follows,  saying  that  if  the 
Book  Koheleth  were  of  old  Solomonic  origin  then  there 
is  no  history  of  the  Hebrew  language.  Delitzsch 
enumerates  over  a  hundred  different  words  and  forms 
peculiar  to  the  Book  of  Ecclesiastes,  and  only  found  in 
the  most  recent  Books  of  the  Old  Testament,  partlj^ 
only  in  the  Chaldee  portions  of  these,  and  in  general 
use  in  the  Aramaic,  so  that  beyond  all  doubt  we  have 
in  this  Book  a  product  of  the  post-exilian,  and,  at  the 
earliest  of  the  time  of  Ezra-Nehemiah.  There  is  a 
slight  connection  with  the  language  of  Koheleth  and 
the  old  language,  but  at  the  same  time  it  is  in  full 
accord  with  the  new  Hebrew  which  we  meet  with  in  the 
Mishna,  etc.  Thus,  further,  some  of  the  weak  verbs 
interchange  their  forms  as  in  the  Mishna  and  the  later 
language.  The  modal  forms  of  the  old  language  are 
also  disappearing  in  this  Book.  There  is  also  a  pecu- 
liar use  of  the  personal  pronoun  in  connection  with  the 
verbal  form.  And  again  the  use  of  the  demonstrative 
pronoun  Zeh  bears  a  Mishnic  stamp. 

h.  That  the  Book  was  not  composed  by  Solomon  is 
indicated  bv  the  circumstance  that  he   is   not  called 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  125 

Solomon,  nor  Jedidiah  (2  Sam.  12:25)  throiiglioiit  the 
entire  Book,  but  is  designated  by  a  hitherto  unheard 
of  name,  which,  by  its  form,  shows  that  it  belongs,  a 
the  earliest,  to  the  Ezra-Xehemiah  age. 

c.  The  very  title  of  the  Book  acknowledges  that  it 
was  not  written  by  Solomon  himself,  but  by  a  Jewish 
thinker  of  a  much  later  age,  who  sought  to  conceive  of 
himself  as  in  Solomon's  position  and  clothed  his  own 
life  experiences  in  Solomonic  confessions.  Solomon  is 
called  "King  of  Israel,"  "King  over  Israel,"  who 
"  reigued  in  Jerusalem  over  Israel,"  but  the  title 
"King  in  Jerusalem,"  is  peculiar  to  the  title  of  this 
Book.  Moreover  in  1 :  12  the  Preacher  says  "I  was" 
or  "  have  been  king,"  which  in  view  of  following  re- 
trospective perfects  could  not  be  applied  to  Solomon. 
Solomon,  even  in  his  advanced  age,  could  not  say  in 
respect  to  the  period  of  his  life  as  ruler,  "I  have  been 
king,"  for  he  was  certainly  always  so  during  the  forty 
years  of  his  reign,  and  on  to  the  last  moments  of  his 
life. 

d.  The  epilogue  of  the  Book  furnishes  an  argument 
in  favor  of  the  late  comjDosition  of  the  Book  in  that  it 
is  composed  in  a  style  of  Hebrew  approaching  that 
used  in  the  Mishna,  yet  at  an  earlier  date  than  the 
Mishna. 

e.  The  social  and  political  allusions  are  utterly  out  of 
harmonj^  with  the  condi'Jon  of  the  Jewish  state  in  the 
Solomonic  period.  The  historical  Solomon  could 
scarcely  have  written  such  a  satire  upon  his  own  ad- 
ministration as  is  implied,  e.  g.  3:16;  4:1;  5:8.  The 
author  of  the  Book  shows  no  kingly  or  national  feel- 
ing. He  lives  in  a  period  of  political  servitude,  void 
of  all  patriotism.     His  writings  depict  the  depression 


126  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

produced  by  the  corruption  of  an  Oriental  despotism, 
with  its  capriciousness,  injustice,  revolutions,  espion- 
age, and  hopelessness  of  reform.  Thus  3:16;  4:1; 
5:8;  8:9;  10:5,  7,  20.  Evidently  the  writer  lived 
when  the  Jews  had  lost  their  national  independence 
and  formed  but  a  province  of  the  Persian  empire,  or 
later.  The  age  of  the  author,  the  social  status  of  his 
times  was  a  far  gloomier  one  than  is  reflected  in  any 
part  of  the  Book  of  Proverbs.  Unlike  the  prophets 
and  preachers  preceding  him  he  is  not  animated  by 
religious  zeal  and  hope,  he  scarcely  looks  beyond  t;he 
present,  he  is  not  uplifted  by  the  thought  of  Israel's 
Divine  election.  He  views  human  life  in  its  sober, 
sombre  reality.  He  views  his  own  life,  it  is  full  of  dis- 
appointments. He  views  the  lives  of  others  and  finds 
no  enthusiasm,  energy  or  serious  endeavor.  Hence 
he  repeatedly  passes  his  unrelenting  sentence  of  "  All 
is  vanit5^"  In  short,  the  time  in  which  the  writer 
lived  was  one  of  public  misgovernment,  dynastic  op- 
pression and  social  engulfment.  This  certainl}^  does 
not  suit  the  Solomonic  period. 

/.  In  the  Proverbs  of  Solomon  Jehovah  is  the  usual 
name  for  the  divine  Being;  this  word  never  occurs  in 
Ecclesiastes,  but  instead  thereof  Eloheem  (God)  which 
is  used  forty  times. 

g.  It  is  evident  from  5 :  1  that  when  the  Book  was 
written  the  Jewish  temple  had  been  alread}^  rebuilt ; 
for  the  author  gives  advice  about  going  to  the  house 
of  God. 

h.  In  1 :  16  and  2:7,9  the  writer  speaks  as  if  he  had 
behi'nd  him  a  long  line  of  kings  over  the  whole  of 
Israel  and  Judah. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  127 

V.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  preacher  opens 
his  discourse  with  the  exclamation  "  Vanity  of  vani- 
ties," and  then  proceeding 

1.  Ch.  1:1-11.  Describes  the  incessant  changes  in 
human  affairs. 

2.  Chs.  1:12-2:26.  The  preacher's  position  and 
fruitless  search  for  happiness. 

3.  Ch.  3.  Declares  there  is  an  appointed  time  for 
everything;  inculcates  doing  good,  and  enjoying  the 
results  of  one's  toil;  while  asserting  that  men  and 
beasts  are  subject  to  like  calamities. 

4.  Ch.  4.  Discourses  on  the  miseries  of  man,  and 
the  benefits  of  society. 

5.  Ch.  5.  Religious  precepts,  the  vanity  of  riches, 
carnal  enjoyments. 

6.  Ch.  6.  The  miseries  of  man,  and  an  example  in 
illustration. 

7.  Ch.  7.  Proverbs  and  moral  precepts  inculcating 
moderation,  and  the  sometimes  seeming  incongruity 
between  the  portions  of  the  righteous  and  the  wicked. 

8.  Ch.  S.  "It  shall  be  well  with  them  that  fear 
God,"  and  not  well  with  the  wicked,  notwithstanding 
seming  contradictions. 

9.  Ch.  9.  The  doctrine  of  all  things  come  alike  to 
all. 

10.  Chs.  10-12.  Proverbs,  precepts  and  exhorta- 
tions to  remember  and  fear  God,  and  keep  his  com- 
mandments. 

VI.  Doctrine  and  Messianic— Notwithstanding  the 
seeming  pessimistic  tone  of  his  Book,  the  author  is 
never  tempted  to  abandon  his  theistic  faith.  Not- 
withstanding his  recommendations  to  enjoy  the  fruit 
of  one's  labors  in  this  world,   and  his  despairing  view 


128  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

of  life,  still  he  strongly  emphasizes  the  responsibility 
of  man,  and  accountability  to  God. 

The  Messianic  element  in  the  Book  is  of  a  negative 
character.  The  meaning  of  the  Book,  in  respect  to 
the  histor}^  of  redemption,  consists  in  the  actual  proof 
that  humanity,  in  order  to  its  being  set  free  from  its 
unhappiness,  must  have  another,  a  divine  emanci- 
pator. 


THE  SONG  OF  SONCS. 

I.  ^aine,— Sheer  hashshereem  ^^  The  Song  of  Songs. 
The  name  is  derived  from  the  opening  words  of  the 
Book,  The  grammatical  form  of  the  name  (the  com- 
bination of  a  noun  in  the  singular  with  a  dependent 
plural),  is  a  Hebrew  mode  of  expressing  uie  super- 
lative. The  name  therefore  sets  forth  the  subject- 
matter  of  this  Book  as  constituting  the  most  excellent 
Song,  the  Song  surpassing  all  other  songs. 

II.  Position.— The  Song  is  included  in  the  Hagio- 
grapha.  It  also  forms  the  first  of  the  five  Megilloth,  or 
Rolls  that  are  read  publiciy  at  certain  sacred  seasons 
in  the  synagogues.  The  Song  of  Songs  was  read  at  the 
Passover.  The  other  four  Books  of  the  Megilloth  are 
Ruth,  Lamentations,  Ecclesiastes,  Esther. 

III.  Tlieine.— A  song  sung  in  Jerusalem  at  the  cele- 
bration of  the  marria[»e  of  Solomon  and  Shulamite,  and 
of  typical  import. 

IV.  Unity.— The  Book  is  a  unit,  i.  e.  a  single  con- 
nected Song  and  not  composed  of  several  distinct  songs. 
This  is  evident  from  the  following  considerations: — 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  129 

1.  The  name  declares  it  to  be  a  single  poem  or  song. 
Thus  the  singular  noun  sheer=a  song.  If  it  had 
been  intended  to  designate  a  song  composed  of  a  num- 
ber of  songs,  the  grammatical  construction  must  have 
been  different. 

2.  The  name  of  Solomon  which  appears  in  the  title, 
1:1,  or  in  exchange  for  it  the  designation  of  "the 
king,"  appears  at  different  points  throughout  the 
poem,  thus  uniting  the  whole. 

3.  The  consistency^  observed  throughout  the  various 
parts  confirms  the  unit}^  of  The  Song;  e.  g.  one  loved 
one,  and  always  described  in  almost  the  same  lan- 
guage, the  mention  of  her  mother,  but  never  of  her 
father,  etc. 

4.  The  Daughters  of  Jerusalem  form  a  permanent 
element  throughout,  uniting  the  whole. 

0.  There  are  constant  repetitions  of  the  same  ex- 
pressions and  sentiments  throughout,  thus  showing  it! 
to  be  a  poetical  unit,  one  song;  e.  g.  the  adjuration  of 
the  daughters  of  Jerusalem,  the  challenging  question, 
"  Who  is  this?"  the  chorus-description  of  Shulamite, 
as  "  the  matchless  one  among  women,"  etc. 

6.  The  Song  throughout  relates  to  different  parts 
and  features  of  one  and  the  same  subject  and  event. 

V.  Date.— It  is  generalh^  agreed  that  The  Song  is 
constructed  upon  a  basis  of  fact;  i.  e.  it  refers  to  inci- 
dents that  actually  occurred,  and  these  incidents 
occurred  during  Solomon's  life-time.  But  when  were 
these  incidents  recorded  ?  i.  e.  what  is  the  date  of  the 
composition  and  writing  of  The  Song  ?  According  to 
some  the  Solomonic  period.  According  to  others  the 
post-Solomonic,  but  pre-exilic  period.  And  still  others 
[9] 


130  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

say  the  period  of  Ezra  and  Nehemiah,  and  even  the 
late  period  of  the  Greek  erotic  poets.  The  weight  of 
internal  and  external  evidence  points  to  the  earlier 
part  of  Solomon's  reign,  rather  than  to  the  middle  or 
latter  ]3art  of  that  reign,  or  to  any  subsequent  time,  as 
the  date  not  only  for  the  occurrence  of  the  events 
referred  to  in  The  Song,  but  also  the  date  of  the 
writing  of  The  Song.     In  proof  of  this  may  be  noted — 

1.  The  consummate  literary  excellence  of  The  Song 
shows  that  it  must  have  been  written  at  a  time  when 
Hebrew  language  and  literature  had  reached  their 
most  flourishing  period,  the  Solomonic  period. 

2.  The  author  or  authors  of  Prov.  Chs.  1-9  and 
22:17-24:22  were  evidently  acquainted  with  The 
Song,  as  comparisons  will  show. 

3.  The  geographical  references,  commercial  and  po- 
litical allusions,  evidently  recent  occurrence  of  the 
events  recorded,  point  to  the  Solomonic  era  for  its 
composition. 

4.  From  historical  allusions  to  Solomon  in  The  Song 
we  must  conclude  not  only  that  The  Song  was  written 
during  Solomon's  reign,  but  toward  the  commencement 
of  his  reign;  thus  6:8  compared  with  1  Ki.  11:3. 
Moreover  Solomon's  mother  Bathsheba  is  represented 
as  still  living. 

5.  The  so-called  Aramaisms  of  The  Song  are  pure 
Arabic  words  and  forms.  The  abbreviated  relative 
pronoun,  the  letter  sh,  for  the  full  form  asJier,  occurs 
in  poems  of  acknowledged  antiquity,  e.  g.  Song  of  Deb- 
orah, Judg.  5:7. 

6.  The  reference  to  Tirzah,  as  that  to  Jerusalem,  in 
6:4,  is  not  to  either  as  a  political  capital,  but  to  their 
natural  location. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  131 

VI.  Authorship.— The  Solomonic  authorship  of  The 
Song  is  denied  almost  alone  by  those  who  hold  to  the 
Shepherd- hypothesis  method  of  interpretation  (see 
below),  and  these  as  a  rule  admit  that  all  the  other 
evidences  point  to  Solomon  as  the  author.  The  Solo- 
monic authorship  is,  in  brief,  defended  on  these 
grounds: — 

1.  The  title,  1:1,  ascribes  the  authorship  to  Solo- 
mon. 

2.  The  extensive  and  accurate  knowledge  displayed 
in  The  Song  offers  abundant  and  unmistakable  testi- 
mony to  Solomon  being  the  author;  e.  g.  The  Song  as 
a  literary,  poetic  production ;  the  extensive  and  accur- 
ate knowledge  displayed  in  The  Song  in  matters  geo- 
graphical and  historical ;  and  a  similar  knowledge  as 
to  the  human  arts  and  natural  sciences. 

3.  It  is  abundantly  evident  that  the  chief  reason  for 
denying  the  Solomonic  authorship  of  The  Song  is  be- 
cause it  is  out  of  the  question  to  hold  to  that,  and  at 
the  same  time  hold  to  the  Shepherd-hypothesis  inter- 
pretation. But  that)  condemns  the  human  hypothesis 
rather  than  the  Solomonic  authorship  so  positively 
asserted  in  1:1. 

VII.  Form.— The  Song  is  not  a  drama.  It  most 
resembles  the  lyric.  Certain  it  is  that  it  is  in  no  sense 
a  drama;  but  a  song^  a  nuptial  song,  Ij^rical  rather 
than  dramatic  in  character.  In  proof  it  may  be  briefly 
noted, — 

1.  According  to  its  own  name  in  the  Title,  1:1,  it  is 
sheer.,  i.  e.  a  song,  and  a  song  in  celebration,  according 
to  the  significance  of  the  word. 

2.  From  its  poetic  and  artistic  structure  it  is  in  the 
nature  of  a  song,  and  not  a  drama. 


132  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

3.  As  a  slieer,  The  Song'  is  moreover  a  poetic  com- 
position intended  to  be  sung  or  chanted,  not  theatri- 
cally represented. 

4.  According  to  its  form,  nature  and  subject-matter, 
The  Song  is  a  song  of  love  and  marriage;  and  to  define 
it  more  strictly  still,  a  post-nuptial  song;  i.  e.  a  song 
composed  to  be  sung,  and  that  actually  was  sung  dur- 
ing the  festivities  following  upon  the  marriage  of 
Solomon  and  Shulamite,  and  in  celebration  of  that 
marriage. 

5.  The  drama  is  an  institution  entirely  foreign  to 
the  Hebrew,  the  Shemitic  mind. 

6.  The  Song  violates  all  the  principal  rules  of  a 
drama; — it  is  not  represented  in  person  throughout; 
it  is  devoted  to  long  descriptive  and  narrative  ad- 
dresses requiring  no  reply ;  there  is  no  regular  historical 
succession  of  events,  no  dr.'^matic  development,  no 
progress  of  a  plot  ct.icl  a  denouement;  while  omissions 
fatal  to  a  drama  constantly  appear,  and  imaginary 
characters,  scenes  and  speeches  are  introduced  in 
order  to  fill  out  the  dramatic  conception. 

VIII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— It  is  to  be  remem- 
bered that  The  Song  is  a  marriage  song;  that  all  the 
principal  features  and  events  connected  with  a  Biblical, 
oriental  marriage  are  clearly  set  forth  in  it,  though  not 
in  the  precise  chronological  order  in  which  they  natur- 
ally occur.  It  is  also  to  be  remembered  that  The  Song 
was  written  by  Solomon  to  be  sung  at  the  celebration 
of  his  marriage  with  Shulamite;  and  was  so  sung  by  a 
choir  selected  for  the  purpose,  during  the  festivities 
that  followed  immediately  upon  the  consummation  of 
that  marriage.  So  that  at  the  time  The  Song  opens 
Solomon  and  Shulamite  are  actually  married,  even  as 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  133 

in  the  course  of  The  Song  they  address  each  other  b}^ 
terms  that  absolute!}^  require  us  to  regard  them  as 
husband  and  wife.  The  Song  is  largely  composed  of 
descriptive  references  to  prominent  incidents  that  pre- 
ceded and  led  up  to  their  marriage,  and  these  inci- 
dents embrace  all  the  prominent  features  of  a  Biblical 
and  oriental  marriage.  The  principal  persons  intro- 
duced into  The  Song  are — Solomon,  King  in  Jerusa- 
lem ;  Shulamite,  a  Kedarene  maiden  from  east  of  the 
Jordan;  Daughters  of  Jerusalem,  apart  of  the  ro3^al 
household;  attendants  of  the  palace;  citizens  of 
Jerusalem;  mother  and  brothers  of  Shulamite.  The 
main  divisions  of  The  Song  are  as  follows: — 

1.  Ch.  1 :  1.  Title.  Sets  forth  the  name  and  nature 
of  the  Book,  i.  e.  a  Song;  and  its  authorship,  i,  e. 
Solomon. 

2.  Chs.  1:2-2:7.  First  experiences  in  the  royal 
home.  That  is,  it  refers  to  the  first  experiences  of 
Shulamite  the  bride  and  wife,  in  her  royal  home,  after 
having  been  brought  there  in  bridal  procession  as  de- 
scribed in  3: 6-11. 

3.  Chs.  2:8-3:5.  Love's  separations  and  meetings. 
This  division  describes  a  pre-marriage  incident,  and 
therefore,  in  point  of  time,  antedates  the  preceding 
division.  It  refers  to  a  time  when  before  their  mar- 
riage Solomon  visited  Shulamite,  and  that  occurred 
which  here  Shulamite  narrates  to  the  Daughters  of 
Jerusalem. 

4.  Chs.  3:6-5:1.  The  royal  home-bringing  of  the 
bride.  Describes  how  Shulamite  was  brought  in  royal 
procession  to  her  royal  home  in  Jerusalem,  as  the  bride 
and  wife  of  Solomon. 

5.  Chs.  5 :  2-6 :  9.     Love's  separations,  meetings  and 


134  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

coDfessions.  Refers  to  another  pre-marriage  incident, 
in  which  occur  mutual  descriptions  of  love  and  praise 
on  the  part  of  Solomon  and  Shulamite,  the  beloved 
and  loved  one. 

6.  Chs.  6 :  10-8 :  4.  The  royal  bridegroom  and  bride. 
Consisting  of  descriptions  of  Shulamite  in  the  midst  of 
her  royal  surroundings,  and  interviews  between  her 
and  her  royal  husband. 

7.  Ch.  8:5-14.  Seals  and  Songs.  Relates  to  the 
time  of  the  betrothal  contract  when  Solomon  goes  ac- 
companied and  introduced  by  Shulamite  into  her 
home,  and  the  betrothal  contract  having  been  made  is 
finally  sealed,  and  the  customary  dowry  gifts  be- 
stowed. 

IX.  Interpretation.— Three  principal  methods  of 
interpretation  have  been  adopted  in  explanation  of 
The  Song;  viz.  : 

1.  The  Allegorical  interpretation.  This  interpreta- 
tion denies  that  there  is  any  historical  basis  to  the 
descriptions  of  The  Song,  and  affirms  that  everything 
in  it  is  of  spiritual  import.  It  treats  the  persons,  ob- 
jects, events,  and  every  utterance  of  The  Song  as 
unhistorical,  as  mere  figures,  names,  symbols  for 
spiritual  persons,  objects,  sentiments.  In  general 
this  interpretation  regards  The  Song  as  describing, 
under  the  figure  of  the  marriage  relation,  the  mutual 
love  subsisting  between  the  Lord  and  his  people, — in 
the  first  instance  between  the  Lord  and  the  Congrega- 
tion of  Israel,  and  in  the  second  instance  between 
Christ  and  the  Church.  To  this  interpretation  there 
are  serious  objections;  e.  g. — 

a.  This  interpretation  in  denying  a  primarj^,  literal, 
historical  sense  to  The  Song  destroys  its  own  founda- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  135 

tion  ;  for  it  is  from  the  sphere  of  the  natural  and  his- 
torical that  the  Scriptures  rise  to  the  spiritual. 

b.  Hence  this  interpretation  is  contrary  to  Scripture 
analog}^;  the  order  of  which  is  first  the  s^^mbol  then 
the  substance,  first  the  type  then  the  docti'ine. 

c.  The  allegorical  method  of  interpreting  Tlie  Song 
is  destructive  of  all  sound  hermeneutical  laws,  and 
substitutes  therefor  an  arbitrar}-  system  of  exegesis. 

d.  This  interpretation  is  unable  to  furnish  a  satis- 
factorj^  and  uniform  exposition  of  The  Song. 

e.  This  interpretation  practically  makes  The  Song  a 
meaningless  Book  to  the  people  of  God  under  the  Old 
Testament. 

/.  This  interpretation  leads  to  all  sorts  of  extrava- 
gances and  mal-interpretations. 

2.  The  Shepherd-hypothesis  interpretation.  This 
method  of  interpretation  regards  Tlie  Song  as  histori- 
cal, but  introduces  another  and  whoU}^  unnamed  char- 
acter in  The  Song,  viz.  the  Shepherd,  an  obscure 
peasant,  who  is  supposed  to  be  the  betrothed  of  Shul- 
amite,  and  the  successful  rival  of  Solomon.  Accord- 
ing to  this  interpretation,  Solomon,  during  one  of  his 
tours  in  the  northern  part  of  his  kingdom,  saw  Shula- 
mite,  was  overcome  by  her  beauty,  was  smitten  in  love 
for  her,  and  so  had  her  abducted  and  carried  away  to 
his  palace  in  Jerusiilem.  There  he  plied  her  with  all 
the  arts  and  arguments  of  a  flatterer  and  would-be 
seducer,  in  order  to  j)ersuade  her  to  become  one  of  his 
liareem.,  a  royal  mistress.  She  refuses  his  seductive 
overtures,  remains  true  to  this  Shepherd  to  whom  she 
is  finally  wedded.  According  to  this  view  The  Song  is 
intended  to  teach  the  lesson  of  virtue  and  womanly 
fidelit}^,  but  womanly  fidelity  to  what  is  nothing  more 


136  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

than  a  mere  earthly,  human  love;  for  according  to  this 
there  is  no  typical,  spiritual  teaching  of  The  Song. 
This  Shepherd-hypothesis  interpretation  of  The  Song 
is  utterably  untenable,  and,  in  brief,  for  the  following 
reasons : — 

a.  It  repeatedly  violates  grammatical  constructions 
and  must  do  so  in  order  to  maintain  itself. 

h.  It  repeatedly  violates  lexical  meanings,  and 
Scripture  usus  loqueiidi,  and  must  do  so  in  order  to 
maintain  itself. 

c.  It  interpolates  words  and  expressions  that  have 
no  existence  in  the  text,  and  must  do  this  to  maintain 
itself. 

d.  It  eliminates  words  and  significations  from  the 
text  because  these  cannot  be  retained,  and  their 
hypothesis  maintained. 

e.  It  treats,  and  is  compelled  to  treat,  a  number  of 
passages  as  being  "ironical,"  or  "said  aside,"  or 
"  said  in  a  low  tone,"  when  there  is  no  intimation  of 
this  in  the  text. 

/.  It  repeatedly  makes  characters  in  The  Song  con- 
tradict themselves  and  each  other;  and  sets  text  and 
context  at  variance. 

g.  It  represents  Solomon  as  a  would-be  seducer 
when  throughout  The  Song  he  is  represented  as  pre- 
cisely the  opposite. 

h.  It  charges  The  Song  and  the  principal  characters 
in  The  Song  with  the  most  absurd  incongruities; — 
violations  of  all  laws  linguistic,  social,  moral. 

i.  It  introduces  an  unnamed  and  entirely  fictitious 
character  in  The  Song. 

j.  It  violates  the  laws  of  interpretation  and  exegesis 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  137 

in  that  it  repeatedly  takes  certain  statements  as  partly 
literal  and  partly  figurative. 

k.  It  contradicts  the  plain  and  positive  statements 
of  The  Song  which  repeatedly  represent  Solomon  and 
Shulamite  as  the  beloved  and  loved  one;  represent 
Shulamite  as  giving  herself  to  Solomon ;  represent 
Solomon  and  Shulamite  addressing  each  other  by  the 
same  terms  of  love,  and  by  terms  that,  if  language  has 
-any  meaning  at  all,  require  us  to  regard  them  as 
husband  and  wife. 

3.  The  Typical  interpretation.  It  regards  The  Song 
as  entirely  historical,  the  historical  occasion  being  the 
love  consummated  in  marriage  between  Solomon  and 
Shulamite.  But  it  is  also  typical;  and  has  a  certain 
and  blessed  teaching.  In  an  allegory  everything  must 
be  spiritualized.  A  type  typifies  one  thing,  and  the 
antitype  far  surpasses  the  type.  So  then  as  to  the 
typical  character  of  The  Song. 

a.  Solomon  is  a  type  of  the  Lord, — the  one  Lord  of 
each  and  all  his  followers  in  all  times. 

h.  Shulamite  is  a  type  of  the  individual  believer, 
follower,  lover  of  that  one  Lord. 

c.  The  relation  between  Solomon  and  Shulamite  is  a 
type  of  that  relation  which  exists  or  should  exist 
between  the  Lord  and  each  one  of  his  individual  fol- 
lowers. 

This  is  the  onl3^  reasonable  interpretation  of  The 
Song  as  is  evident,  briefly,  from  the  following  con- 
siderations : — 

a.  It  is  supijorted  by  Scripture  analogy.  Psa.  45, 
and  Isa.  5 : 1-7  show  plainly  how  The  Song  is  to  be 
interpreted. 


138 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


h.  It  is  the  only  interpretation  that  satisfies  the 
languao^e  of  the  text. 

c.  It  is  the  onl3^  interpretation  that  furnishes  a  con- 
sistent interpretation  of  the  different  parts  of  The 
Song,  and  a  uniform  and  consistent  interpretation  of 
the  whole. 

d.  It  is  supported  by  the  direct  positive  statements 
of  The  Song,  and  all  the  representations  that  The 
Song  makes  relative  to  Solomon  and  Shnlamite  as  the 
beloved  and  loved  one,  the  husband  and  wife. 

e.  It  furnishes  not  only  the  only  consistent  literary 
interpretation,  but  also  an  interpretation  consistent 
with  the  name  and  nature  of  the  Book,  and  its  place 
in  the  Canon. 


PROPHET-PROPHECY. 

I.  Name.— The  Hebrew  verb  nciba  means  to  cause  to 
bubble  up  or  pour  forth  abundantly ;  to  speak  by  a 
divine  power;  to  prophesy.  From  this  verb  comes 
the  title  nahi,  L  e.  a  prophet.  Other  titles  for  prophet 
are  ro'eh,  meaning  a  Seer,  and  liozeh,  also  meaning 
Seer  but  especially  in  the  sense  of  prophetic  vision. 
The  title  nahi  =  propliet  is  primary,  and  designates  one 
who  belongs  to  the  prophetic  order,  while  the  other 
two  terms  meaning  seer  are  secondary,  included  in 
nabi,  and  set  forth  more  especially  the  mode  of  re- 
ceiving the  divine  communications. 

II.  Office.— The  office  of  prophecy  and  prophet  is 
the   announcement   and   interpretation  of   the  divine 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  139 

will  to  Others  as  that  will  is  revealed  to  the  prophet  bj^ 
God.  The  prophets  were  the  divinely  called  and  com- 
missioned representatives  of  Jehovah,  and  prophecy 
the  will  and  words  of  Jehovah  communicated  of 
Jehovah  to  the  prophets,  by  whom  it  was  to  be  com- 
municated to  the  people.  So  the  function  of  the 
prophet  and  prophec}^  is  to  declare  and  defend  the 
teachin<i;s  of  God's  truth,  as  that  truth  is  set  forth  in 
the  sphere  of  precept  and  of  promise. 

III.  Institution.— The  piophetical  institution  was 
one  for  which  the  Law  made  provision.  See  Deut. 
18:  9-19.  The  historical  origin  of  prophecy  is  contem- 
poraneous with  the  constitution  of  the  Theocracy  at 
Sinai.  True,  prophecy  existed  before  this,  existed 
with  the  first  promise  of  redemption  immediately  after 
the  fall  of  our  first  parents.  But  the  Law,  the  Theoc- 
racy, the  ceremonials  of  worship  were  instituted  for 
the  development  of  that  promise  tlirough  the  prophetic 
office. 

IV.  Inspiration.— The  modes  of  communication  be- 
tween God  and  men  are  set  forth  in  Num.  12:6-8 
where  three  modes  are  specified,  viz.  (1)  Vision;  (2) 
Dream;  (3)  Direct  communication  and  manifestation. 
The  last  is  the  highest  form.  A  like  specification  is 
furnished  by  Joel  and  Daniel.  Joel  2:  28;  Dan.  1: 17. 
Prophecy  ma^^  include  genius,  but  genius  never  con- 
stitutes prophecy.  Prophecj^  is  not  possible  to  human 
attainment,  but  exclusively  something  of  divine  en- 
dowment. The  prophet  stands  in  a  unique,  personal 
and  intimate  relation  to  God,  who  makes  him  a  par- 
ticipator of  the  divine  counsel,  and  discloses  to  him 
secret  things.  He  receives  by  direct  communication 
with  God,  the  very  truth  from  God,  and  communicates 


140  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

it  in  the  language  God  intends  to  be  used.  Compare 
Aaron's  relation  to  Moses,  Ex,  4:14-10,  and  Ex.  7:1, 
2,  also  Deut.  18: 18  and  Jer.  15: 19. 

V.  Classification.— In  the  main  prophecy  is  of  two 
kinds: — Didactic  and  Predictive. 

Didactic  prophecy  is  the  revelation  to  the  prophet, 
and  the  communication  by  the  prophet,  of  the  divine 
will  as  it  concerns  the  obligations  of  the  present.  It 
instructs  man  as  to  what  he  should  be  through  God's 
gracious  working. 

Predictive  prophecy  is  the  revelation  to  the  prophet, 
and  the  communication  by  the  prophet,  of  the  divine 
will  as  it  concerns  the  occurrences  of  the  future.  It 
foretells  to  man  what  certainly  shall  be  through  God's 
sovereign  working. 

As  to  the  union  of  the  two  kinds  of  prophecy, — 
didactic  instructs  as  to  the  requirements  of  the  present, 
while  predictive  foretells  the  things  of  the  future  in 
harmony"  with  the  requirements  of  the  i)resent,  both 
being  confirmed  by  the  didactic  and  predictive 
prophecies  of  the  past. 

Predictive  prophecy  is  also  of  two  kinds: — Local  or 
Temporary,  and  Messianic. 

Predictive  prophecy  and  its  fulfilment  is  the  strong- 
est, the  incontestable  evidence  to  the  truth  of  the 
Scriptures. 

VI.  Succession.— The  prophet  was  sovereignly  called 
of  God  to  his  office,  generally  without  special  reference 
to  lineal  or  scholarly  antecedents.  The  Scriptures  do 
not  represent  an  unbroken  series  of  prophets,  each 
inducted  into  the  office  by  his  predecessor.  The  steps 
in  prophetic  succession  may  be  briefly  represented  as 
follows : — 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  141 

1.  Prophecy  began  in  Eden  and  with  the  Protevan- 
gelinm. 

2.  Enoch,    the   seventh    from    Adam,  prophesied. 
Jude  14,  15. 

3.  Noah  as  a  preacher   of  righteousness,   and  the 
builder  of  the  ark  was  a  prophet.     2  Pet.  2:  5. 

4.  Abraham. 

5.  Isaac. 

6.  Jacob. 

7.  Intermission  of  prophecy  from  the  death  of  Jacob 
until  the  Exodus. 

8.  Moses. 

9.  From  Moses  to  Samuel  interval  without  prophecj\ 

10.  Samuel. 

11.  From  Samuel  to  Malachi  jn-ophecy  continuous. 

12.  From     Malachi     to     Christ     interval     without 
prophec3^ 


0) 

b 
0 


^ 


-2^ 

•& 

i 

® 

^ 

so 

^ 

'i 

o 

C3 
,£3 

3 

•5 

<r> 

<D 

5^ 

^ 

1-3 

1-5 

55j 

& 

o    o 

00     GO 


a 

O 
^-^ 


I  ^ 


CQ  -*  o 
00  (N  Oi 
tr-     i>     O 


O     :«      ce 
M    ►^    ^3 


^         000500000 


^    Sg    lo    th    05    JO    o 

00      GO      00      00      i>      t-      t^ 


o     ® 


H 


-d 

ft  ^* 

IS]    ^ 


b        CO 

u 


CD     *0     o 
CO     CO     (?;{ 


lo    »9    io    lo    o 


iO  C5  00  00  »o 
CD  CO  (M  O  O 
CD     CD     CD 


tr    o    o 

05      CO      0> 

«:>    io    JO    lo 


I 


b  ^  >^  ^ 

OO  CO  CO  OQ 

«  CO  02  ac 

<'1  <1  <tl  <1 

i  O)  i  i 

^H  Si  ^  5_ 

eL(  fin  Ph  (1( 


S     ^ 


i  H 

cc     c3     ce 


PL,  <1  <1  ^  o  o  o 


I  i  i  i 

M       S       ^       r^ 
rd      H      W      P=^ 


^    M    6    6    o 

W    O    Ph    Oh    (In 


o 
K 


,d    ^ 


,-H  0) 


I 


ill 


■||^ 


I  -i  i  ^  -I 

n^       p<i       cc       )K       CC 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  143 


ISAIAH. 


I.  Name.—  Yesliayaliu  =  Isaiah  =  Jehovah's   salva- 
tion. 

II.  Biography.— Isaiah,  who  belonged  to  the  King- 
dom of  Judah,  flourished  in  the  Assyrian  period.  (See 
Table  of  Prophets.)  Isaiah  was  the  son  of  Amoz,  and 
resided  and  prophesied  in  Jerusalem.  He  was  mar- 
ried, and  two  sons  are  spoken  of,  both  of  whose  names, 
like  that  of  Isaiah,  were  significant  as  to  the  times: — 
the  elder  Shear-yashub^  A  remnant  shall  return ; 
the  younger  Malier  -  sJialal  -  hash  -  haz  =  Spoil  swiftly^ 
rob  quickly.  Isaiah  received  the  prophetic  call,  and 
appeared  as  a  prophet  iu  the  last  year  of  King  LTzziah's 
reign.  (See  Table  of  Kings.)  Isaiah  continued  to 
prophesy  throughout  the  reigns  of  the  three  succeed- 
ing kings,  Jotham,  Ahaz  and  Hezekiah.  He  proba- 
bly continued  to  exercise  his  prophetic  office  up  to 
the  beginning  of  Manasseh's  reign.  Tradition  says 
that  he  sufi'ered  martyrdom  by  being  sawn  asunder  in 
the  persecutions  that  followed  the  accession  of  Man- 
asseh,  and  by  the  order  of  that  wicked  king.  Accord- 
ing to  2  Chron.  26:22;  32:32,  Isaiah  was  the  author 
of  a  history  both  of  Uzziah  and  Hezekiah.  Isaiah  was 
preeminently  a  statesman  as  well  as  a  prophet,  his 
influence  being  strongly  felt  throughout  the  reigns 
during  which  he  prophesied,  while  he  was  especially  in 
high  favor  with  King  Hezekiah.  The  two  principal 
state  events  with  which  Isaiah  was  connected,  and  in 
which  he  took  a  prominent  part,  were  the  two  crises 
through  which  in  his  lifetime  Judah  passed ;  the  first 


14:4  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

being  the  invasion  of  Judah  on  the  part  of  the  allied 
Sj^rians  and  Israelites  (Chs.  7,  8),  and  the  second  being 
the  invasion  of  Judah  on  the  part  of  Sennacherib,  and 
the  destruction  of  the  Assyrian  host  (Chs.  36,  37). 
Isaiah  not  only  lived  to  an  advanced  age,  but  lived  to 
see  a  number  of  his  predictions  fulfilled. 

III.  Ministry.— Isaiah  exercised  his  prophetic  minis- 
try during  a  period  of  forty-six  j^ears  (758-712  B.  C), 
and  perhaps  more  nearly  for  about  half  a  century,  as 
he  began  to  prophesy  in  the  last  year  of  Uzziah's 
reign,  and  continued  to  prophesy  till  at  least  fourteen 
years  of  Hezekiah's  reign  had  passed  by.  The  sphere 
of  Isaiah's  prophetic  ministration  was  Judah  and 
Jerusalem.  Ilis  labors  appear  to  have  been  carried  on 
chiefl3%  if  not  exclusively,  in  Jerusalem.  In  the  exer- 
cise of  his  prophetic  ministry  Isaiah's  range  of  subjects 
was  ^ar-reaching,  the  burdens  of  his  prophecies  em- 
bracing all  the  chief  contemporary  nations,  not  only 
Judah  and  Israel,  but  also  Syria,  Assyria,  Babylon, 
Egypt,  Moab,  Edom,  Philistia,  Ethiopia,  Tyre,  etc. 
But  these  prophecies  concerning  other  nations  were 
intended  primarily  for  the  benefit  of  Judah,  its  warn- 
ing, instruction  and  hope.  Throughout  his  ministry 
Isaiah  showed  himself  to  be  without  an  equal  in  the 
prophetic  order  as  a  social  and  moral  reformer,  as  a 
court  councilor  and  statesman,  as  the  theologian  of  all 
times.  The  prophetic  utterances  of  Isaiah's  ministry 
revolve  about  the  two  great  themes  of  prophecy; — for 
the  unbelieving  and  disobedient,  judgment;  for  the 
believing  and  obedient,  redemption  and  the  glorious 
consummation  of  the  Theocracy. 

IV.  Chronology.— The  chronology  of  this  period  is 
1.    Contemporary  Prophets ; — Hosea,  Micah. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  145 

2.  Kings  of  Jiidali  ; — Uzziah,  Jothara,  Ahaz,  Heze- 
kiah,  Manasseh.     See  Table  of  Kings. 

3.  Kings  of  Israel ; — Menahem,  Pekahiah,  Pekah, 
Hosea.     See  Table  of  Kings. 

4.  Damascene  Syria  ; — Hazael  (2  Ki.  13 :  3-7).  Ben- 
hadad  III.  (2  Ki.  13:3-7.)  Jeroboam  II.  invades 
Syria.  Daraascus  vassal  of  Assyria.  Rezin  (Rezon) 
742  B.  C.  Last  King  of  Damascus.  2  Ki.  16:5; 
Isa.  Ch.  7. 

5.  Assyria.  Pul  =  Tiglath-Pileser  II.  usurps  the 
Assyrian  throne,  and  founds  the  second  great  Assyrian 
empire.     Reigned  745-728  B.  C. 

Shalmaneser  IV.  a  general  of  the  Assyrian  army 
seizes  the  throne,  and  succeeds  Tiglath  -  Pileser. 
Reigned  727-722  B.  C. 

Sargon,  a  military  hero,  succeeds,  usurping  the 
throne  and  reigning  sixteen  years,  722-705  B.  C. 

Sennacherib,  son  of  Sargon,  succeeds,  and  reigns 
about  twenty-four  years,  705-681  B.  C. ;  and  is  then 
succeeded  by  his  son, 

Esarhaddon,  who  reigned  681-668  B.  C,  and  is  suc- 
ceeded by  his  son, 

Asshurbanipal  =  Sardanapalus  II.,  who  reigned 
668-626  B.  C. 

Toward  the  close  of  the  reign  of  this  monarch  begins 
the  swift  decline  of  the  Assyrian  empire,  and  then 
follows  its  fall  under  Esarhaddon  II.,  the  Sarakos  of 
the  Greeks. 

6.  Egypt.  After  a  period  of  dynastic  changes,  in- 
ternal dissensions,  and  threatened  invasion  from 
Assyria  on  the  north  and  Ethiopia  on  the  south, 
Bokenranef,  about  740  B.  C,  and  sole  king  of  the  24th 

[lOJ 


146  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

D3mast3',  was  succeeded  by  the  Ethiopian  King 
Shabaka  or  Sabako,  the  So  of  2  Ki.  17:  4  who  took 
the  Egyptian  throne  and  founded  the  dynasty  of  the 
Ethiopians  725  B.  C.  He  was  succeeded  by  Sha- 
batak  whose  reign  was  short  when  he  was  succeeded 
by  Tirhaka  (Isa.  36  :  6 ;  37 :  9),  brother-in-law  of  Sabako, 
and  who  after  a  reign  of  twenty-six  years  was  succeed- 
ed by  Rut-Ainon  or  Urdamen,  his  son-in-law,  and  he 
by  the  first  king  of  the  26th  Dynasty,  Psaraetik  I.  or 
Psammetichus,  who  was  followed  about  612  B.  C.  by 
his  son  Neku  II.,  the  Pharaoh  Necho  of  2  Ki.  23:29, 
and  contemporar}^  of  Josiah  King  of  Judah. 

7.  Events.  B.  C.  756.  Jotham  made  regent  along 
with  his  father  Uzziah. 

B.  C.  745.  Tiglath-Pileser  usurps  the  Ass^^-ian 
throne. 

B.  C.  742.     Call  of  Isaiah.     Death  of  Uzziah. 

B.  C.  741.     Death  of  Jotham;  accession  of  Ahaz. 

B.  C.  738.  Tribute  paid  to  the  Assyrians  by  Men- 
ahem  and  Rezin. 

B.  C.  734.  Pekah  deposed  and  slain;  Hoshea  with 
Assj^rian  help  raised  to  the  throne  of  Samaria ;  Damas- 
cus besieged;  deportation  of  transjordanic  tribes  by 
Tiglath-Pileser. 

B.  C.  732.  Damascus  captured  by  Tiglath-Pileser; 
Kezin  put  to  death. 

B.  C.  727.  Tiglath-Pileser  succeeded  \>y  Shalmane- 
ser  IV. ,  and  Ahaz  by  Hezekiah. 

B.  C.  722.  Sargon  seizes  the  throne;  captures  Sa- 
maria.    End  of  the  Northern  Kingdom. 

B.  C.  721.     Merodach-baladan  captures  Babylon. 

B.  C.  712.  Embassy  of  Merodach-baladan  to  Heze- 
kiah. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  147 

B.  C.  711.  Conquest  of  Jiidah  and  Ashdod  by  Sar- 
gon. 

B.  C.  710.     Conquest  of  Babylonia  by  Sargon. 

B.  C.  705.  Sargon  murdered,  and  succeeded  by  his 
son  Sennacherib. 

B.  C.  703.     Sennacherib  defeats  Merodach-baladan. 

B.  C.  701.  Campaign  of  Sennacherib  against  Phoe- 
nicia, Philistia  and  Judah. 

B.  C.  697.  Death  of  Hezekiah ;  succeeded  by  Man- 
asseh. 

B.  C.  681.  Sennacherib  murdered  and  succeeded  by 
his  son  Esarhaddon. 

B.  C.  607.  Nineveh  destroyed  by  the  Medes  and 
Babylonians. 

B.  C.  586.  Destruction  of  Jerusalem  by  Nebuchad 
nezzar. 

B.  C  549.     Cyrus. 

B.  C.  538.  Cyrus  captures  Babylon,  and  releases 
the  Jewish  exiles. 

V.  Authorship— Unity.— Aben  Ezra,  a  distinguished 
Spanish  rabbi  of  the  twelfth  centur}^,  was  the  first  to 
suggest  a  duality  of  authorship  as  to  the  Prophecy  of 
Isaiah;  intimating  that  the  prophecies  of  the  last  part 
of  the  Book  were  written  by  King  Jechoniah  at  the 
time  of  the  Babylonian  captivity.  When  we  reach 
Eichhorn  in  the  last  century  we  find  that  he  has  carried 
the  hypothesis  of  documents  so  far  as  to  divide  the 
Book  of  Isaiah  into  eightj'-five  fragments,  wiiich  he 
attributed  to  very  different  authors  and  times. 
Modern  criticism  does  not  go  quite  so  far;  but  having 
accepted  the  Isaianic  duality  of  Aben  Ezra,  and  given 
us  a  Proto-Isaiah,  author  of  Chs.  1-39,  and  a  Deutero- 
Isaiah,  author  of  Chs.  40-66,  it  has  further  proceeded 


148  INTRODUCTION    OUi'LINES. 

to  give  us  different  authors  for  different  prophecies  in 
these  two  great  divisions,  especially  the  proto-Isaiah 
division.  A  recent  writer  has  styled  this  criticism, 
not  Higher,  but  "rationalistic  criticism,"  and  such  it 
unquestionably  is,  for  it  is  evident  that  it  is  not 
Isaiah,  as  such,  that  is  being  criticized  and  assailed. 
What  is  being  assailed  is  the  supernatural,  is  inspir- 
ation, is  in  a  word  the  possibility  and  reality  of  pre- 
dictive prophecy.  Granted  that  a  prophet,  by  the 
power  and  knowledge  given  him  of  God,  may  foretell 
years  and  centuries  beforehand  what  is  to  take  place, — 
and  there  ceases  to  be  any  objection,  worthy  of  the 
name,  to  the  Unity  of  the  Book  of  Isaiah,  and  its  au- 
thorship by  Isaiah  the  son  of  Amoz.  In  support  of 
this  unity  and  authorship,  and  as  against  the  general 
view  that  the  second  half  of  Isaiah  was  written  by  a 
writer  in  the  last  decenium  of  the  exile,  it  ma}^  briefly 
be  noted 

1.  The  New  Testament  assigns  the  authorship  of  the 
Prophecy  of  Isaiah  to  a  single  author,  and  that  author 
Isaiah  the  son  of  Amoz.  Thus,  e.  g.  John  12:37-41 
where  two  quotations  are  made  from  Isaiah,  viz.  one 
from  the  so-called  proto-Isaiah,  i.  e.  6:9,  10,  and  the 
other  from  the  so-called  deutero-Isaiah,  viz.  53:1. 
But  John  evidently  quotes  these  passages  as  being  the 
sayings  and  writings  of  one  and  the  same  Isaiah,  for 
he  emphasizes  their  Isaianic  authorship  by  the  three- 
fold declaration, — "the  saying  of  Esaias,"  "  Esaias 
said  again,"  and  "  these  things  said  Esaias." 

2.  It  is  the  exceptionless  rule  with  the  prophets  to 
furnish  in  the  opening  words  of  their  prophecies  their 
prophetic  credentials.  These  credentials  include  a 
statement —      a.   Of  the   prophet's  name.     h.   Of   the 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  149 

prophet's  divine  authority,  viz.  that  his  prophecy  is  a 
word  or  vision  he  had  from  Jehovah,  c.  The  pro- 
phet's parentage.  cL  The  prophet's  nativity,  e.  The 
reigns  during  which  or  time  when  he  prophesied. 
/.  The  parties  to  whom  his  prophecy  was  addressed. 
g.  the  place  where  he  received  or  uttered  his  prophecy. 
Nearly  all  the  prophets,  all  the  greater  prophets,  and 
the  majority  of  the  minor  prophets  furnish  most  of  the 
above  items  in  presenting  and  as  constituting  their 
prophetic  credentials.  Not  one  of  the  prophets  but 
furnishes  at  least  two,  /.  e.  his  name,  and  the  divine 
authority  of  his  prophetic  utterances.  The  greater 
prophets  of  the  Exilian  and  post-Exilian  periods  are 
especially  full  and  accurate  in  the  data  furnished  by 
them  as  to  their  prophetic  authority  and  ministry. 
But  the  so-called  deutero-Isaiah,  the  greatest  of  all  the 
prophets,  leaves  us  without  even  the  remotest  intima- 
tion, utterly  fails  to  present  any  ^prophetical  creden- 
tials, does  not  mention  a  single  item,  not  even  his 
name  or  his  divine  authority  for  speaking.  And  yet 
this  prophecy,  /.  e.  Chs.  40-6G,  is  the  most  pregnant 
and  the  sublimest  of  all  the  prophecies  ever  uttered. 
That  such  a  prophecy  should  be  anonymous,  should 
be  destitute  of  divine  official  authority,  and  in  defiance 
of  prophetical  usage  and  law,  is  incomprehensible,  far 
more  incomprehensible  than  all  the  assumed  difficul- 
ties of  the  critics. 

3.  The  theologic  and  Messianic  conceptions  of  the 
first  and  second  halves  of  Isaiah  are  not  only  in  ])re- 
cise  agreement,  but  together  constitute  one  continu- 
ously developed,  and  finally  completed  unit; — a  unit 
indivisible  as  to  nature,  argument  and  authorship, 
without  rendering  both  X3arts  imperfect.     The  proto- 


150  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Isaiah  alone  would  be  foundation  without  superstrnc- 
tiire.  The  deutero-Isaiah  alone  would  be  superstructure 
without  foundation.  Taking  the  Book  as  a  unit  the 
conception  of  God  is  one  and  complete  as  to  his  nature 
and  attributes: — his  majesty,  infinitude,  almightiness, 
holiness;  his  purity,  righteousness,  faithfulness,  truth, 
mercy,  love,  jealousy,  wrath.  It  is  especially  God's 
holiness,  the  character  of  God  as  "the  Holy  One  of 
Israel,"  that  is  so  strikingly  Isaianic  in  its  force  and 
frequency.  It  is  almost  peculiar  to  the  one  undivided 
Book  of  Isaiah,  occurring  twenty-five  times  in  Isaiah, 
and  onl3^  six  times  elsewhere  throughout  the  whole  Old 
Testament.  It  is  a  characteristic  of  the  second  half  of 
Isaiah  as  well  as  the  first,  and  constitutes  not  only  a 
remarkable  bond  of  union  between  the  two  halves,  but 
also  remarkable  evidence  to  the  unity  of  their  author- 
shii^.  The  same  is  true  in  resi)ect  to  Isaiah's  Mes- 
sianic conception  and  prediction.  It  is  a  progressively 
and  indivisibly  developed  unit.  Thus,  e.  g.  the  devel- 
opment of  the  twofold  Messianic  figure  of  a  plant  and 
a  child.  Again  the  development  of  the  threefold  offiqe 
of  the  Messiah,  kingly,  prophetical  and  priestly.  And 
again  the  marvelous  prophetico-historical  development 
of  the  life  and  works  of  the  Messiah  between  first 
advent  and  last  judgment. 

4.  'J'he  argument  for  a  deutero-Isaiah  from  the  his- 
toric function  of  prophecy  is  not  only  contrary  to  the 
spirit  and  analogy  of  prophecy,  but  is  an  argument 
that  proves  too  much.  The  position  is  that  the  author 
of  Isa.  Chs.  40-60  lived  and  wrote  in  the  last  decenium 
of  the  exile;  that  he  describes  historically  as  past  the 
times  and  experiences  of  the  exiles ;  that  there  is  no 
prediction  of  the  exile;  that  the  exile  is  presupposed, 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  151 

and  only  the  release  from  it  is  predicted.  But  this 
position  is  eontrar.y,  indeed  subversive  of  the  spirit 
and  analogy  of  prophecy.  For  not  only  do  others  of 
the  prophets,  but  Isaiah  the  son  of  Amoz  himself,  throws 
himself  forward  by  the  spirit  of  prophecy  into  the 
future,  and  from  that  prophetico-historical  standpoint 
describes  events  as  past,  as  historically  having  taken 
place,  which  in  reality  are  as  yet  future.  Thus,  e.  g. 
5:13-15;  9:1-6;  28:1,  U,  etc.,  compare  Micah 
7:7-20,  etc.  So  Isaiah  describes  not  only  the  exile, 
but  also  the  release  from  the  exile.  If  it  be  granted 
that  a  prophet  may  divinely  foreknow  and  foretell, 
there  is  then  not  a  single  statement  in  the  dentero- 
Isaiah  tliat  might  not  be  the  work  of  a  prophet  who 
knew  that  the  exile  and  the  release  from  the  exile  nnist 
take  place.  Besides,  the  above  position  and  argument 
proves  too  much ;  for  then  portions  of  the  proto-Isaiah 
must  have  been  written  after  the  restoration  from 
Babylon,  and  Isa.  Ch.  do  must  have  been  written  after 
the  sufferings,  crucifixion  and  the  burial  of  Christ. 

5.  The  argument  for  a  deutero-Isaiah  from  differ- 
ence in  language,  literary  style  and  character,  not  only 
cannot  be  but  is  not  pressed.  The  marvel  the  rather 
is  that  the  difference  is  so  slight  considering  the  vast 
historical  scope,  and  diversified  prophetical  teachings 
of  the  prophet.  The  day  is  past  when  such  slight 
differences  of  style  as  seemingly  exist  between  the 
proto-  and  deutero-Isaiah  can  be  alleged  to  be  incom- 
patible with  unity  of  authorship.  There  is  nothing  in 
the  contents  of  the  so-called  deutero-Isaiah  that  may 
not  have  been  written  by  Isaiah  the  son  of  Amoz. 
AVhat  seem  to  be  difficulties  in  style  are  only  natural 
and  necessary  to  a  difference  in  time,  subject,  treat- 


152  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

ment  or  environment.  But  examining  it  more  closely, 
the  argument  from  language  is  strictly  an  argument 
that  strongly  confirms  the  unity  of  the  Book,  and  its 
authorship  by  the  son  of  Amoz.  There  is  a  consider- 
able number  of  linguistic  peculiarities,  Isaianisms, 
and  these  are  common  alike  to  the  first  and  last  parts 
of  the  Book. 

6.  Many  passages  in  the  so-called  deutero-Isaiah 
would  be,  to  say  the  least,  utterly  inconsistent  and 
meaningless,  if  treated  as  having  been  written  at  any 
time  during  the  exile ;  e.  g.  40 :  9 ;  43 :  22-24 ;  56  : 4-7  ; 
58:6;  62:6;  66:3,  4,  6,  etc. 

7.  There  is  one  other  thing  especially  to  be  marked; 
a  most  remarkable  argument  passing  all  through,  par- 
ticularly the  so-called  deutero-Isaiah.  It  is  an  argu- 
ment, the  one  supreme  argument  that  God  uses  to  prove 
that  he  alone  is  the  true  God;  the  one  supreme  ar- 
gument that  Isaiah  uses  to  prove  that  he  is  God's 
prophet,  and  his  words  God's  truth.  The  course  of  this 
argument  may  in  part  be  traced  in  these  passages, — 
41:21-28;  42:9;  43:8-10;  45:20,  21;  46:  6-10;  48: 
3-16,  etc.  The  argument  is  this; — God  represents  him- 
self as  announcing  events  before  they  come  to  pass  as  a 
proof  that  he  alone  is  the  true  God ;  and  the  same  argu- 
ment Isaiah  uses  to  prove  that  he  is  God's  prophet,  and 
his  words  are  God's  truth.  Now  it  is  precisely  this  ar- 
gument that  this  rationalistic  criticism  proposes  to  make 
void,  to  make  of  none  efi'ect,  in  its  attempt  to  show  that 
the  second  half  of  Isaiah  was  written  in  the  last  de- 
cenium  of  the-exile.  It  is  very  evident  from  the  above 
passages  that  the  prophet  regarded  himself  as  revealing 
the  future,  and  not  simply  describing  what  was  before 
the  eyes  of  all. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  153 

VI.  Divisions  and  Contents.— In  brief  the  Prophecj" 
of  Isaiah  may  be  divided,  and  its  contents  indicated, 
upon  the  basis  of  six  parts  or  Books,  as  follows: — 

1.  Chs.  1-6.  The  Book  of  Introdiictions.  Contains 
superscriptions,  credentials  of  the  Prophet,  and  pro- 
phetic statements  of  judijment  and  salvation  toward 
Israel;  as  follows:  a.  Ch.  1.  Sets  forth  the  thought- 
lessness, hypocrisy,  and  wickedness  of  the  Jews,  and 
the  destruction  of  their  cities  and  desolation  of  their 
country.  Probably  written  in  the  reign  of  Hezekiah 
after  Sennacherib's  invasion,  h.  Chs.  2-4.  Contain 
threateuings  of  God's  judgments  upon  the  people  of 
Judah  for  idolatry,  wickedness,  and  pride,  together  with 
a  promise  of  future  blessedness.  Probably  written  in 
the  reign  of  Jotham.  c.  Ch.  5,  Parable  of  the  vine- 
yard, addressed  to  Judah  and  Jerusalem,  respecting 
Judah  and  Israel,  ending  with  a  denunciation  of  divine 
judgments  upon  the  wicked.  Probably  belongs  to  the 
time  of  Jotham.  d.  Ch.  6.  Isaiah's  call  to  the  pro- 
phetic office  in  the  last  year  of  Uzziah. 

2.  Chs.  7-10.  The  Book  of  Immanueh  In  Ch.  7, 
against  the  confederated  forces  of  Syria  and  Israel, 
Isaiah  gives  Ahaz  the  sign  of  Immanuel,  and  announces 
the  impending  judgments  of  God  from  the  hands  of  the 
Assyrians.  In  Chs.  8 : 1-9  :  10  there  is  a  prediction  of 
the  overthrow  of  Damascus  and  Samaria  by  the  Assyr- 
ians, an  appeal  to  trust  in  God,  and  a  prediction  of  the 
Messiah's  Kingdom.  This  prophecy  probably  belongs 
to  the  time  of  Ahaz.  In  Chas.  9:8-10:4  there  is  a 
prophecy  relative  to  the  destruction  of  Israel,  probably 
delivered  in  the  latter  part  of  the  reign  of  Ahaz.  In 
Ch.   10:5-34  there  is  a  prediction  of  the  invasion  of 


154  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Judah  1)3^  the  King  of  Assyria,  which  was  probably 
littered  in  the  last  part  of  the  reign  of  Ahaz. 

Chs.  II,  12  constitute  a  concluding  statement  to  Chs. 
7-10.  They  predict  the  appearance  of  the  Messiah 
from  the  stem  of  Jesse,  set  forth  the  Messianic  .salva- 
tion, Messiah's  reign  and  the  song  of  the  final  redemp- 
tion. 

3.  Chs.  18-2)1  The  Book  of  Oracles  (concerning 
the  nations).  This  division  or  Book  contains  prophe- 
cies directed  against  foreign  natiims;  fi'e.,  a.  Chs.  13: 
1-14:23.  Against  Babylon,  h.  Ch.  14:24-27.  Against 
Assyria,  c.  Ch.  14:28-32.  Against  the  Philistines. 
Last  year  of  Ahaz.  d.  Chs.  15,  10.  Against  Moab. 
e.  Ch.  17:1-11.  Against  Damascus  and  Samaria. 
Time  of  Hezekiah.  /.  Ch.  17:12-14.  Against  ene- 
mies of  Judah,  probably  the  Assyrians.  Time  of 
Hezekiah.  g.  Ch.  18.  Against  Ethiopia.  Time  of 
Hezekiah.  h.  Ch.  19.  Against  Egypt.  Time  of  Hez- 
ekiah. /'.  Ch.  20.  Relates  a  symbolic  action  performed 
b}'  Isaiah  in  the  time  of  Sargon,  King  of  Assyria, 
accompanied  with  a  prophecy  that  the  King  of  Assyria 
would  lead  captive  the  Egyptians  and  Ethiopians. 
Time  of  Hezekiah.  j.  Ch.  21 :  1-10.  Against  Babylon. 
k.  Ch.  21:11,  12.  Dumah  in  Arabia.  /.  Ch.  21:13- 
17.  Concerning  Arabia,  m.  Ch.  22:1-14.  J^rophecy 
of  the  invasion  of  Judah  by  Sennacherib  in  the  four- 
teenth year  of  Hezekiah's  reign,  and  delivered  shortly 
before  the  event,  n.  Ch.  22:15-10.  Against  Shebna, 
treasurer  in  the  middle  of  Hezekiah's  reign,  o.  Ch 
22:20-25c  Prediction  as  to  Eliakim  who  is  to  replace 
Shebna.     p.   Ch.  23.     Against  Tyre. 

Chs.  24-27  constitute  a  concluding  statement  related 
to  Chs.  13-23,  as  Chs.  11,  12  were  to  Chs.  7-10.     This 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  155 

coiicliKliiig  Statement,  Chs.  24-27,  sets  forth  the  .judg- 
ment of  the  earth,  the  luimiliation  of  :Moab,  the  salva- 
tion of  the  nations,  and  the  redemption  and  resurrec- 
tion of  Israel. 

4.  Chs.  28-33.  The  Book  of  Woes.  These  prophe- 
cies belong  to  the  period  from  the  sixth  to  the  fourteenth 
year  of  Hezekiah.  They  treat  of  the  Assyrian  invasion, 
and  are  prophecies  uttered  against:  a.  Ch.  2(S.  Eph- 
raim  and  Jerusalem,  whose  vices  are  rebuked,  and 
judgment  threatened.  h.  Ch.  20.  Against  Ariel 
(Jerusalem),  followed  by  tlie  promise  of  returning  hap- 
piness, c.  Chs.  30,  31.  Against  those  who  look  to 
Egypt  for  help  against  the  Assyrians,  with  a  promise 
of  future  prosperity,  d.  Chs.  32,  33.  Variously  ap- 
plied judgments  and  promises. 

Chs.  34,  35  constitute  a  concluding  statement  related 
to  Chs.  28-33  as  Chs.  24-2?  are  to  Chs.  13-23.  These 
Chs.  34,  35  set  forth  the  judgment  (Ch.  34=')  upon  all 
nations  of  the  world,  especially  (Ch.  34*^)  Edom,  and 
the  redemption  (Ch.  35)  of  Jehovah's  people. 

5.  Chs.  36-39.      The  Book  of  Histories  :  including 
a.   Chs.  36,  37.     The  double  demand  made  by  Sen- 
nacherib for  the  surrender  of  Jerusalem,  and  the  mira- 
cle of  its  deliverance. 

h.  Ch.  38.  The  illness  of  Hezekiah,  and  the  promise 
of  his  recovery. 

c.   Ch.  39.     The  prediction  of  the  Babylonian  exile. 

6.  Chs.  40-66.  The  Book  of  Redemption  :  includ- 
ing 

a.  Chs.  40-48.  The  certainty  of  the  coming  redemp- 
tion from  Babylon. 

h.  Chs.  49-57.  The  work  and  experiences  prepara- 
tory to  the  coming  redemption. 


156  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

c.   Chs.  58-66.     The  conditions  of    participation  in 
the  coming  redemption. 

VII.  Theology— Isaiah  is  the  theologian  preemi- 
nent. His  theology  is  all-embracing.  Still  even  the 
theology  of  Isaiah  has  its  distinguishing  characteristics; 
that  is,  aspects,  doctrines,  attributes  that  the  times  of 
Isaiah  required  should  be  especially  emphasized.  It 
was  in  that  vision  of  Jehovah's  glory  wherein  were 
especially  revealed  the  supreme  attributes  of  Majesty 
and  Holiness  that  Isaiah  received  his  prophetic  call. 
These  attributes  of  the  divine  character  are  therefore 
distinguishing  features  in  his  theology,  in  his  concep- 
tion of  God.  And  they  were  so  in  great  measure 
because  the  times  required  that  these  supreme  attri- 
butes of  Jehovah's  majesty  and  holiness  should  receive 
most  impressive  emphasis.  Luxury,  independence,  in- 
justice, scepticism,  idolatry,  contempt  for  the  rights  of 
the  poor,  and  an  insolent  defiance  of  the  supreme 
majesty  of  Jehovah  of  hosts,— this  was  the  proud  spirit 
of  the  times,  a  spirit  that  had  to  be  humbled  before  the 
awful  manifestations  of  Jehovah's  majesty.  And  even 
more  strongly  does  Isaiah  emphasize  Jehovah's  holi- 
ness. With  Isaiah  as  with  his  contemporaries  Amos 
and  Hosea,  holiness  is  the  essential  characteristic  of 
Deity.  This  holiness  is  not  simply  negative  but  posi- 
tive, refers  not  alone  to  the  passive  attributes,  but 
especially  to  all  the  activities  of  the  Divine  Being. 
Jehovah  is  separated,  is  essentially  deity,  that  is,  is 
holy,  primarily  and  chiefly  in  that  which  he  does,  in 
the  character  of  his  works.  Precisely  this  Israel  was 
to  be,  and  precisely  this  Israel  was  not.  Hence  Isaiah's 
theology  emphasizes  holiness;  that  holiness  which  was 
in  Him  who  required  holiness  in  his;  that  holiness  which 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  157 

rendered  Him  peculiarly  the  "  Holy  One  of  Israel" ;  the 
holiness  of  the  Seraphim's  song.   6 :  3. 

VIII.  Messianic— Isaiah  is  also  preeminently  the 
Messianic  Prophet.  The  life  of  the  Messiah  from  be- 
ginning to  ending;  the  offices  of  the  Messiah,  propheti- 
cal, priestly  and  kingly ;  the  work  of  the  Messiah  from 
its  inception  to  its  consummation  in  the  redemption  of 
the  whole  earth  in  the  last  days, — are  set  forth  with 
marvelous  minuteness  and  power.  The  more  especial 
Messianic  sections  are 

1.  Isa.  2:2-4.     The  Final  Messianic  Period. 

2.  Isa.  4:  2-6.     The  Sprout  of  Jehovah. 

3.  Isa.  Ch.  7.     Immanuel. 

4.  Isa.  8 :  23-9 :  6.     The  Prince  of  Peace. 

5.  Isa.  Chs.  11,  12.     The  Shoot  of  Jesse. 

6.  Isa.  19 :  16-25.    Egypt,  Assyria  and  Israel  United. 

7.  Isa.  28 :  14-18.     The  Corner-Stone  of  Zion. 

8.  Isa.  33 :  13-24.     Zion  the  City  of  the  Great  King. 

9.  Isa.  Ch.  35.     The  Blessed  Time  Coming. 

10.  Isa.  42:1-9.     The  Chosen  Servant  of  Jehovah. 

11.  Isa.  49:1-9.  The  Calling  of  the  Servant  of 
Jehovah. 

12.  Isa.  50:4-11.  The  Mission  of  the  Servant  of 
Jehovah. 

13.  Isa.  52:13-53:12.  The  Suffering  and  Saving 
Servant  of  Jehovah. 

14.  Isa.  55:  1-5.  The  Invitation  of  the  Covenant  of 
Redemption. 

15.  Isa.  61 : 1-3.  The  Glorious  Words  and  Works  of 
the  Servant  of  Jehovah. 


158  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


JEREMIAH. 

I.  ^smie.—  Yermeyahu  =  Jeremiah  =  Jehovah  raises 
up. 

II.  Biography.— Jeremiah  who  flourished  in  the 
Chaldean  and  Exilian  period,  belonged  to  the  Kingdom 
of  Judah.  See  Table  of  Prophets.  Jeremiah  was  born 
at  Anathoth,  a  small  town  in  the  territor^^  of  Benjamin, 
about  three  miles  northeast  of  Jerusalem.  Jeremiah 
was  of  priestly  descent.  He  received  his  call  to  the 
prophetic  ministry  when  yet  a  very  young  man,  and 
served  in  it  for  something  over  forty  years.  It  would 
seem  that  he  was  never  married.  The  early  part  of  his 
life,  and  the  earlier  scene  of  a  brief  prophetic  ministry 
was  spent  in  his  native  town  of  Anathoth.  The  main 
scene  of  his  ministry,  and  therefore  life,  w^as  Jerusa- 
lem. The  closing  scene  of  his  prophetic  ministry  was 
Egypt.  In  the  time  of  Zedekiah  he  was  imprisoned 
and  cast  into  a  miry  dungeon,  from  which  he  was  lib- 
erated by  order  of  the  king,  though  still  confined  to 
the  court  of  the  prison.  Indeed  the  life  of  the  prophet 
was  spent  during  the  most  troublous  times  of  the 
Jewish  State,  i.  e.  during  the  reigns  of  the  last  kings 
of  Judah. 

III.  Ministry.— Jeremiah  was  called  to  the  prophetic 
ministry  in  the  thirteenth  year  of  the  reign  of  King 
Josiah.  He  continued  in  this  ministry  until  the  time 
of  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  by  the  Chaldeans,  and 
even  later.  He  prophesied  under  the  reigns  of  Josiah, 
Jehoahaz,  Jehoiakim,  Jehoiachin  and  Zedekiah. 
During  all  this  time  Jeremiah  took  a  most  active  and 
effective  part,  in  matters  both   external  and  internal, 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  159 

relative  to  the  fate  of  his  people  and  the  attitude  of 
surrounding  nations.  Of  these  times  of  the  prophet 
his  Book  affords  not  only  a  graphic,  but  a  more  com- 
plete historical  account  than  does  the  Book  of  any 
other  prophets  of  his  times. 

IV.  Chronolog-y.— The  contemporary  prophets  of 
Jeremiah  were  Zephaniah,  Habakkuk,  Ezekiel  and 
Daniel.     The  principal  events  were  the  following: 

B.  C.  6H9.  Accession  of  .Tosiah.  Reigned  about 
thirt3^-one  years. 

B.  C.  620.     Call  of  Jeremiah. 

B.  C.  609.  Accession  of  Jehoaliaz.  Reigned  three 
months. 

B.  C.  608.  Accession  of  Jehoiakim.  Reigned  eleven 
years. 

B.  C.  ^04.  Victory  of  Nebuchadnezzar  over  Pha- 
raoh Necho  at  Carchemish  on  the  Euphrates. 

B.  C.  597.  Accession  of  Jehoiachin.  Reigned  four 
months. 

B.  C.  597.  First  siege  of  Jerusalem,  and  deportation 
of  Jewish  exiles. 

B.  C.  596.  Accession  of  Zedekiah.  Reigned  ten 
years. 

B.  C.  586.  Destruction  of  Jerusalem  by  the  Chal- 
deans, and  second  deportation  of  Jewish  exiles. 

V.  Genuineness.— The  genuineness  of  the  prophe- 
cies of  Jeremiah  has  been  generally  admitted.  It  is 
difficult  to  see  how  it  could  be  otherwise,  inasmuch  as 
these  prophecies  are  so  interwoven  with  the  events  of 
Jeremiah's  life,  and  bear  so  strongly  the  stamp  of  Jere- 
miah's age.  Consequentl}^  only  a  comparatively^  lim- 
ited number  of  isolated  passages  or  small  sections  have 
ever  been  called  into  serious  question,  and  these  have 


160  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

been  questioned  on  insufficient  grounds.  In  a  number 
of  instances  passages  are  found  in  the  Hebrew  text 
that  are  wanting  or  omitted  in  the  LXX.  But  the 
mere  fact  that  these  verses  are  wanting  in  the  LXX 
furnishes  no  sufficient  proof  that  they  were  wanting  in 
the  Hebrew  text  before  the  time  of  Christ ;  and  cer- 
tainly furnishes  no  sufficient  reason  for  their  being 
rejected  from  the  text.  Examined  in  the  light  of  the 
context  these  passages  omitted  by  the  LXX  are  ail  of 
them  well  connected,  and  suitable  to  the  occasion; 
while  on  the  other  hand  it  is  well  known  that  tlie 
LXX,  not  infrequently,  took  liberties  with  the  text. 
A  few  other  sections  in  the  prophecies  of  Jeremiah  are 
supposed  by  some  critics  to  have  been  written  or 
rather  revised  by  a  later  writer,  the  Deutero-Isaiah, 
inasmuch  as  they  are  in  his  style;  thus  notably,  e.  g. 
Chs.  30,  31,  33.  But  what  possible  object  the^eutero- 
Isaiah  could  have  had  in  retouching  portions  of  Jere- 
miah to  make  these  bear  his  style,  is  difficult  to  see. 
True,  there  are  a  number  of  passages  in  Jeremiah  that 
strongly  resemble  Isaiah;  but  compaiing  these  pas- 
sages, and  comparing  the  styles  of  Jeremiah  and 
Isaiah,  it  becomes  manifest  that  these  passages  are 
original  in  Isaiah.  The  most  natural  conclusion  then 
is  that  Jeremiah  used  or  imitated  Isaiah.  The  last 
chapter  of  Jeremiah,  i.  e.  Ch.  52,  constitutes  an  his- 
torical appendix  which  describes  the  reign  of  Zedekiah, 
the  capture  of  Jerusalem  and  the  events  connected 
with  it,  and  the  deliverance  of  Jehoiachin  from  impris- 
onment in  Babylon.  This  chapter  was  probably  writ- 
ten by  another  and  later  writer  than  Jeremiah,  in  view 
of  the  words  with  which  the  preceding  chapter,  Ch. 
51,  closes,  viz.  "  Thus  far  are  the  words  of  Jeremiah." 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  161 

The  Book  of  Jeremiah  does  not  present  the  prophecies 
of  Jeremiah  in  the  precise  chronological  order  in  which 
they  were  delivered ;  although  the  disorder  is  by  no 
means  great  in  the  arrangement  of  the  proj)hecies  and 
the  events.  The  chronological  order  is  perhaps  more 
nearlj^  as  follows: 

Reign  of  Josiah, — Chs.  1-17. 

Reign  of  Jehoiakim,— Chs.  18,  19,  20 ;  21 :  11-22  :  19 ; 
25,  35,  36,  45,  46. 

Reign  of  Jehoiachin, — Chs.  22  :  20-23  :  40. 

Reign  of  Zedekiah,— Chs.  21:1-10;  24,  27-34,  37, 
38,  39. 

Chs.  40-44.  Events  after  the  capture  of  Jerusalem, 
and  Jeremiah's  migration  to  Egypt. 

Chs.  46-51.  The  prophecies  respecting  foreign  na- 
tions, having  no  special  relation  to  the  events  of  his 
time,  are  placed  at  the  end. 

Ch.  52.     Appendix  by  a  later  hand. 

VI.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  Book  divides  it- 
self into  two  principal  parts,  according  as  the  prophe- 
cies relate  to  the  prophet's  own  nation,  or  to  foreign 
nations,  as  follows : 

I.  Chs.  1-45.  Prophecies  relating  to  the  prophet's 
own  nation,  including 

1.  Ch.  1.     The  call  of  the  Prophet. 

2.  Chs.  2-10.  Rebukes,  warnings  and  promises  in 
the  times  of  Josiah. 

3.  Chs.  11-20.  Rebukes,  warnings  and  promises  in 
the  times  of  Josiah,  Jehoiakim  and  Jehoiachin. 

4.  Chs.  21-24.  Rebukes,  warnings  and  promises  in 
the  times  of  Jehoiachin  and  Zedekiah. 

5.  Chs.  25-29.     Prophecies  uttered  during  the  reigns 

[lOJ 


162  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

of  Jehoiakim  and  Zedekiah,  placed  together  on  account 
of  similarity  of  subject-matter,  and  treating  of  the 
overthrow  of  Jerusalem,  and  the  servitude  of  the 
Chaldeans  for  seventy  years.-  This  section  is  intro- 
duced by  the  announcement  of  the  judgment  upon  all 
nations  in  the  fourth  year  of  Jehoiakim. 

6.  Chs.  30-33.  Prophecies  belonging  to  the  latter 
part  of  Zedekiah's  reign,  and  making  announcements 
of  salvation  in  reference  to  the  future  redemption  and 
glorification  of  Israel. 

7.  Chs.  34-39.  Prophecies  and  narratives  belong- 
ing to  the  times  of  Jehoiakim  and  Zedekiah. 

8.  Chs.  40-45.  Historical  narratives  treating  of  the 
life  and  conduct  of  the  Prophet  among  the  people 
left  in  the  land  by  the  Chaldeans  after  the  destruction 
of  Jerusalem,  both  prior  to  and  after  their  flight  into 
Egypt. 

II.  Chs.  46-52.  Prophecies  against  foreign  nations, 
vis.  — 

1.  Ch.  40.     Against  Egypt. 

2.  Ch.  47.     Against  the  Philistines. 

3.  Ch.  48.     Against  Moab. 

4.  Ch.  49:1-6.     Against  Ammon. 

5.  Ch.  49:7-22.     Against  Edom. 

G.   Ch.  49:23-27.     Against  Damascus. 

7.  Ch.  49:  28-33.     Against  Kedar  and  Hazor. 

8.  Ch.  49  :  34-39.     Against  Elam. 

9.  Chs.  50,  51.     Against  Bab3don. 
10.   Ch.  52.     Historical  appendix. 

VII.  Theolog-y.— The  distinguishing  doctrine  in  Jere- 
miah's theology,  the  distinguishing  characteristic  in  his 
conception  of  God  is  that  of  Love, — Jehovah's  love. 
But  this  implies  also  the  reverse,  viz.  jealousy,  wrath. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  163 

Hence  associated  with  Jeremiah's  preaching  setting 
forth  the  tenderness  and  infiniteness  of  that  love,  we 
find  also  awful  rebukes,  warnings,  threatenings  of 
judgment  directed  to  and  against  those  who  had  out- 
raged that  love.  Like  Amos  and  Hosea,  Jeremiah  bases 
his  theology  and  preaching  on  the  relation  of  Jehovah 
to  Israel.  Jehovah  had  chosen  Israel,  entered  into 
covenant  with  Israel,  brought  them  out  of  Egypt,  led 
them  through  the  wilderness,  and  ever  educated,  de- 
livered and  blest  them  with  infinite  and  almighty  love. 
Especially  is  Jeremiah  the  counterpart  of  his  earlier  co- 
prophet  in  the  Kingdom  of  Israel,  Hosea.  Like  Hosea, 
Jeremiah  uses  the  figures  of  marriage  and  sonship  to 
describe  the  intimacy  and  intensity  of  the  relationship 
between  Jehovah  and  Israel,  and  the  duties  implied  in 
that  relationship.  This  relationship  Israel  had  out- 
rageously violated.  The  particular  sins  of  which  Israel 
was  guilt}^  are  specified  as  idolatry,  scepticism,  immor- 
ality, formalism,  self-confidence,  obduracy,  moral  de- 
generac}' .  On  account  of  these  Israel  receives  rebukes, 
warnings,  calls  to  repentance,  threatenings  of  judg- 
ment, inflictions  of  chastisements,  and  all  these  all  the 
more  terrible  because  they  proceed  from  outraged  di- 
vine love, — "The  Wrath  of  the  Lamb.''  But  from 
this  sinful  and  desperate  present,  Jeremiah  turns  to  a 
more  hopeful  future,  and  to  utter  promises  of  consola- 
tion and  restoration.  The  fullest  of  these  promises  are 
collected  in  Chs.  30-33,  called  the  "  Book  of  Comfort." 
These  promises  set  forth  first  of  all  one  of  Jeremiah's 
favorite  doctrines,  viz.  the  indestructibility  of  Israel. 
The  judgment  which  must  be  infiicted  is  designed  for 
correction,  not  annihilation.  Hence  while  the  nation 
must  go  into  captivity,  it  must   also  through  the  ten- 


164  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

derness  and  eternity  of  Jehovah's  love  be  restored  from 
captivity.  With  the  restored  people  Jehovah  will  make 
a  New  Covenant,  a  covenant  written  not  on  tables  of 
stones,  but  the  tables  of  the  heart, — an  inward,  spirit- 
ual, everlasting  covenant  of  pardon  and  grace.  Jere- 
miah also  emphasizes  the  doctrines  of  personal  respon- 
sibility, spirituality  of  religion,  while  he  describes  the 
spirituality  and  glory  of  the  coming  Messianic  age 
when,  instead  of  the  ark,  Jehovah  himself  shall  come 
and  dwell  in  the  midst  of  his  people. 

VIII.  Messianic— Jeremiah's  view  of  the  Messianic 
King  and  Kingdom  is  perhaps  less  magnificent  and  com- 
prehensive than  Isaiah's,  but  none  the  less  spiritual. 
In  that  day  of  the  true  and  final  restoration  of  Israel 
from  all  the  lands  of  the  diaspora,  there  shall  be  raised 
up  unto  David  a  righteous  Branch,  who  shall  reign  as 
King,  administer  justice,  save  Israel,  and  be  called 
Jehovah  our  Righteousness.  This  King  is  styled 
David.  Not  that  Jeremiah  expected  David  to  return 
in  person,  but,  like  Hosea,  he  looked  for  one  of  the 
line  of  David  who  should  fulfil  the  divine  ideal.  This 
King  should  have  priestly  power.  He  should  be  the 
righteousness  of  his  people.  He  should  thus  reign  a 
righteous  King  over  a  righteous  people.  And  ran- 
somed Zion  should  once  more  be  the  wonder  of  all  the 
nations  of  the  earth.     The  Messianic  sections  are 

1.  Jer3:14-18.     Jerusalem  Jehovah's  Throne. 

2.  Jer.  23:1-8.     Jehovah  our  Righteousness. 

3.  Jer.  33 :  14-26.     Jehovah  our  Righteousness. 

4.  Jer.  Chs.  30,  31.     The  Book  of  Comfort. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  165 


THE   LAMENTATIONS   OF 
JEREMIAH. 

I.  Name.— ^iTia/i  =  How  ?  The  Book  is  so  called 
in  the  Hebrew  Bible  from  its  opening  word.  In  the 
LXX,  Peshito-S3'riac  and  Vulgate  it  is  called  the 
Lamentations  of  Jeremiah,  or  simply  Lamentations, 
whence  the  English  name. 

II.  Position.— Being  poetical,  the  Book  in  the  He- 
brew Bible  stands  in  the  Hagiographa  just  before 
the  Book  of  Ecclesiastes.  The  Peshito-Sja-iac  and 
Vulgate  place  the  Book  immediately  after  the  Book 
of  the  Prophet  Jeremiah,  from  which,  in  the  LXX, 
it  is  separated  by  the  Book  of  Baruch.  The  A.  V. 
also  puts  it  after  the  Prophecy  of  Jeremiah,  it  being 
connected  therewith  by  unity  of  authorship,  and  unity 
in  historical  matter. 

III.  Theme.— The  Book  of  Lamentations  is  an  elegy, 
a  dirge,  written  over  the  desolation  of  Jerusalem.  It 
has  for  its  theme  the  calamities  that  befell  the  people 
of  Judah  and  Jerusalem  in  consequence  of  the  siege 
and  capture  of  Jerusalem  by  the  Chaldeans. 

IV.  Structure.— The  Book  of  Lamentations  has  a 
remarkably  executed  alphabetical  arrangement.  In 
the  first  four  chapters  the  verses  are  arranged 
alphabetically^  In  the  first  and  second  chapters  each 
verse  consists  of  three  members,  and  the  verses  begii 
severally  with  the  successive  letters  cf  the  Hebre^r 
alphabet.  In  the  third  chapter  the  verses  consist  of 
single   members,  and   three    verses,  each   having  the 


166  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

same  initial  letter,  are  assigned  to  each  successive 
letter  of  the  alphabet,  so  that  the  chapter  contains  in 
all  sixty-six  verses.  The  fourth  chapter  is  similar  in 
structure  to  the  first,  except  that  each  verse  has  two 
members  onlj-.  The  fifth  and  last  chapter  is  not 
alphabetical,  but  consists  nevertheless  of  twenty-two 
verses,  each  formed  by  two  somewhat  short  members. 
V.  Authorship— Date. —There  is  no  statement  in 
the  Old  Testament  as  to  the  authorship  of  the  Lamen- 
tations. The  LXX,  the  Vulgate  and  the  most  ancient 
Jewish  traditions  ascribe  the  Book  to  the  Prophet 
Jeremiah.  The  evidences  furnished  by  the  Book  itself 
confirm  rather  than  disprove  the  traditions;  for 

1.  The  same  spirit,  deeply  sympathetic  in  national 
sorrow,  and  ever  ready  to  give  unrestrained  utterance 
to  its  emotions,  manifests  itself  strongly  both  in  the 
Lamentations  and  in  Jeremiah. 

2.  In  the  Lamentations  the  national  calamities  are 
referred  to  the  same  causes  as  in  Jeremiah ;  e.  g.  the 
national  sins,  the  guilt  of  prophets  and  priests,  the 
people's  false  confidence  in  the  help  of  weak  and 
treacherous  allies,  etc. 

3.  Similar  representations  and  figures  occur  in  both 
Lamentations  and  Jeremiah ;  e.  g.  as  to  the  virgin 
daughter  of  Zion,  the  prophet's  eyes  flowing  with  tears, 
the  appeal  for  vengeance  to  the  righteous  Judge,  the 
expectation  that  the  nations  who  exulted  in  the  fall  of 
Jerusalem  would  be  visited  by  a  like  desolation,  etc. 

•Jr.  Many  similarities  of  expression  peculiar  to  the 
Lamentations  and  Jeremiah. 

From  the  vividness  that  characterizes  the  Book,  it 
would  seem  that  it  must  have  been  written  soon  after 
the  events  of  which  it  treats. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  167 

VI.  Divisions  and  Contents.— 1.  Ch.  1.  In  lan- 
guage of  deep  pathos  the  author  describes,  and  gives 
expression  to  his  sorrow  for  the  desolations  and  miseries 
of  Judah  and  Jerusalem  on  account  of  their  sins. 

2.  Ch.  2.  He  emphasizes  the  cause  of  the  country's 
sufferings,  viz.  Jehovah's  just  anger  that  has  cast  off 
his  people,  his  land,  and  his  sanctuar}^ 

o.  Ch.  3.  He  sets  forth  his  own  and  the  ]3eople's 
intense  sufferings,  while  at  the  same  time  he  expresses 
hope  and  confidence  in  God,  in  God's  compassion,  and 
the  purposes  of  grace  which  God  maj'  have  in  this  visi- 
tation. 

4.  Chs.  4,  5.  Zion'spastandpresent  contrasted,  and 
the  praj^er  of  the  nation  for  Jehovah's  compassionate 
regard,  and  restoration  to  divine  favor. 


EZEKIEL. 

I.  Name.— Fe7ie2;/cae^=Ezekiel=God  will  strengthen. 

II.  Biography.— Ezeki el  was  the  son  of  Buzi.  He 
was  one  of  the  captives  who  were  carried  with  Jehoia- 
chin  in  597  B.  C.  into  Babylonia,  and  was  settled  with 
others  at  Tell-abib,  by  the  river  Chebar.  He  was  a 
priest,  and  as  such  belonged  to  the  aristocracy  of  Jeru- 
salem, who  conslituted  the  majority  of  the  first  captivity 
under  Jehoiachin.  He  was  married,  as  mention  is  made 
of  the  death  of  his  wife  in  the  ninth  year  of  the  captiv- 
ity. Ch.  24:18.  He  had  a  house  of  his  own  on  the 
Chebar  in  the  land  of  his  captivity.  Chs.  3:  24;  8:1. 
There  is  no  account  of  his  death. 

III.  Ministry.— Ezekiel  received  his  prophetic  call, 
and  began   his   prophetic  ministry  in  the  fifth  year  of 


168  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Jehoiachin's  captivity,  B.  C.  592.  Ch.  1 :  5.  He  con- 
tinued to  exercise  his  prophetic  ministry  for  at  least 
twenty-two  years,  the  latest  date  in  his  Book  (29:17) 
being  twenty-two  years  after  his  call,  i.  e.  B.  C.  570. 
Whether  he  prophesied  for  a  longer  period  is  not  known. 
Ezekiel  probably  began  his  prophetic  ministry  in  the 
thirtieth  year  of  his  age.  Ch.  1:1.  He  exercised  his 
prophetic  ministry  among  the  Jews  who  had  been 
brought  from  Jndea,  in  the  captivity  of  Jehoiachin,  by 
Nebuchadnezzar,  King  of  Babylon,  and  dispersed  in 
different  parts  of  his  dominions.  This  deportation  in 
the  reign  of  Jehoiachin  was  the  second  deportation  of 
exiles.  A  colon}^  of  exiles  had  located  near  the  river 
Chebar,  either  a  tributary  of  the  Euphrates,  or  one  of 
the  great  canals  constructed  by  Nebuchadnezzar.  Ezek- 
iel was  dwelling  in  the  midst  of  this  colony  of  exiles, 
when,  in  the  fifth  year  of  the  captivity  of  Jehoiachin, 
the  heavens  were  opened  to  him,  and  he  saw  visions  of 
God,  and  the  divine  word  was  communicated  to  him. 

IV.  Aiitliorsliip— Date.— The  genuineness  of  the 
Book  of  Ezekiel  is  admitted  by  all  critics,  with  scarcely 
an  exception.  The  Book  throughout  is  uniform,  closely 
connected,  w^hile  the  contents  furnish  abundant  evi- 
dences of  the  prophet's  age  and  authorship.  Driver 
remarks, — "  The  dates  of  the  several  prophecies  are  in 
many  cases  stated  with  precision.  No  critical  question 
arises  in  connection  with  the  authorship  of  the  Book, 
the  whole  from  beginniiig  to  end  bearing  unmistakably 
the  stamp  of  a  single  mind." 

V.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  prophecies  of  Eze- 
kiel were  delivered  partly  before  and  partly  after  the 
destruction  of  Jerusalem  by  Nebuchadnezzar.  This 
fall  of  Jerusalem  constitutes  their  central  point.     Before 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  169 

this  calamity  EzekieFs  chief  object  was  to  call  to  repent- 
ance those  who  were  living  in  careless  security;  to 
warn  them  against  indulging  in  the  false  hope  that,  hj 
the  help  of  the  Egyptians,  the  Babylonian  yoke  would 
be  shaken  off  (17: 15,  17) ;  and  to  assure  them  that  the 
destruction  of  Jerusalem  was  inevitable  and  rapidly 
approaching.  After  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  Eze- 
kiel's  chief  object  was  to  comfort  the  exiled  Jews  by 
promises  of  future  deliverance  and  restoration  to  their 
own  land.  Between  the  call  to  repentance  in  the  first 
part,  and  the  comfort  given  by  the  promises  in  the  last 
part,  there  occur  the  prophecies  relative  to  foreign  na- 
tions in  the  middle  part  of  the  Book.  The  Book  there- 
fore falls  into  three  principal  divisions,  viz  : 

1.  Chs.  1-24.  The  call  to  repentance,  and  the  ap- 
proaching fall  of  Jerusalem. 

2.  Chs.  25-32.     Prophecies  on  foreign  nations. 

3.  Chs.  33-48.     Israel's  future  restoration. 

The  contents  of  the  Book  may  be  brietly  indicated  as 
follows : 

1.  Chs.  1-3.  Ezekiel's  call  and  commission  to  be 
Prophet  stated  both  in  literal  and  symbolic  form. 

2.  Chs.  4,  5.  The  impending  destruction  of  Jerusa- 
lem portrayed  symbolically;  and  closing  with  an  expo- 
sition, in  unmetaphorical  language,  of  Jerusalem's  guilt 
and  imminent  judgment. 

3.  Ch.  6.  Jerusalem  and  Judah  alike  guilty  of  idol- 
atry that  can  only  be  eradicated  by  the  desolation  and 
depopulation  of  their  territorj'. 

4.  Ch.  7.  A  final  denunciation  of  the  kingdom,  and 
the  certainty  of  the  coming  disaster. 

5.  Chs.  8-11.     Vision  of  the  guilt  and  punishment  of 


l'^^>  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Jerusalem.     Sixth  year  of  the  exile  of  Jehoiachin  =  51)1 
B.  C. 

6.  Chs.  12-14.  The  certainty  of  the  fall  of  Jerusalem 
further  established.  Its  cause,  the  nation's  sinfulness. 
Only  the  righteous  delivered. 

7.  Chs.  15-17.  Allegories,  showing  from  different 
points  of  view  the  nation's  ripeness  for  judgment,  where- 
in Israel  is  compared  to  a  vine-branch,  to  an  adulteress, 
while  Ch.  1?  setting  forth  lirst  the  result  to  be  expected 
from  Zedekiah's  disloyalty  to  his  Babylonian  masters, 
closes  with  a  prophecy  of  the  restoration  of  the  Davidic 
kingdom  in  the  future. 

8.  Ch.  18.  The  prophet  emphasizes  the  doctrine 
that  every  one  is  rewarded  according  to  his  own 
doings,  as  against  the  complaint  of  the  people  that 
they  were  suffering  for  the  sins  of  their  ancestors. 

9.  Ch.  19.  A  lamentation  on  the  "  princes,"  i.  e. 
the  Jewish  kings,  and  on  the  fall  of  the  kingdom.  Two 
allegories;  in  the  first  the  Davidic  stock  is  compared 
to  a  lioness,  her  two  whelps  being  Jehoahaz  and 
Jehoiachin,  whose  fates  are  described;  and  in  the 
second  it  is  compared  to  a  vine  planted,  now  uprooted, 
its  rods  (Jehoahaz  and  Jehoiachin)  destroyed,  itself 
planted  in  the  wilderness  (  =  the  exiles  with  Jehoia- 
chin), and  fire  going  out  of  the  branches,  destroying 
the  fruit  (  =  the  suicidal  policy  of  Zedekiah). 

10.  Ch.  20.  While  Israel's  idolatry  continues  Jeho- 
vah will  not  hearken,  but  the  purifying  judgments 
must  come. 

11.  Ch.  21.  Jehovah's  sword  drawn  against  Jerus- 
alem. 

12.  Ch.  22.  Jerusalem's  guilt,  not  only  idolatry  but 
moral  corruption  and  extending  to  all  classes. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  l^^l 

13.  Ch.  23.     Under   an  allegory  similar  to   Ch.   16. 
the  prophet  describes  the  past  history  of  Samaria  and 
Jerusalem,    representing'   the   two    kingdoms   by   two 
women,  harlots,   Oholah  and  Oholibah. 

14.  Ch.  24.  The  date  is  the  ninth  year  of  the  exile, 
B.  C.  588,  the  tenth  day  of  the  tenth  month,  being 
the  day  on  which  Jerusalem  was  invested  by  the 
Chaldeans,  2  Ki.  25:1;  Zech.  8:19.  The  chapter 
contains  a  parable  setting  forth  the  siege  of  Jerusalem, 
now  commencing,  and  next  the  final  issue  of  the  siege, 
viz.  the  forced  evacuation  of  Jerusalem  by  its  inhabit- 
ants on  account  of  their  sins.  The  (chapter  closes 
with  an  account  of  the  sudden  death  of  the  Prophet's 
wife,  which  is  made  tlie  medium  of  a  lesson. 

15.  Chs.  25-32.  Prophecies  on  foreign  nations,  viz. 
Amnion,  Moab,  Edom,  the  Philistines,  Tyre,  Sidon, 
and  Egypt. 

16.  Chs.  33-39.  The  restoration  of  the  land  and 
people;  including — a.  Ch.   33.     The  prophet,     h.   Ch. 

34.  The  advent  of  the  Messianic  Kingdom,     c.   Chs. 

35,  36.      The  land.       d.    Ch.    37.     The   people.       e. 
Chs.  38,  39.     Jehovah's  final  triumph  over  the  world. 

17.  Chs.  40-48.  The  constitution  of  the  restored 
Theocracy;  including— a.  Chs.  40-43.  The  Temple. 
h.  Chs.  44-46.  The  Temple  and  the  People,  c.  Chs. 
47-48.  The  land  to  be  occupied  by  the  restored  dias- 
pora.   (Date  twenty-fifth  year  of  the  exile  =  572  B.  C.) 

VI.  Theology.— Ezekiel  emphasizes  in  particular 
the  glory  and  holiness  of  God. 

1.  The  fundamental  doctrine  of  Ezekiel's  theology 
was  the  glory  of  God.  God's  glory  is  the  Old  Testa- 
ment expression  for  the  revealed  Presence  of  God 
among    his   people.     God's  glory    corresponds    to    his 


172  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

name,  and  his  name  is  the  summary  of  his  nature,  so. 
far  as  he  has  revealed  it.     See  1 :  28 ;    3 :  23 ;    8:4;   9 : 
3;  10:4,  18,  19;  43:2-7;  44:4,   etc. 

2.  Jehovah's  name  which  is  the  correlative  of  his 
glory  is  the  basis  and  the  summit  of  everything.  All 
Jehovah's  relation^  and  dealings  with  Israel  have  been 
and  are  and  will  be  for  liis  name's  sake.  They  are  de- 
signed to  manifest  his  one  unchangeable  nature.  See 
20:  9,  14,  22;  36:22,  etc. 

3.  Jehovah  is  holy,  and  will  demonstrate  his  holi- 
ness. His  holiness  is  his  essential  Deity.  It  has  been 
profaned  by  his  people.-  He  will  sanctify  it  again  in 
Isreal  and  among  the  nations.  See  20 :  41 ;  28 :  25  ;  36  : 
23;  38:23,  etc. 

VII.  Messianic— The  Messianic  sections  in  the  Book 
of  Ezekiel  are  as  follows : 

1.  Ezek.  11:14-21.  Jehovah  the  Sanctuary  of  His 
People. 

2.  Ezek.   17:22-24.     The  Cedar  Sprout. 

3.  Ezek.   21:24-27.     The  Rightful  King. 

4.  Ezek.  34:  11-31.     The  Faithful  Shepherd. 

5.  Ezek.   36:22-36.     The  Purification. 

6.  Ezek.   37:7-14.     The  Resurrection. 

7.  Ezek.   37:21-28.     The  Reunion. 

8.  Ezek.   Chs.  38,  39.     The  Judgment  of  God. 

9.  Ezek.  Chs.  40-48.  The  Holy  Land  of  the  Restor- 
ation. 


DANIEL, 


I.  ^anie, —Daniijel  =  Daniel  =  God  my  Judge.  The 
Book  takes  its  name  from  its  author,  Daniel,  who  is  its 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  173 

chief  historical  character,  and  whose  prophecies  it  con- 
tains. 

II.  Biography— Ministry.— Daniel  was  probably 
born  in  Jerusalem.  He  was  of  noble  if  not  of  royal 
birth.  1 :  3.  He  was  carried  away  captive  from  Jeru- 
salem to  Babylon,  at  the  first  invasion  of  Judah  by 
Nebuchadnezzar,  in  the  third  year  of  the  reign  of 
Jehoiakim.  1:1.  The  entire  period  of  his  exile,  which 
terminated  onlj^  with  his  life,  was  spent  at  Babylon 
and  its  vicinity,  where  he  continued  to  occupy  various 
positions  of  honor,  and  to  receive  divine  communica- 
tions. He  lived  and  ministered  during  the  reigns  of 
Nebuchadnezzar  and  his  successors,  and  down  to  the 
third  year  of  Cja^us.  10: 1.  The  time  of  his  death  is 
uncertain. 

III.  Position.— The  Book  of  Daniel  is  written  partly 
in  Hebrew,  partly  in  Chaldee.  In  the  Hebrew  Bible 
the  Book  is  now  included  in  the  Hagiographa.  This, 
however,  has  not  always  been  its  position  in  the 
Hebrew  Bible.  (See  below.)  Its  proper  place  is  as 
in  the  A.  V.,  with  the  Prophets,  after  Ezekiel. 

IV.  Unity.— Eich horn  and  Berthold  ascribed  the 
Book  of  Daniel  to  several  authors.  The  unity  of  the 
Book  is  now  generall}^  conceded,  i.  e.  it  proceeded  from 
a  single  author.  That  this  author,  w^hora  we  take  to  be 
Daniel  himself,  should  in  the  first  part  of  the  Book 
speak  of  himself  in  the  third  person,  and  in  the  rest  of 
the  Book  speak  of  himself  in  the  first  person,  is  per- 
fectly consistent  when  the  nature  of  the  contents  of  the 
Book  is  considered,  for  the  first  part  of  the  Book  is 
historical  while  the  second  part  is  prophetical. 

V.  Genuineness.— About  A.  D.  300,  Porphyry,  a 
pagan  philosopher  belonging  to  the  school  of  the  Neo- 


174  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Platoiiists,  devoted  the  whole  of  the  twelfth  book  of  his 
fifteen  against  Christianity,  in  the  attempt  to  show- 
that  the  Book  of  Daniel  is  spurious,  and  that  it  was 
written  in  the  time  of  Antiochus  Epiphanes,  B.  C.  175- 
164.  After  that  the  genuineness  of  the  Book  was  not 
seriously  assailed  until  in  the  seventeenth  century  b}^ 
Spinoza,  a  Dutch  Jew;  in  the  eighteenth  century  by 
Anthony  Collins,  an  English  Deist;  and  then  followed 
Eichorn,  Bleek,  Ewald,  Hitzig  and  others,  together 
with  some  of  the  critics  of  the  present  da}-  in  the  same 
line.  While  modern  criticism  does  not  altogether  re- 
ject the  Book  of  Daniel  as  spurious,  still  itsauthorsliip 
by  Daniel  is  denied,  while  it  is  supposed  to  have  been 
composed  under  the  persecution  of  Antiochus  Epiph- 
anes, B.  C.  168  or  167.  The  grounds  for  this  view  and 
answers  to  the  same  are 

1.  The  position  of  the  Book  in  the  Jewish  Canon,  not 
among  the  prophets,  but  in  the  Hagiographa,  and  among 
the  latest  in  the  Hagiographa.  But  this  implies  that 
the  arrangement  of  the  Books  in  the  Hebrew  Canon  was 
the  same  when  the  Canon  was  originally  formed  in  the 
time  of  Nehemiah,  as  it  is  now.  This  is  denied.  In 
the  time  of  Josephus,  Origen  and  Jerome,  Daniel  was 
classified  among  the  prophets.  It  was  not  till  about 
the  time  of  Jerome  that  the  Rabbles  of  the  school  of 
Tiberias  re-arranged  the  Books  of  the  Canon,  and  re- 
moved Daniel  from  the  prophets,  and  placed  him  in  the 
Hagiographa.  It  is  very  apparent  that  their  anti-Mes- 
sianic views  led  them  to  do  this.  Besides,  if  Daniel  w^as 
written  in  the  time  of  Antiochus  Epiphanes,  it  could  no 
more  have  been  admitted  in  the  Hagiographa  either,  for 
that  division  was  already  closed. 

2.  It  is  objected  that  Jesus,  the  son  of  Sirach,  who 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  175 

wrote  about  200-180  B.  C,  in  his  enumeration  of  Israel- 
itish  worthies,  is  silent  as  1o  Daniel.  True,  but  he  is 
silent  as  to  others  also,  and  so  the  objection  is  without 
weight.  The  son  of  Sirach  mentions  e.  g.  Enoch,  Moses, 
Joshua,  but  omits  Jephthah,  Gideon,  Samson;  mentions 
Zerubbabel  and  Nehemiah,  but  omits  Ezra  and  Mor- 
decai,  etc.  On  the  other  hand,  other  Apocryphal  Books 
confirm  the  fact  that  Daniel  was  the  principal  and  only 
prophet  of  the  time  in  which  he  lived,  and  that  the 
Book  which  claims  to  be  written  by  him  and  to  which 
they  refer  is  genuine ;  thus,l  Maccabees,  Book  of  Baruch, 
Song  of  the  Three  Children,  Susanna,  Bel  and  the 
Dragon. 

3.  It  is  alleged  that  there  are  especially  Greek  words 
in  Daniel  that  require  us  to  put  the  composition  of  the 
Book  at  a  late  date.  But  at  the  most  there  are  only 
two  or  three  words  that  can  be  referred  to  a  Greek 
origin,  and  these  words  names  of  musical  instruments. 
But  when  we  remember  what  was  the  inventive  genius 
of  the  Greeks  in  music,  and  what  were  the  extensive 
commercial  relations  of  the  Greek  colonies  more  than 
600  years  B.  C,  it  is  difficult  to  see  why  we  are  com- 
pelled to  put  the  date  of  the  composition  of  Daniel  down 
to  175  B.  C.  because  of  two  or  three  Greek  words 
in  it. 

4.  It  is  alleged  that  there  are  historical  errors  in 
Daniel.  That  this  charge  is  entirely  unfounded  see 
more  fully  Pusey's  Daniel  the  Prophet,  Keil  and  De- 
litzch  commentary,  Harman's  Introduction,  Sayce's 
Fresh  Light  from  the  Ancient  Monuments,  etc. 

On  the  other  hand  the  historical  reality  of  Daniel  and 

the  genuineness  of  his  Book  receive  confirmation  from 

1.  The  testimony  of  the  prophet  Ezekiel,  e.  g.  14: 14, 


1*^6  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

20;  28:3.     When  Ezekiel  used  this  laiiguaoe  Daniel 
had  been  in  Bab^don  eighteen  j^ears. 

2.  The  testimony  of  Daniel  who  a  number  of  times 
throughout  his  Book  claims  to  be  its  writer. 

3.  The  testimony  of  Christ  to  "  Daniel  the  prophet," 
e.  g.  Matt.  24:15. 

4.  The  testimony  of  its  admission  into  the  Canon. 

5.  The  testimony  of  the  Apocrypha,  Josephus  and 
others. 

6.  The  languge  of  the  book  of  Daniel  exactly  repre- 
sents Daniel's  age  and  position. 

7.  The  exact  historical  knowledge  displayed  in  the 
Book  confirms  the  authorship  by  Daniel. 

8.  Confirmed  by  archaeological  researches. 

VI.  Division  and  Contents.— The  Book  of  Daniel 
falls  Into  two  principal  divisions,  viz. — 

I.  Chs.  1-6.  Historical ;  giving  an  account  of  im- 
portant events  at  Babylon  in  the  author's  time. 

II.  Chs.  7-12.  Prop/iefica? ;  containing  prophecies 
respecting  future  empires,  the  Messiah's  kingdom,  and 
resurrection  of  the  dead. 

A  more  detailed  chronological  analysis  is  the  follow- 
ing :— 

1.  Ch.  1.  Introductory;  Nebuchadnezzar  the  King. 
B.  C.  605. 

2.  Ch.  2.  The  image  dream;  Nebuchadnezzar's  sec- 
ond year.     B.    C.  603. 

3.  Ch.  3.  The  fiery  furnace;  Nebuchadnezzar's 
twentieth  year.     About  B.  C.   580. 

4.  Ch.  4.  Nebuchadnezzar's  mania;  his  thirtieth 
year.     B.  C.  570. 

5.  Ch.  5.  Fall  of  Babylon.  B.  C.  538.  Belshazzar 
regent. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


177 


G.  Ch.  6.  The  lion's  den.  Darius  the  Mede.  B. 
C.  538. 

7.  Ch.  7.  The  four  wild  beasts.  B.  C.  555.  Bel- 
shazzar  regent. 

8.  Ch.  8.  Vision  of  the  ram  and  he -goat.  B.  C. 
553.     Belshazzar  regent. 

9.  Ch.  9.  The  seventy  weeks.  B.  C.  538.  Darius 
the  Mede. 

10.  Chs.  10-12.  Final  vision— the  apocalypse.  B. 
C.  534.     Cyrus  King. 

VII.  Theolog-y.— The  doctrines  of  the  Book  of  Dan- 
iel are  closely  connected  with  the  writings  of  the  exile, 
and  form  a  last  step  in  the  development  of  the  ideas 
of  Messiah.  Especially  emphasized  are  the  doctrines  of 
the  Messiah,  of  angels,  of  the  resurrection  of  the  dead, 
and  the  judgment  of  the  world. 

VIII.  Messianic— The  special  Messianic  sections  of 
the  Book  of  Daniel  are 

1.  Dan.  2 :  31-45  and  7 :  2-27.  The  Kingdom  of  the 
Son  of  Man. 

2.  Dan.  9 :  24-27  and  12 : 1-13.  The  Seventy  Weeks 
— The  Last  Times. 


HOSEA. 


I.  l^ame,—Hosheya  =  Hosea  =  Salvation.  The 
Book  is  so  called  from  the  name  of  its  author. 

II.  Biography.— Hosea  flourished  in  the  Pre- Assyr- 
ian period,  and  belonged  to  the  Kingdom  of  Israel. 
His  time  is  about  790-724  B.  C.  A  long  life  of  activ- 
ity of  about  sixty  years  extending  from  the  latter  part 

[11] 


1*^8  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

of  the  reign  of  Jeroboam  II.  into  the  earlier  part  of  the 
reign  of  Hezekiah.  He  was  the  son  of  Beeri,  and 
probably  a  native  of  the  Kingdom  of  Israel,  in  which 
kingdom  he  exercised  his  prophetical  office.  Nothing 
further  is  accurately  known  as  to  his  personal,  unof- 
ficial history. 

III.  Ministry. -Hosea's  ministry  was  exercised  in 
and  for  the  benefit  of  the  Kingdom  of  Israel,  or 
simply  Ephraim  as  he  frequently  called  the  Northern 
Kingdom,  a  rebuking  designation.  According  to  1 : 1 
Hosea's  prophetical  activity  was  of  long  duration,  one 
of  the  longest: — he  saw  Jeroboam's  kingdom  still  in  its 
greatness,  saw  the  rapid  and  anarchical  changes  of 
dynasty  that  followed  in  the  Northern  Kingdom,  saw 
four  successive  reigns  in  the  Southern  Kingdom,  and 
saw  the  beginning  of  the  Assyrian  Period.  Delivered 
orally,  Hosea's  prophechies  were  probabl}"  committed 
by  him  to  writing  near  the  close  of  his  prophetical 
career,  about  725  B.  C.  Judah  is  mentioned  to  be 
censured  with  Israel,  and  again  in  contrast  to  Israel 
as  the  house  Jehovah  would  bless  and  deliver. 

IV.  Chronology.— The  prophets  contemporary  with 
Hosea  were  Amos  and  Isaiah.  Contemporary  kings 
of  Judah  were  Uzziah,  Jotham,  Ahaz,  Hezekiah. 
Contemporar}^  kings  of  Israel  from  Jeroboam  II.  to 
subjection  of  Hosea  by  Shalmaneser.  See  Table  of 
Kings. 

V.  Composition.— Hosea  is  generally  conceded  to  be 
the  author  of  the  Book  bearing  his  imme.  The  Book 
is  composed  of  the  essential  contents  of  discourses  de- 
livered by  the  Prophet  at  various  times.  It  is,  how- 
ever, impossible  to  indicate  the  precise  limits  of  each 
of   these  individual  discourses,   or  to  give  them   any 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  1?9 

exact  chronological  order.  This  however  argues  for 
the  unit}^  of  the  Book  as  written  and  transmitted,  a 
unity  further  confirmed  by  the  orderly  advance,  ac- 
cording to  plan,  from  wrath  and  threatening  to  mercy 
and  promise;  by  the  clearly  defined  strophical  ar- 
rangement of  the  Book;  and  by  "The  Word  of  the 
Lord"  in  the  superscription  uniting  the  whole. 

Hosea's  style  is  concise,  abrupt,  poetical,  powerful 
in  imager}'.  There  are  peculiar  idioms  and  unusual 
constructions.  The  symbolical  narrative,  Chs.  1-3, 
is  prose,  the  rest  poetico-rhythmical.  The  general 
character  of  the  prophecj^  is  censure  but  terminating 
with  promises  of  Messianic  import. 

A  number  of  coincidences  between  the  prophecies 
of  Hosea  and  the  Pentateuch  show  an  acquaintance 
with  the  latter.  Hosea  also  refers  a  number  of  times 
to  the  prophecies  of  Amos.  A  closer  resemblance 
exists  between  Hosea  and  the  greater  prophets  than 
between  the  greater  prophets  and  any  other  of  the 
minor  prophets. 

VI.  Historical.— The  history  of  the  times  of  Hosea 
is  similar  to  that  of  Hosea's  elder  contemporarj^  Amos. 
Only  in  Hosea  the  corrupt  conditions  of  the  Northern 
Kingdom  is  increased  and  aggravated  to  the  extreme. 
After  the  reign  of  Jeroboam  H.,  when  Hosea  began  to 
prophesy  the  succession  of  kings,  six  in  number,  was 
for  the  most  part  a  succession  of  royal  murders,  and 
anarch}^  in  the  State.  Ungodlj^  alliances  w  ith  heathen 
nations  were  made,  the  rival  factions  in  Israel  in- 
voking or  buying  the  support  alternately  of  Assyria 
and  Egypt.  Thus,  after  an  interregnum  of  eleven 
j^ears  Jeroboam  II.  was  succeeded  by  his  son  Zechariah, 
who,  after  a  reign  of  six   months,   was  murdered   by 


180  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Shallum.  Shallum  after  a  month's  reign  was  over- 
thrown and  assassinated  by  Menahem  who  sought  to 
strengthen  himself  by  buying  the  support  of  the 
Assyrian  monarch  Tiglath  Pileser.  2  Ki.  15:17-22; 
Hos.  8 :  9.  About  the  same  time  another  faction  was 
seeking  aid  from  Egypt.  Menahem  was  succeeded  by 
his  son  Pekahiah,  who  was  murdered  by  his  sucessor 
Pekah,  formerl}^  engaged  with  Rezin,  King  of  Damas- 
cus, in  attacking  the  Davidic  dynasty  in  Jerusalem. 
Isa.  Ch.  7.  Pekah  was  deposed  and  murdered  by  his 
successor  Hoshea,  the  Assyrian  king  Tiglath  Pileser 
conspiring  with  him  in  this.  Afterwards  Hoshea 
broke  with  the  Assja-ian  power,  and  opened  treason- 
able negotiations  with  So,  king  of  Egypt,  2  Ki.  17:4, 
with  the  result  that  Shalmaneser,  Tiglath  Pileser's 
successor,  laid  siege  to  Samaria,  which  after  holding 
out  for  three  years,  capitulated  to  Sargon,  who  trans- 
ported large  numbers  of  Israelites  to  different  parts 
of  Assyria,  thus  bringing  the  Northern  Kingdom  of 
Israel  to  an  end.  In  matters  of  religion  as  in  matters 
of  state,  corruption  prevailed : — ingratitude,  violence, 
idolatry,  immorality.  Jehovah  had  been  forsaken  for 
Baal;  devotion  Avas  given  to  sensuous  Canaanitish 
cults ;  the  worldliness  of  the  priests,  and  the  sensual- 
ity of  the  leaders  intensified  the  public  and  gross 
moral  corruption;  confidence  was  placed  in  enemies 
instead  of  God ;  the  claims  of  law  and  religion  were 
set  at  nought;,  schisms,  homicides,  fornications,  per- 
jury, theft,  bribery,  impiety  fill  up  the  dark  catalogue 
of  Israel's  sins,  the  swift  and  bloody  forerunners  of 
Israel's  impending  destruction. 

VII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— According  to  its  sub- 
ject-matter the  Book  has  a  threefold  division. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  181 

I.   Chs.  1-3.     The  Indictment. 
II.   Chs.  4-13.     Tlie  Argument. 

III.   Ch.  14.     The  Petition. 

In  the  Indictment,  Chs.  1-3,  Israel  is  arraigned  for 
unfaithfuhiess  to  Jehovah,  which  unfaithfulness  is 
symbolically  represented.  Thus —  a.  Chs.  1 :  2-2 :  1 . 
The  prophet  is  directed  to  take  to  himself  an  unchaste 
wife,  Gomer,  thus  to  represent  the  unfaithfulness  of 
Israel  to  Jehovah.  The  three  children  horn  by  the 
prophet's  unchaste  wife  are  given  symbolic  names : — 
Jezreel^  God  will  scatter,  that  is,  in  view  of  the  ven- 
geance to  be  exacted  by  the  house  of  Jehu  on  the  spot 
where  formerly  Jehu  had  slain  the  house  of  Ahab. 
2  Ki.  Chs.  10, 11.  Lo  Ruha7nah  =  Not  mercij,  that  is, 
unfaithful  Israel  should  be  left  without  merc}^  or  par- 
don. Lo  Ammi  =  Not  my  j^eople,  that  is,  Jehovah 
had  rejected  them.  The  rejection  how^ever  is  not  final 
for  a  promise  follows  setting  forth  the  union  again  of 
Judali  and  Israel,  and  the  restoration  to  the  divine 
favor,  b.  Ch.  2:2-23.  The  prophet's  interpreta- 
tion of  his  symbolic  narrative  in  1:2-2:1.  Israel's 
coming  i3unisliment  and  its  cause,  vis.  ingratitude 
and  idolatry ;  this  punishment  being  also  a  means  of 
reformation  resulting  in  the  restoration  of  Israel  to 
her  Divine  Husband,  Avhen  Jezreel,  representing 
Israel,  shall  verify  the  full  meaning  of  the  name,  and 
they  shall  become  lolanted  of  God  again  in  the  earth, 
for  they  shall  obtain  mercy  and  become  his  people. 
c.  Ch.  3.  As  in  Ch.  1  Hosea  again  represents  the 
part  of  Jehovah  toward  his  people.  His  love  for  and 
conduct  towards  his  adulterous  wife,  are,  he  declares, 
symbols  of  Jehovah's  love  for  the  unfaithful  Israel- 
ites, and  the  means  used  hy  Jehovah   to  bring  them 


183  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

back  to  godliness,  vis.  the  Avithholcling  from  them, 
for  a  time,  civil  and  religions  institntions. 

In  Chs.  4-13,  the  Argnment  sets  forth  Israel's  guilt 
and  punishment.  Thns—  a.  Chs.  4-7.  Israel's  flag- 
rant moral  corruption  augmented  by  the  worldliness 
and  sensuality  of  the  nation's  priests  and  leaders,  re- 
sulting in  a  national  decline  that  can  only  end  in  a 
national  fall.  b.  Ch.  8.  Announcement  of  judgment 
about  to  be  executed  on  the  Northern  Kingdom 
together  with  its  cause,  idolatry  and  schism;  a  judg- 
ment that  has  indeed  already  commenced  to  be  exe- 
cuted, and  that  Israel  has  brought  upon  itself  by  its 
heathenish  alliances  and  religious  abuses,  c.  Chs. 
9  : 1-11 :  11.  A  more  minute  description  of  the  coming 
judgment,  viz.  disaster,  ruin,  exile;  with  an  intima- 
tion of  its  cause,  viz.  national  ingratitude  and  sin, 
with  a  closing  reference  as  to  the  responsibility  of 
restoration,  d.  Chs.  11:12-13:16.  Again  Israel's 
sin,  and  Iioav  they  had  withstood  the  influence  of  an- 
cestral example,  of  the  efforts  and  entreaties  of  Jeho- 
vah, and  therefore  judgment  must  be  executed. 

In  Ch.  14,  the  Petition,  there  is  a  closing  appeal  to 
repent,  whereupon  Jehovah  would  come  to  them  again 
in  rich  blessings. 

VIII.  Theolog-y.— The  fundamental  and  upi^ermost 
doctrine  in  Hosea's  theology  is  Jehovah's  love ; — the 
mighty  and  indestructible  love  of  Jehovah  for  Israel, 
which  Avill  not  be  satisfied  until  it  has  brought  all  Israel 
into  harmony  with  itself.  God's  love  for  his  people  is 
the  prominent  thought,  and  God's  loving  kindness  the 
prominent  expression  Hosea  uses  to  set  foi-th  the  nat- 
ural attitude  of  Jehovah  to  his  people,  and  man's 
natural  attitude  to  his  fellow-man,  as  the  reflection  of 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  18:? 

that  love.  Hosea  emphasizes  also  a  deep,  spiritual 
repentance,  a  radical  change  of  heart,  as  the  condition 
of  restoration.  And  while  Hosea  like  Amos  describes 
the  future  as  a  time  of  restored  prosperity  and  fertil- 
ity, he  especially  emphasizes  that  the  chief  blessed- 
ness of  that  time  will  consist  in  the  perfect  fellowship 
of  love  and  life  between  God  and  his  people. 

IX.  Messianic— The  Messianic  element  in  Hosea  is 
mainly  connected  with  the  promised  restoration  of 
Israel  in  the  last  times,  and  after  a  long  period  of 
exile,  and  as  set  forth  chiefly  in  the  first  three  chap- 
ters. Briefly  this  Messianic  element  embraces: — 1. 
The  restoration  of  the  Northern  Kingdom  of  Israel 
after  a  long  period  of  exile.  2.  The  reunion  of  Israel 
and  Judah  into  one  nationality,  3.  The  submission 
and  obedience  of  this  reunited  people  to  David  their 
King,  which  finally  can  refer  only  to  the  Messiah. 
4.  The  natural  world  is  to  share  in  the  promised 
blessing  of  that  period.  5.  All  this  is  to  take  place 
in  "the  latter  days,"  i.  e.  the  Messianic  or  closing 
portion  of  the  Messianic  period. 


JOEL 


I.  Name.— FoV/  =  Joel  =  Jehovah  is  God.  The 
Book  is  so  called  from  the  name  of  its  author. 

II.— Biography.— Joel  flourished  in  the  Pre-Assj^rian 
period,  and  belonged  to  the  Kingdom  of  Judah.  His 
time  limits  are  B.  C.  890-840.  Probably  flourished 
between  B.  C.  860-850,  or  in  the  earlier  part  of  the 
reign  of  Joash.     He  was  the  son  of  Pethuel,  and  lived 


184  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

in  Judali.     Nothing  further  is  known  of  his  personal 
unofficial  liistory. 

III.  Ministry.— Joel  ministered  in  Judah.  There  is 
no  allusion  to  Israel.  Probably  resided  and  minis- 
tered in  Jerusalem.  Tliere  is  a  presumption  that  he 
was  a  priest.  He  exercised  great  power  in  the  nation. 
He  not  only  exhorts  but  imperatively  demands  re- 
pentance on  the  part  of  the  nation,  and  with  the  evi- 
dent assurance  that  he  will  be  obeyed. 

IV.  Contemporaries.— King  of  Judah,  Joash.  Kings 
of  Israel,  Jehu  and  Jehoahaz.  High  Priest,  Jehoida. 
Proi)hets,  Jonah  and  Amos.  Philistines  and  Plioeni- 
cians  are  referred  to  as  enemies  dealing  in  Jewish 
slaves.  Edomites,  from  the  same  stock,  also  enemies, 
independent,  subdued  later.  Sabeans  of  Arabia 
Felix.  Greeks  of  Asia  Minor.  No  reference  to 
Assyria. 

V.  Composition,— Aid] lorshq),  Date,  etc.  It  is  gen- 
erally admitted  that  Joel  is  the  author  of  the  Book 
bearing  his  name.  The  unity  of  the  Book  is  attested 
in  all  its  parts  and  contents,  in  subject-matter,  style, 
etc.  A  question  has  arisen  in  respect  to  the  date  of 
the  composition  of  the  Book.  It  must  be  placed 
either  very  early  or  very  late.  In  support  of  the 
earlier  date,  i.  e.  about  B.  C.  860-850,  there  are  these 
arguments :  1 .  The  position  of  Joel  in  the  series  of 
the  Minor  Prophets  raises  a  presumption  in  favor  of 
this  early  date.  2.  Tliere  is  no  mention  of  Syria, 
Assyria  and  Babylon  among  the  enemies  of  Judah,  a 
fact  which  points  to  a  time  when  these  nations  had 
not  yet  come  into  conflict  Avith  Judah.  On  the  other 
hand  Amos  threatens  the  Syrians  with  punishment, 
and  foresees  that  Israel  will  fall  a  prey  to  Assyria,  so 


INTKODUCTION    OUTLINES.  185 

that  Joel  antedates  Amos.  3.  The  times  and  condi- 
tion of  affairs  described  in  Joel  precisely  suit  this 
earlier  date  and  the  reign  of  Joash,  while  they  do  not 
at  all  apply  to  the  later  date;  thus,  e.  g.  the  influ- 
ence of  the  priests,  the  regularity  of  the  temple  ser- 
vices, the  spiritual  nature  of  religion^  the  absence  of 
any  denunciation  of  i^articular  sins,  etc.  4.  The 
earlier  date  agrees  with  the  references  to  foreign 
nations,  the  latter  does  not.  5.  Amos  makes  use  of 
Joel.  That  Joel  and  not  Amos  is  the  original  is  evi- 
dent from  the  fact  that  the  passages  in  question  are 
firmly  imbedded  in  the  context  of  Joel,  and  belong  to 
his  circle  of  ideas,  whereas  they  are  not  in  Amos. 
Compare  Jo.  3:10  with  Am.  1:2;  Jo.  2:12  with  Am. 
4:0,  etc.  0.  The  argument  from  style  favors  the 
early  rather  than  the  late  date. 

VI.  Historical.— The  historical  occasion  of  the  Book 
of  Joel  was  a  terrible  visitation  of  Judah  by  locusts 
and  drought.  This  visitation  was  not  prophetico- 
allegorical,  but  present  and  actual.  Joel  describes 
the  destruction  effected,  views  it  as  the  beginning  of 
a  great  judgment  day  of  Jehovah,  calls  ui^on  the 
priests  to  ax)point  a  day  for  national  humiliation  and 
prayer.  This  was  evidently  done,  and  by  divine 
authorit}',  as  he  promises  the  people  richest  blessings 
for  the  present  and  future,  and  complete  deliverance 
from  all  their  enemies. 

VII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  book  has  a  two- 
fold division : — 

I.   Chs.  1:1-2:17.     Plagues. 
II.   Chs.  2  :  19-3  :  21.     Promises. 
The  two  parts  are  joined  together  by  the  historical 
statement  in  2: 18. 


186  '  INTKODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

1.  Plagues.  The  plagues  are  a  divine  judgment. 
a.  The  plague  of  locusts  and  drought.  This  chapter  is 
not  a  prediction.  The  narrative  of  the  locusts  is  not 
an  allegory,  or  a  figurative  description  of  the  hosts  of 
Avar.  It  is  the  historical  record  of  that  wliich  actually 
took  place.  1 :  4  does  not  describe  different  insects, 
but  all  locusts  appearing  in  different  and  successive 
portions  of  a  season  or  year.  Hence  the  severity  of 
the  judgment,  extending  over  an  entire  year.  The 
description  of  the  locusts  is  accurate  as  well  as 
graphic.  Those  afflicted  by  the  plague  are  called 
upon  to  mourn  the  desolation  of  the  land.  The  worst 
feature  of  the  plague  is  the  necessity  for  suspending 
the  daily  sacrifices.  'J'herefore  the  priests  required  to 
mouru  and  the  people  to  join  them.  h.  Ch.  2:1-17. 
The  plague  a  token  of  a  coming  judgment  day  of 
Jehovah.-  The  locusts  Jehovah's  army  doing  his  will. 
Threatened  judgment  may  be  averted  by  repentance. 
Hence  humiliation  and  prayer. 

2.  Promises,  a.  For  the  present  (2:18-27),  God 
will  deliver  his  people;  evil  repaired;  new  blessings. 
h.  For  the  future  (2 :  19-3 :  21),  promises  of  greater 
things.  The  day  of  the  Lord  coming  with  salvation  to 
Israel,  terror  to  Israel's  foes.  This  day  introduced  by 
the  outpouring  of  God's  spirit.  Signs  in  heaven  and 
earth.  Safety  in  Zion.  Nations  found  guilty  and  pun- 
ished. Gathering  in  the  valley  of  Jehosaphat.  Na- 
tions destro3^ed.  Israel's  eternal  salvation  and  blessed- 
ness. 

VIII.  Theology.-The  doctrines  emphasized  by  Joel 
are^ 

1.  Jehovah's  judgeship  over  the  whole  earth. 

2.  Repentance  and  obedience  avert  punishment. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  187 

3.  The  blessedness  of  the  redeemed. 

IX.  Messianic— General  in  character.  The  Messianic 
salvation  is  bound  up  in  the  existence  of  the  Kingdom 
of  Judah.  The  Messiah  is  not  defined  as  of  any  dis- 
tinct human  personality,  but  Jehovah  is  specified  as 
the  author  of  salvation.  The  promise  of  the  outpour- 
ing of  God's  spirit  finds  its  essential  fulfilment  in  the 
Christian  Church  only,  especially  in  the  first  establish- 
ment of  it,  though  at  first  the  promise  related  to  Judah. 
It  is  indicated  that  members  of  other  nations  shall  also 
partake  in  the  Messianic  promise. 


AMOS. 

I.  Name.— .4 ??;o.s  =  Burden.  The  Book  is  so  called 
from  its  author. 

II.  Biography.— Amos  lived  in  the  Pre- Assyrian 
period,  lie  was  a  native  of  the  Kingdom  of  Judah, 
but  ministered  in  the  Kingdom  of  Israel.  His  time  is 
B.  C.  810-782.  Latter  part  of  this  period  marks  the 
time  Amos  prophesied ;  i.  e.  latter  part  of  Jero- 
boam's and  early  part  of  Uzziah's  reign,  these  kings 
being  contemporaries  about  twenty-seven  years.  See 
Table  of  Kings.  Amos  was  a  native  of  Judah,  and  of 
the  town  of  Tekoa,  twelve  miles  south  of  Jerusalem. 

III.  Ministry.— The  prophetic  ministry  of  Amos  was 
in  and  to  the  Kingdom  of  Israel.  Only  the  passages 
2:4,  5  and  6 : 1  directly  concern  Judah  and  Jerusalem. 
The  execution  of  his  mission  was  in  Bethel  whose 
priests  he  greatly  offended  by  his  prophetic  utterances; 
so  much  so  that  Amaziah  the  priest  sent  word  to  King 
Jeroboam  that  Amos  was  conspiring  against  him,  at 


188  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

the  same  time  exhorting  Amos  to  flee  into  Judea  and 
prophesy.  The  prophecies  of  Amos  delivered  orally 
wei"e  probably  committed  to  writing  after  his  return  to 
the  Kingdom  of  Judah. 

IV.  Contemporaries.— King  of  Judah,  Uzziah,  and 
of  Israel,  Jeroboam  II.  See  Table  of  Kings.  Pro- 
phets Joel  and  Jonah.  High  Priest  at  Bethel,  Ama- 
ziah.  Surrounding  nations  introduced  are  Damascus, 
Philistia,  Tyre,  Edom,  Ammon,  Moab. 

V.  Composition.— Amos  is  generall}^  conceded  to  be 
the  author  of  the  Book  bearing  his  name,  and  the 
unit}^  of  the  Book  is  likewise  generally  admitted.  All 
this  is  evident  not  alone  from  the  superscription,  but 
from  quotations  made  from  the  Book,  the  relation  and 
interdependence  of  parts,  historical  unity  and  contin- 
uity, subject,  style,  etc.  Though  not  by  profession 
or  descent  a  prophet,  but  a  shepherd,  still  Amos  like 
the  shepherd  David  was  not  uncultured.  His  writ- 
ings show  marked  literary  finish  and  force.  His 
shepherd  life  was  of  great  suggestiveness  to  him  in 
the  language  and  imagery  employed.  He  is  remark- 
ably orderly  in  his  literary  constructiveness  and  de- 
velopment; e.  g.  the  seven  surrounding  peoples  taken 
up  in  turn,  and  the  series  of  predictions,  each  con- 
structed after  the  same  pattern,  setting  forth  their  sins 
and  doom.  So  following  this  the  three  successive 
chapters,  3,  4,  5,  each  beginning  with  "  Hear  this 
word."  And  so  the  series  of  symbolic  visions  in  the 
last  three  chapters.  The  symbolism  or  imagery  of 
Amos  is  extensive  and  varied.  He  makes  large  use 
of  the  Pentateuch.  On  the  other  hand  extensive  use 
was  made  of  Amos  by  the  prophets  following,  especi- 
ally Hosea  and  Jeremiah. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  189 

VI.  Historical.— The  liistorical  occasion  of  tlie  pro- 
phecy of  Amos  was  llie  low  moral  and  religious  status 
of  the  times,  as  observable  and  notorious  not  only  in 
the  surrounding  nations  but  especially  in  the  North- 
ern Kingdom  of  Israel.  Idolatry,  injustice,  oppres- 
sion, corruption,  unchastity,  formalism  call  forth 
rebukes,  admonitions,  and  threatenings  of  divine 
punishment  and  overthrow.  The  terrors  of  impend- 
ing judgment  close  with  the  announcement  of  the 
final  exaltation  of  the  Theocracy. 

VII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  Book  of  Amos 
consists  of  two  principal  parts,  viz. — 

1.  Chs.  1-6.  Prophetical  discourses  of  a  threaten- 
ing character. 

1.  Chs.  7-9.  Visions  and  symbols  followed  by 
their  interpretations,  and  other  prophetical  announce- 
ments. 

Partfirst,Chs.  1-6,  contain— a.  1:1.  Preliminary  his- 
torical statement,  h.  Threatening  discourses  against 
the  surrounding  nations,  vis.  Syrians  of  Damas- 
cus (1 :  2-5) ;  the  chief  cities  of  the  Philistines  (1 :  6-8) ; 
Tyre  (1 :  9,  10) ;  Edom  and  its  chief  cities  (1 :  11,  12) ; 
the  Ammonites  (1 :  13-15) ;  Moab  (2 : 1-3).  These  na- 
tions are  charged  with  cruelty  against  the  Israelites, 
and  their  destruction  is  threatened,  c.  A  charge  of 
disobedience  and  idolatry  against  Judah  and  the  judg- 
ment therefor,  d.  The  statement  concerning  Judah 
forms  a  transition  to  the  principal  prophecies  that 
follow  on  to  6 :  14  all  directed  against  Israel  (excepting 
perhaps  the  single  allusion  to  the  careless  in  Zion  in 
6:1).  These  discourses  of  Amos  against  Israel  are 
directed  against  the  moral  and  religious  crimes  such 
as  idolatrv,  unchastitv,  worldliness,  the  oppression  of 


190  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

the  pool-  by  the  rich,  corruption  in  the  administration 
of  justice,  and  formalism  in  the  service  of  Jehovali. 
He  follows  these  censures  with  warnings  to  turn  back 
to  Jehovah,  and  with  threatenings  of  divine  punish- 
ment, overthrow,  deportation,  captivity  in  a  land  l)e- 
yond  Damascus. 

Part  second,  Chs.  7-9,  contain — a.  7:1-9.  Vision 
representing  the  overthrow  of  Israel  and  of  the  house 
of  Jeroboam.  Locusts,  hre  and  a  plumbline  the  fig- 
ures employed  to  represent  this  overthrow,  h.  7:10- 
17.  Hostility  of  Amaziah  to  Amos  ;  Amos  warns 
Amaziah,  and  announces  Israel's  captivity,  c.  8:1-3. 
Vision  of  a  basket  of  fruit  showing  Israel  to  be  ripe 
for  destruction,  d.  8:4-14.  The  punishment  of  those 
who  oppressed  the  poor,  carried  on  a  shameful  trade, 
gave  themselves  to  idoUitry,  and  uijon  whom  Jehovah 
would  bring  affliction,  mourning,  hunger  and  thirst. 
e.  9 : 1-10.  Vision  of  the  Lord  standing  on  the  altar. 
He  orders  a  destrnction  from  which  there  is  no  escape. 
Jehovah  will  blot  out  the  sinful  kingdom,  sinners  shall 
perish,  the  house  of  Israel  shall  be  dispersed  among 
the  nations  but  the  house  of  Jacob  shall  not  altogether 
be  destroyed.  /.  9:11-15.  Closing  promise  that  Je- 
hovah will  reinstate  the  fallen  tabernacle  of  David ; 
Israel  shall  i)ossess  the  remnant  of  Edom,  and  the 
nations  called  by  Jehovah's  name;  the  land  shall  be 
abundantly  blest;  the  scattered  ones  of  the  people 
restored;  the  overthrown  cities  rebuilt;  the  Theocracy 
reestablished. 

VIII.  Theolog-y.-The  fundamental  doctrine  in  the 
theology  of  Amos  is  the  sovereignty  of  Jehovah  in 
nature  and  in  history.  His  conception  of  God  is  re- 
markable for  its  pure,  ethical  monotheism.     As  to  man 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  191 

he  is  a  sinner,  whose  sins  are  offensive  to  God  to  whom 
he  must  turn  forsaking  his  sins.  An  intimate,  work- 
ing, spiritual  nnion  must  be  established,  and  in  which 
alone  is  to  be  found  blessedness.  The  prophet's  views 
of  religion  are  marked  by  a  deep  spirituaIit^^  The 
alternative  of  not  seeking  Bethel,  Gilgal  or  Beersheba 
is  not  the  seeking  of  Jerusalem  but  the  seeking  of 
Jehovah,  and  so  live.  The  alternative  of  idolatrous 
service  is  not  ceremonial  service,  but  the  service  of 
heart  and  life. 

IX.  Messianic— The  Messianic  element  in  the  Book 
of  Amos  is  composed  of  the  promise  that  forms  the 
conclusion  to  the  Book,  viz.  in  9:11-15,  which  sets 
forth 

12.     The  Restoration  of  the  Davidic  King- 
Its  divine  up-building. 
Its  divine  out-building. 
The  Restoration  of  the  cursed  but  chosen 

Constant  productivity. 

Abundant  productivitj^ 
15.     The  Restoration  of  the  Diaspora. 
Re-colonization. 
Immovable  Possession. 


1. 

vv.   11 

dom, 

a. 

V.    11. 

h. 

V.   12. 

2. 

V.   13. 

land 

a. 

V.   13=\ 

b. 

V.    ld\ 

3. 

vv.   14, 

a. 

V.   14. 

b. 

V.   15. 

OBADIAH. 


I.  l!(auie,—  Obadyah  =  Obadiah  =:  Servant  of  Jeho- 
vah. The  Book  is  so  called  from  the  name  of  its  au- 
thor. 


192  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

II.  Biography  and  Ministry.— O bad i ah  who  flour- 
ished ill  the  Pre-Assyrian  period  belonged  to  the  King- 
dom of  Jiidah.  He  lived  and  prophesied  during  the 
reign  of  King  Jehorani,  B.  C.  890-850.  Of  the  pro- 
phet himself  nothing  further  is  positively  known. 

III.  Composition.— Obadiah  is  generally  admitted 
to  be  the  author  of  the  Book  bearing  his  name: — 
the  smallest  of  the  prophetic  Books.  Question  has 
arisen  however  in  regard  to  the  date  of  the  composi- 
tion inasmuch  as  it  seems  to  be  necessary  to  place 
Obadiah  as  the  earliest  of  the  prophets,  or  assign  his 
prophecy  a  date  about  the  time  of  the  destruction  of 
Jerusalem  by  Nebuchadnezzar.  The  weight  of  argu- 
ment is  in  favor  of  the  early  date,  and  for  the  follow- 
ing reasons : — 

1.  The  comparison  of  Obadiah's  prophecy  with  Jer. 
49 :  7-22,  also  against  Edom.  Examining  these  two 
prophecies  it  is  evident  that  one  has  copied  or  quoted 
the  other.  If  Jeremiah  is  regarded  as  the  original 
then  we  have  the  anomaly  of  a  prophet  appearing 
with  a  single  chapter  of  matter,  called  a  vision,  i^rin- 
cipally  borrowed  from  a  great  prophet  living  just  be- 
fore him.  Certainly  that  makes  Obadiah's  prophetic 
status  somewhat  questionable.  On  the  other  hand,  if 
Obadiah  is  the  original,  there  is  nothing  strange  in 
Jeremiah's  borrowing  from  him  in  his  great  prophetic 
Book,  just  as  he  has  borrowed  from  Isaiah.  More- 
over the  prophecy  in  Obadiah  is  a  w^ell-aiTanged  whole, 
whereas  in  Jeremiah  the  same  matter  is  broken  up  and 
given  in  a  less  forcible  and  obvious  order.  For  the 
above  reason  it  is  also  highly  improbable  that  both 
Jeremiah  and  Obadiah  are  borrowing  from  a  still 
older  prophet. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  193 

2.  The  capture  of  Jerusalem  to  which  Obadiah  re- 
fers cannot  be  that  made  by  Nebuchadnezzar,  for  he 
carried  away  the  people  of  Jerusalem  to  Babylon. 
The  language  of  Obadiah  refers  to  a  very  different 
captivity,  see  ver.  20.  This  undoubtedly  refers  to  the 
capture  of  the  city  in  the  reign  of  Jehoram,  about  B. 
C.  887,  when  the  Philistines  and  the  Arabians  made 
an  irruption  into  Judah  and  Jerusalem,  and  took  cap- 
tives, and  carried  off  valuable  property  (2  Chron.  21: 
16,  17).  To  this  Joel  also  seems  to  refer  (3 :  4-6).  He 
represents  the  children  of  Judah  and  Jerusalem  as  sold 
to  the  Grecians.  The  captivity  of  Jerusalem  in  Sep- 
harad  (Obad.  20) — a  district  in  or  about  Asia  Minor — 
seems  to  be  that  part  of  the  people  carried  away  at 
that  time.  It  therefore  seems  best  to  refer  the  plund- 
ering of  Jerusalem,  to  which  reference  is  made  in 
Obadiah,  to  the  reign  of  Jehoram,  and  the  prophecy  to 
the  time  immediately  subsequent,  about  B.  C.  880. 

3.  This  earlj^  date  for  Obadiah  agrees  with  the  allu- 
sions to  his  prophecy  in  Joel,  and  with  the  references, 
to  Edom  in  Amos.  Joel  was  evidently  familiar  with 
the  words  or  writings  of  Obadiah,  e.  g.  compare  Joel 
2 :  32  with  Obad.  17 ;  Joel  3 :  3  with  Obad.  11 ;  Joel  3 : 
7,  8,  with  Obad.  15;  Joel  3: 17  with  Obad.  11,  17,  etc. 

IV.  Historical.— The  historical  occasion  of  the  pro- 
phecy of  Obadiah  was  some  recent  capture  of  Jerusa- 
lem, in  which  ihe  Edomites  had  been  guilty  of  the 
grossest  insult  and  injury  to  Judah.  It  does  not  ap- 
pear that  they  were  themselves  the  principal  assail- 
ants, but  they  had  shown  a  most  unbrotherl}^  spirit  by 
their  malignant  delight  at  Judah's  calamity,  by  sharing 
in  the  plunder  of  the  cit}^  by  intercepting  the  fugi- 
[12] 


194  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

tives,  and  slaughtering  them  or  surrendering  them  to 
be  sold  as  slaves. 

V.  Divisions  and  Contents.  — 1.  vv.  1-10.  The  na- 
tions are  summoned  by  Jehovah's  messengers  to  make 
war  upon  Edom.  He  has  determined  to  humble 
Edom's  pride.  Edom  will  be  plundered  by  enemies, 
deserted  by  allies,  and  its  counsellors  and  heroes  over- 
thrown ;  all  because  of  Edom's  inhuman  treatment  of 
his  brother  Jacob. 

2.  vv.  11-14.  For  in  the  day  of  Judah's  humilia- 
tion and  calamit}^,  Edom  maliciously  exulted,  and 
shared  in  the  plunder. 

3.  vv.  15-21.  But  Jehovah's  day  of  judgment  for 
all  the  nations  is  at  hand,  and  Edom  will  not  escape  a 
just  retribution.  A  remnant  will  remain  in  Jerusalem; 
Jerusalem  will  no  more  be  defiled  by  invaders;  Judah 
and  Israel  will  possess  Edom  and  Philistia ;  Jehovah's 
Kingdom  will  be  forever  established. 

VI.  Theolog-y— Messianic— O bad iah's  theology  em- 
phasizes 

1.  Jehovah's  enemies  shall  be  defeated. 

2.  Jehovah's  people  shall  prevail. 

3.  Jehovah's  Kingdom  shall  be  established. 

The  Messianic  thought  is  contained  in  the  closing 
words  of  the  prophecy  which  set  forth  the  final  result  to 
which  all  Isreal's  history  pointed,  viz.  the  Kingdom 
shall  be  Jehovah^ s. 


JONAH, 


1.  Name.— Fo?ia7i  =  Jonah  =  A  Dove.     The  Book  is 
so  called  from  the  name  of  its  author. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  195 

II.  Biog-raphy.— Jonah,  who  flourished  in  the  Pre- 
Assyrian  i^eriod,  belonged  to  the  Kingdom  of  Israel. 
He  lived  and  ministered  during  the  reign  of  Jeroboam 
II.  He  was  the  son  of  Amittai,  and  was  born  about  B. 
C.  859.  He  was  a  native  of  Gath-Hepher,  a  town  of 
Lower  Galilee  in  Zebulon.  The  only  incident  of 
Jonah's  life  recorded  outside  of  this  Book,  and  its  New 
Testament  reference  is  mentioned  in  2  Ki.  14:25. 

III.  Ministry.— Jonah's  prophetic  ministry  covered 
quite  a  long  period,  probably  not  less  than  825-790  B. 
C.  His  visit  to  Nineveh  was  only  a  single  event  in 
his  official  career.  He  doubtless  lived  a  life  of  faithful 
prophetical  activity  in  the  ungodly  and  idolatrous 
kingdom  of  the  Ten  Tribes.  This  certainly  seems  to 
be  implied  b}'  the  waiv  =  ancl,  with  which  the  Book 
begins,  as  if  other  calls  and  ministrations  had  pre- 
ceded this  one.  A  single  allusion  to  his  ministry  in 
the  Kingdom  of  Israel  is  that  in  2  Ki.  14:  25  where  he 
foretold  to  Jeroboam  II.  the  success  of  his  wars  for  the 
restoration  of  the  boundaries  of  Israel  upon  which 
Hazael,  King  of  Syria,  had  encroached.  He  is  sent  on 
a  mission  unique  in  the  history  of  the  ancient  economy, 
viz.  to  preach  judgment  and  repentance  to  the  Gentile 
Ninevites.  Not  from  fear,  but  from  exclusiveness 
(4:2)  he  attempted  to  flee  to  the  commercial  port  of 
Tarsus  in  Celicia.  Arrested  by  a  miracle  he  returned, 
obeyed,  preached.  The  failure  of  his  prophecy  on 
Nineveh  was  only  apparent  while  it  was  really  a  signal 
success.  The  royal  edict  calls  the  Ninevites  to  re- 
pentance, while  discontented  Jonah  is  rebuked. 

IV.  Contemporaries.— King  of  Israel,  Jeroboam  II. 
Kings  of  Judah,  Amaziah  and  Uzziah.  Prophets, 
Joel  and  Amos. 


196  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

V,  Composition.— Not  only  is  Jonah  historical,  but 
the  Book  that  bears  his  name  is  also  historical.  It  is 
not  fiction,  allegory,  myth  or  legend,  but  an  ac- 
count of  that  which  actually  took  place,  genuine  his- 
tory, of  deep  prophetico-symoolic  and  typical  signifi- 
cance. Ancient  Jews  and  Christians  regarded  the 
Book  as  real  history.  The  Book  of  Tobit  so  regards  it 
(14:4,  8).  In  making  Jonah  and  his  history  a  type 
of  his  own  resurrection,  Christ  affixes  the  seal  of  his 
authority  to  the  Book.  Still  while  the  Book  records  an 
actual  history,  it  is  not  solely  or  chiefly  history.  The 
compilers  of  the  Canon  considered  the  Book  a  pro- 
phetical one.  The  historical  omissions  are  too  great 
for  the  Book  to  be  simply  a  pure  history.  The  Book  is 
prophetical,  and  only  those  historical  events  are  fur- 
nished which  are  required  as  the  basis  of  the  pro- 
phetical teaching.  Moreover  the  unity  of  the  Book  is 
actually  and  externally  indivisible.  The  word  "  sec- 
ond" in  3:  1  connects  both  halves  in  the  most  intimate 
manner.  While  Jonah  is  not  distinctly  declared  to  be 
the  author  of  the  Book,  still  that  is  in  all  probability 
the  fact.  He  probably  wrote  the  Book  shortly  after 
his  return  from  Nineveh.  His  prayer  of  thanks- 
giving in  Ch.  2,  uttered  from  the  bowels  of  the  fish, 
and  reproduced  essentially,  though  not  perhaps  liter- 
ally, afterward,  follows  the  Psalms  in  structure  and  is 
filled  with  reminiscences  of  passages  from  the  Psalms. 
That  Jonah  should  be  the  author  of  the  Book  and  still 
speak  of  himself  in  the  third  person  is  in  strict  accord- 
ance with  the  manner  of  the  other  prophets  who  also 
speak  of  themselves  in  the  third  person  except  when 
they  speak  of  God's  revelations  to  them.  The  so-called 
Aramaisms  of  the  Book  are  all  genuine  Hebrew  words 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  197 

or  forms  except  the  one  Aramaic  name  for  the  decree 
of  the  King  of  Nineveh  which  Jonah  naturally  heard 
in  Nineveh  itself.  The  abbreviated  form  of  the  rela- 
tive pronoun  {sJil  or  sh  for  aslier)  in  1 :  7  by  no  means 
indicates  an  exilic  or  post-exilic  date,  as  this  abbrevi- 
ated form  of  the  relative  is  found  not  only  in  The 
Song  of  Songs,  and  in  Deborah's  Song  (Judges  5:7), 
but  is  also  found  on  a  beautifullj^-  preserved  weight, 
recently  discovered  on  the  site  of  Samaria,  which  bears 
an  inscription  in  characters  iDointing  to  the  8th  century 
B.  C,  and  where  precisely  this  same  form,  shI,  of  the 
relative  occurs. 

VI.  Historical.— The  narrative  of  the  Book  indicates 
histor}^  Not  all  the  details  but  the  principal  facts  in 
this  history  are  given.  The  immediate  occasion  of 
this  histor}'  of  Jonah's  mission  to  Nineveh  was  the 
great  wickedness  of  Nineveh,  and  the  just  judgment 
of  God  to  be  visited  therefor,  or  repentance  shown 
through  the  preaching  of  Jonah.  Its  historical  scope, 
however,  embraces  the  entire  heathen  world,  and  the 
true  attitude  of  Israel,  of  the  people  of  God  in  all 
times,  to  the  world. 

VII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  Book  contains 
two  principal  divisions,  united  by  the  historical  state- 
ment in  3:1,  viz  : 

1.  Chs.  1,  2.     The  Man. 

2.  Chs.  3,  4.     The  Mission. 

In  the  contents  we  have —  1.  Ch.  1.  The  Prophet 
Jonah  receives  divine  orders  to  proceed  to  Nineveh, 
and  declare  judgment  against  it  for  its  great  wicked- 
ness. Foreseeing,  according  to  4:2,  a  possible  re- 
pentance on  the  part  of  the  Ninevites,  and  a  conse- 
quent sparing  and  blessing  on  the   part  of  God,   and 


198  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

selfishly  considering  God's  spiritual  blessings  to  be 
exclusively  for  the  benefit  of  Israel,  Jonah  attempts  to 
evade  the  divine  command  by  fleeing  to  Tarshish.  A 
storm  arises,  the  heathen  crew  pray,  and  sleeping 
Jonah  is  awakened.  The  crew  regard  the  storm  as  a 
sign  of  divine  wrath,  and  cast  lots  to  detect  the  guilty 
person.  The  lot  falls  upon  Jonah,  who  confesses,  and, 
upon  his  own  advice,  is  cast  into  the  sea.  2.  Ch.  2. 
A  large  fish  swallows  Jonah,  but  he  is  preserved  in 
life  and  thanks  God.  On  the  third  day  he  is  vomited 
out  on  the  land.  3.  Ch.  3.  The  divine  command 
comes  again  to  Jonah,  who  obeys,  and  in  Nineveh  pro- 
claims its  destruction  for  its  sins.  Headed  by  the 
King,  the  Ninevites  observe  a  public  fast,  whereupon 
Jehovah  determines  to  withdraw  his  threatening.  4. 
Ch.  4.  Jonah,  selfish  of  the  divine  blessings,  and 
feeling  that  the  effect  of  the  divine  purpose  to  remit 
the  calamity  would  put  him  in  a  false  light,  is  dis- 
pleased. His  displeasure  is  increased  by  the  incident 
of  the  plant  that  shot  uf),  shaded  him,  and  then  was 
destroyed  in  the  night.  The  next  day's  heat  angers 
him.     He  pities  the  plant — Jehovah  pities  the  city. 

VIII.  Tlieolog-y.— The  teaching  of  Jonah  is  mani- 
fest, viz : 

1.  Sin  incurs  the  divine  judgment. 

2.  Repentance  secures  the  divine  remission. 

3.  God's  spiritual  blessings  are  for  the  world. 

4.  They  who  have  must  give  those  blessings  or  be 
punished. 

IX.  Messianic— The  Book  of  Jonah  is  a  symbolical 
one  after  the  analogy  of  Isa.  Ch.  5,  and  Ezek.  Ch.  16. 
The  Book  is  typical  especiall}^  in  Ch.  2  where  Jonah  is 
a  t3^pe  of  Christ  according  to  Mat.  12 :  40.     The  Book  is 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  199^ 

prophetical  aud  symbolical.  Jonah  represents  Israel! 
Nineveh  represents  the  heathen  world  as  afterwards 
did  Babylon  and  Edom.  Israel  has  the  mission  of 
preaching  God's  Word  to  the  heathen  world.  He  seeks 
to  flee  from  his  callini^.  God  reproves  and  punislies 
Israel,  because  he  in  whom  all  the  families  of  tlie  earth 
were  to  be  blessed  had  neglected  his  vocation.  Israel 
is  restoied  and  recommissioned  to  preach  that  the 
heathen  world  shall  perish.  Israel  doubts,  delays, 
despairs  and  therefore  God  corrects  Israel.  But  as 
the  sparing  of  Nineveh  came  before  the  correction  of 
Jonah,  so  the  type  as  to  the  future  is  that  the  multi- 
tude of  the  heathen  world  shall  be  gathered  in  before 
the  Jewish  people  who  must  first  be  humbled  and 
broken.  In  the  fulfilment  of  his  mission  Jonah  is  a 
type  of  Israel,  and  Israel  a  type  of  Christ.  Mat. 
12:40.  As  the  sparing  of  Jonah  and  his  preaching  of 
repentance  was  a  sign  to  the  Ninevites  which  must 
bring  them  to  faith  or  judgment,  so  the  preservation 
of  Christ  in  the  grave,  and  the  preaching  of  the  Risen 
One  were  a  sign  to  the  world  of  judgment  and  of 
faith. 


MICAH 


I.  'Nan\e,—2Ieecah  =  Micah  =  Who  is  like  Jehovah? 
The  Book  is  so  called  from  the  name  of  its  author. 

II.  Biograpliy.— Micah  who  belonged  to  the  King- 
dom of  Judali,  lived  in  the  Assyrian  period.  His 
date  is  about  758-710  B.  C.  He  was  a  young  contem- 
porary of  Isaiah  and  Hosea.  In  1 : 1  he  is  called  "the 
Morashtite,"  i.  e.  he  was  a  native  of  Moresheth,  a  de- 


200  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

IDendeiicy   of   Gath,    in   the   maritime    plain,    abont 
twentj^  miles  soutliwest  of  Jernsalem.     Like  Amos, 
Micali  Avas  a  conntryman,  a   "man  of  the  peojole," 
born  of  obscure  parentage,  his  father's  name  not  be- 
ing mentioned.     As  in  the  case  of  many  of  the  other 
prophets    little    is    known   of  the   circumstances  of 
Micah's  life  other  than  as  indicated  in  his  iDrophecy. 
II r.  Ministry.— According  to  the  superscription  1:1, 
Micah  proj^hesied  under  the  reigns  of  Jotham,  Ahaz 
and  Hezekiah,  kings  of  Judah.     Micah's  time  limits 
would  therefore  be  about  B.  C.  756-697,  i.  e.  a  period 
of  fifty-nine  years.     The  minimum  limit  of  his  minis- 
tr}^  would  be  sixteen  years,   i.  e.  from  the  death  of 
Jotham  to  the  accession  of  Hezekiah.     But   the  pro- 
phecy itself  furnishes  a  more  accurate  estimate  of  the 
duration  of  Micah's  prophetic  ministr}^  inasmuch  as 
1 :  6  was  evidently  uttered  prior  to  the  fall  of  Samaria 
which  took  place  in  B.  C.  722,  while  according  to  the 
notice  in  Jeremiah  26: 17  sq.  Micah  3: 12  was  spoken 
during  the   reign   of   Hezekiah.     Micah's    prophetic 
message  was  directed  both  to  Israel  and  Judah,  but 
for  the  most  part  to  his  country  Judah.     AYhile  Isaiah 
the   statesman-prophet   at  the   capital  rebuked    the 
courses  and  foretold  the  destinies  of  nations,  kings 
and  nobilities,  at  the  same  time  emj)hasizing  in  an 
unrivaled  manner   the   great   truths  of  religion  and 
uttering  glorious  promises, — Micah  on  the  other  hand 
spoke   as   a   man    of    the  people,  in  sympathy  with 
the  common  x)eoi^le  in  their  sufferings,  attacking  the 
wrong  like  Isaiah,  but  otherwise  less   interested   in 
matters  of  state,  foreign  policies,  etc.     His  ministry 
therefore  was  more  exclusively  that  of  an  ethical  and 
religious  teacher.     At   the   same   time  Micah   had  a 


INTKODUCTION    OUTLINES.  201 

powerful  influence  at  the  capital,  and  gave  weightiest 
evidence  of  his  prophetic  ministry  as  a  religious 
teacher  inasmuch  as  he  was  largely  instrumental,  ac- 
cording to  Jer.  26:17  sq.  compared  Avith  Mic.  3:12, 
in  effecting  the  reformation  under  Hezekiah. 

IV.  Contemporaries.— Kings  of  Judah,  Jotham, 
Ahaz  and  Hezekiah.  Kings  of  Israel,  Pekah  and 
Hoshea.  Prophets,  Isaiah  and  Hosea.  Assyria  re- 
ferred to  as  an  invading,  conquering  and  deporting 
foe. 

V.  Authorship.— Micah  is  generally  conceded  to  be 
the  author  of  the  Book  bearing  his  name.  The  chief 
opposition  to  this  view  is  raised  by  a  few  who  attri- 
bute Chs.  6,  7  to  an  anonymous  author.  But  from 
their  contents  these  chai3ters  not  only  may  have  been 
written  under  the  reigns  of  Ahaz  or  Manasseh,  but  in 
every  respect  the  most  suitable  time  for  their  j)roduc- 
tion  is  the  reign  of  Ahaz,  rather  than  the  reign  of 
Manasseh,  Avhen  true  prophets  were  silenced,  or  itiny 
subsequent  time.  More  recent  criticism  assigns  the 
passage  7 : 7-20  to  the  Exile,  so  that  according  to 
this  view  there  is  a  gap  of  a  century  between  7 :  6  and 
7:7.  But  there  is  no  difficulty  whatsoever  in  this 
passage  precluding  it  from  being  the  work  of  a  pro- 
phet who  might  know  and  foretell  that  the  exile  must 
happen.  Besides,  a  prophec}^  can  hardly  be  con- 
ceived of  as  ending  so  abruptly  as  would  be  the  case 
at  7:  6. 

VI.  Historical.  —The  sins  of  Judah  and  Israel  con- 
stituted the  historical  occasion  of  Micah's  prophecy. 
These  sins  were  against  the  fundamental  law^s  of 
social  morality,  transgressions  of  the  elementary 
principles  of  justice  and  merc^'.     The  A^ery  founda- 


202  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

tions  of  society  were  being  upheaved  and  overtlirown. 
It  is  especially  the  social  sins  of  his  time  that  Micah 
attacks  with  passionate  energy.  The  accumulation  of 
vast  estates  by  wealthy  nobles;  the  unscrupuloasly 
powerful  defrauding  the  honest  poor  and  dispossess- 
ing him  of  his  ancestral  land  and  home ;  governors 
and  judges  fleecing  the  people  whom  they  were  sworn 
to  protect;  exacting  creditors  tearing  the  garments 
from  a  man's  shoulders ;  exorbitant  taxation  and  pri- 
vate extortions ;  the  dictates  of  natural  piety  ignored 
and  the  most  sacred  relations  of  life  violated ;  strong 
fortifications  and  stately  palaces  constructed  of 
human  lives  and  cemented  with  human  blood;  every- 
where appalling  social  selfishness,  corruption,  fierce- 
ness. These  are  the  sins  that  Micah  denounces,  and 
upon  them,  the  people,  for  the  commission  of  these 
sins  he  denounces  the  judgment  of  God, — humiliation, 
overthrow,  anguish,  exile,  dispersion.  But  Micah 
also  preaches  promise ;  and  be\'^ond  this  blackness  of 
darkness  dawns  the  sure  hope  of  restoration,  reunion, 
and  glorification. 

VII.  Divisions  and  Contents.— Upon  the  basis  of  its 
subject  matter  the  Book  of  Micah  is  best  divided  into 
three  parts,  as  follows : — 

I.  Chs.  1,  2.  Reproof  dominant  but  closing  with 
promise. 

II.  Chs.  3-5.  Promise  dominant  but  closing  with  re- 
proof. 

III.  Chs.  (3,  7.  The  legal  controvers}"  and  conclu- 
sion: — will  it  be  reproof  or  promise? 

I.   Chs.  1,  2.   Reproof  and  promise;  including 
1.   Ch.  1.      Jehovah   the   Judge.       a.   1:1.      Super- 
scription,    b.   1 :  2-5.     Jehovah  the  Judge  of  Israel  is 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  203 

about  to  appear.  c.  1:6,  7.  Samaria  will  be  de- 
stroyed. f7.  1:8,  9.  The  catastrophe  will  reach  Jeru- 
salem: e.  1:10-10.  Various  towns  of  tlie  Lowland, 
where  the  prophet's  own  home  is,  will  be  overwhelmed. 

2.  Ch.  2.  Judah's  woe  and  Jehovah's  promise. 
a.  2:1-5.  The  violent  deeds  of  Judah's  nobles  de- 
mand punishment.  b.  2:6,7.  They  would  silence 
true  prophets  and  listen  to  false  ones.  c.  2:8-11.  As 
they  eject  the  poor  so  shall  they  themselves  be  exiled. 
d.  2:12,  13.  The  exiled  and  dispersed  Hock  of  Israel 
will  one  day  be  reassembled,  and  go  forth  from  cap- 
tivity in  a  second  exodus,  led  by  their  King  with 
Jehovah  at  his  side,  to  restoration.  Compare  Ex. 
13:21;  Psa.  110:5;  Isa.  52:12. 

II.   Chs.  3-5.     Promise  and  reproof ;  including 

1.  Ch.  3.  The  censure  of  rulers.  a.  3:1-11\ 
Judges,  prophets  and  priests  dishonor  their  office. 
h.  3:ll^  Their  false  reliance  upon  Jehovah,  c.  3: 
12.  Their  ungodliness  the  cause  of  Jerusalem's  im- 
pending ruin. 

2.  Ch.  4.  The  center  of  salvation  and  the  humilia- 
tion to  Zion.  a.  4:1-5.  But  in  the  ending  of  the 
days  Jerusalem  will  be  the  center  of  instruction, 
obedience  and  peace,  h.  4:6-8.  The  dispersed  will 
be  reassembled,  the  eternal  reign  of  Jehovah  inaugur- 
ated, and  the  Davidic  Kingdom  restored,  c.  4:  9,  10. 
Zion's  immediate  future  is  humiliation  and  exile. 
d.  4:11-13.  Zion's  ultimate  future  will  be  victory 
over  the  nations. 

3.  Ch.  5.  Exaltation  from  Bethlehem.  a.  5:1. 
Israel  and  her  ruler  must  be  reduced  to  extremity  and 
insult,  h,  5:2-6.  But  from  Bethlehem  shall  come 
forth  a  Ruler  of  David's  house  to  rule  over  a  reunited 


204  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

people,  and  repel  the  Assyrian  invader,  c.  5:7.  Israel 
will  be  a  source  of  blessing  to  some.  d.  5 :  8,  9.  Israel 
will  be  a  source  of  destruction  to  others,  e.  5:  10-15. 
Israel  will  be  i3urified  and  vengeance  executed  on  the 
disobedient. 

III.  Chs.  6,  7.  Controvers}'  and  conclusion.  The 
representation  is  that  of  a  legal  suit  between  Jehovah 
and  his  people  Israel.  Jehovah  is  plaintiff,  Israel  is 
defendant. 

1.  Chs.  6:1-7:13.  The  controversy.  a.  6:1,2. 
Exordium,  h.  6:3-5.  Jehovah  states  his  case.  c.  6: 
6,  7.  The  people  admits  its  sin,  and  asks  how  Jeho- 
vah can  be  propitiated,  d.  6:8.  The  prophet  answers. 
e.  6:9-16.  Jehovah  speaks  denouncing  the  wicked- 
ness, and  threatening  punishment.  /.  7 : 1-6.  The 
prophet  speaks  in  the  name  of  the  true  Israel  lament- 
ing the  corruption,  g.  7:7-10.  They  will  bear  the 
punishment  confident  that  Jehovah  will  vindicate  his 
righteousness,  li.  7:11-13.  In  answer  is  heard  the 
divine  proclamation  of  Zion's  restoration. 

2.  Ch.  7:14-20.  The  conclusion,  a.  7:14-17.  The 
prophet  prays  for  this  restoration  of  Zion,  and  Jeho- 
vah promises  to  effect  it.  h.  7:18-20.  The  prophet 
concludes  by  expressing  a  perfect  trust  in  Jehovah's 
pardoning  mercy  and  unchanging  faithfulness. 

VIII.  Theolog-y.-The  theological  doctrines  of  Micah 
are  similar  to  those  of  Isaiah.  In  the  main  they  set 
forth 

1.  The  regeneration  of  Israel  through  judgment. 

2.  The  establishment  of  Jehovah's  Kingdom  under 
the  ideal  King  of  David's  line. 

3.  The  evangelization  of  the  nations  through  that 
Davidico-Messianic  Kingdom. 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  205 

In  regard  to  man  Micah  emphasizes 

1.  Man  must  follow  justice  toward  his  neighbor. 

2.  He  must  also  show  mercy,  and  not  only  show  it, 
but  love  mercy. 

3.  Man  must  walk  humbly  with  his  God;  live  such 
a  life  of  fellowship  with  God  as  implies  an  identity  of 
will  and  purpose. 

IX.  Messianic— Israel  is  to  be  scattered  in  judg- 
ment, but  it  will  be  restored  again  in  mercy.  The 
ideal  of  the  Theocracy  will  be  realized.  Jehovah  shall 
reign  in  Zion  forever.  A  Prince  of  the  house  of  David 
will  rule  over  a  reunited  Israel.  He  is  to  spring  from 
Bethlehem.  The  Kingdom  of  God  will  be  established 
in  peace  and  righteousness.  This  Messianic  produc- 
tion in  Micah  is  in  the  main  threefold,  and  for  the 
most  part  contained  in  Chs.  4 : 1-5 :  5%  as  follows : 

1.  Ch.  4:1-7.-  The  final  Messianic  period.  Comp. 
Isa.  2:2-4. 

2.  Ch.  4:8-13.  The  Davidico-Zionitic  dominion. 
Comp.  Am.  9:9-15. 

3.  Ch.  5:l-5^  The  Ruler  from  Bethlehem.  Comp. 
Isa.  9:6:  Zech.  9 :  9. 


NAHUM 


I.  Name.— A^a/zoom  =  Nahum  =  Consolation.  The 
Booii:  derives  its  name  from  its  author. 

II.  Biography.— Nahum  flourished  during  the  As- 
syrian period  and  in  the  Kingdom  of  Judah.  He  was 
a  native  of  Elkosh,  probably  a  town  in  Galilee.  He 
probably  belonged  to  the  Northern  Kingdom  of  Israel, 


206  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

and,  upon  the  invasion  and  deportation  of  the  Ten 
Tribes,  escaped  into  the  territory  of  Judah  taking  up 
his  residence  in  or  near  Jerusalem.  Nahum  flourished 
and  prophesied  between  B.  0.  665-607. 

III.  Ministry.— Nahum's  prophetic  ministry  was  car- 
ried on  in  the  Kingdom  of  Judah,  and  in  the  second 
half  of  Hezekiah's  reign.  It  was  after  the  capture  of 
No-amon  (Thebes,  in  Upper  Egypt)  by  Asshurbanipal. 
And  it  preceded  the  destruction  of  Nineveh  by  the 
Babylonians  and  Medes.  The  subject  or  burden  of 
Nahum's  prophecy  was  the  fall  and  destruction  of  the 
Assyrian  capital  Nineveh.  While  the  prophecy  of 
Jonah  against  Nineveh  was  followed  by  the  remission 
of  God's  judgments,  the  prophecy  of  Nahum  against 
Nineveh  was  followed  by  the  execution  of  God's  judg- 
ments. 

IV.  Contemporaries.— King  of  Judah,  Hezekiah. 
Prophets,  Isaiah  and  Micah.  Assyrians  who  had  an- 
nihilated the  Kingdom  of  Israel,  and  humiliated  the 
Kingdom  of  Judah.     Egyptians. 

V.  Composition.— Nahum  is  generally  admitted  to 
have  been  the  author  of  the  Book  bearing  his  name. 
The  genuineness  of  the  Book  has  never  been  called  into 
question.  There  is  a  peculiarty  in  the  superscription 
in  that  it  makes  the  announcement  of  the  subject  pre- 
cede the  announcement  of  the  author.  There  is  how- 
ever nothing  inconsistent  in  this.  Besides,  the  prophet 
uses  several  words  and  forms  of  words  that  are  almost 
peculiar  to  himself.  He  uses  several  words  that  occur 
elsewhere  only  in  Job.  He  uses  a  striking  expression 
also  in  2: 10  that  only  occurs  besides  in  Joel  2:  6,  while 
the  first  clause  of  1:15  is  nearly  word  for  word  the 
same  as  that  of  Isa.  52:7.     Nahum   occupies   one   of 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  207 

the  hii>Iiest  places  in  Hebrew  literature,  while  he  more 
nearl}^  approaches  Isaiah^thaii  ari}^  of  the  other  Pro- 
phets. He  possesses  a  peculiar  power  of  representing 
several  phases  of  an  idea  in  the  briefest  sentences,  as  in 
his  description  of  God,  of  the  conquest  of  Nineveh, 
and  the  capture  of  Thebes. 

As  to  the  date  of  the  composition,  it  must  have  been 
according  to  3:  8-11  after  the  capture  of  Thebes  by 
Asshurbanipal  which  took  place  shortly  after  B.  C. 
664:-,  and  on  the  other  liand,  as  Nineveh  is  represented 
as  still  standing,  it  must  have  been  before  the  destruc- 
tion of  that  city  by  the  Babylonians  and  Medes  in 
B.  C.  G07. 

VI.  Historical.— The  historical  occasion  of  Nahnm's 
prophecy  was  the  approaching  fall  of  Nineveh.  On 
account  of  its  great  wickedness  and  corruption  Nahum 
predicts  the  fall  of  the  Assyrian  capital.  This  took 
place  not  long  thereafter  when  a  coalition  of  Necho, 
King  of  Egypt,  Cyaxares,  King  of  Media,  Nabopo- 
lassar.  King  of  Babylon,  was  formed  against  Assyria, 
and  tlie  Medes  and  Babylonians,  after  defeating  the 
Assyrian  forces,  laid  siege  to  Nineveh  which  after  two 
years  capitulated. 

VII.  Division  and  Contents.— 1.  Ch.  1.  The  ai3- 
pearance  of  Jehovah  in  judgment;  his  faithfulness 
toward  those  who  are  faithful  to  him;  the  description 
of  the  coming  fall  and  irretrievable  destruction  of  the 
Assyrian  capital. 

2.  Ch.  2.  Description  of  the  assault  upon  Nineveh, 
the  entrance  effected,  the  scenes  of  carnage  and  tumult 
that  follow,  the  flight  of  the  inhabitants,  and  the  sub- 
sequent deserted  and  silent  condition  of  the  city. 

3.  Ch.    3.      Nineveh's    cruelty,    avarice,    insidious 


208  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

policy,  corrni)tion,  the  cause  of  liei'  own  ruin.  Jeho- 
vah is  against  her;  overthrow  awaits  her;  and  amid 
the  rejoicings  of  those  who  have  suffered  by  her,  her 
empire  shall  forever  pass  ^way. 

VIII.  Theolog-y.— The  theological  teaching   of   Na- 
hum  emphasizes 

1.  God's  moral  government  of  the  world. 

2.  The  certain  destruction    of     this    world's    king- 
doms built  on  the  foundation  of  force  and  falsehood. 

3.  The  certain  triumph  of  the  Kingdom  of  God  up- 
built on  the  foundation  of  truth  and  righteousness. 


HABAKKUK. 

I.  ^aine,—Hahakkook  =  Habakkuk  =  Embraced. 
The  Book  is  so  called  from  the  name  of  its  author. 

II.  Biography  and  Ministry.— Habakkuk  belonged 
to  the  Kingdom  of  Judah.  He  flourished  and  pvo- 
phesied  during  the  reign  of  Jehoiakim,  and  towards 
the  beginning  of  the  Chaldean  supremacy,  i.  e.  B.  C. 
608-590.  Nothing  is  known,  outside  of  apocryphal 
sources,  of  the  personal  history  of  this  prophet,  and 
his  prophecy  gives  us  no  information  respecting  him- 
self. The  subject  of  his  prophecy  is  the  overthrow  of 
Judah  by  the  Chaldeans,  and  then,  in  turn,  the  over- 
throw of  the  Chaldean  monarchy, — each  power  for  its 
sins. 

III.  Composition.— Some  modern  critics  maintain 
that  Chs.  1 : 1-2 :  8  is  the  only  part  of  the  Book  which 

^is  to  be  assigned  to  Habakkuk;  that  2 :  9-20  is  an  ad- 
dition of  post-exilic  times;  and  Ch.  3  a  prayer  of  the 


INTKODUCTION    OUTLINES.  209 

post-exilic  congregation  in  time  of  distress,  possibly 
written  by  the  author  of  2 :  9-20,  or  taken  from  some 
Psalm-collection  used  in  the  TemiDle.  But  against 
this  position,  the  unity  of  the  Book,  and  its  author- 
ship by  the  prophet  Habakkuk,  are  both  generally  ad- 
mitted, on  account  of  the  close  relation  between  the 
several  parts,  the  progress  of  the  thought  throughout, 
and  the  organic  connection  of  the  whole.  As  to  the 
date  of  the  composition  of  the  prophecy,  the  balance 
of  probability  favors  a  date  shortly  before  the  defeat 
of  Pharaoh-Necho  at  Carchemish,  B.  C.  605,  by  which 
defeat  the  supremacy  of  the  Chaldeans  was  assured. 
IV.  Historical.— The  historical  occasion  of  Habak- 
kuk's  prophecy  was  the  rise  of  the  Chaldean  power, 
and  its  employment  by  Jehovah  as  an  instrument  to 
inflict  deserved  chastisement  upon  ungodly  Judah. 
When  the  reformer-king,  Josiah,  fell  in  the  fatal  battle 
of  Megiddo,  the  hopes  of  Judah  perished.  Passing  over 
his  eldest  son  Jehoiakim,  the  people  made  Jehoahaz 
king.  After  a  reign  of  only  three  months,  Jehoahaz 
was  dei^osed  by  Pharaoh-Necho,  who  was  now  for  a 
short  time  supreme  over  the  countries  from  the 
Euphrates  to  the  Nile.  Necho  placed  Jehoiakim  on 
the  throne  instead  of  Jehoahaz.  Jehoiakim  was  sel- 
fish, despotic,  godless.  The  nobles  all  too  willingly 
followed  Jehoiakim's  example,  so  that  in  a  short  time 
the  old  evils  of  Manasseh's  reign  broke  out  afresh. 
In  the  meantime  the  Chaldeans  were  mustering  and 
marching  threateningly  in  the  nortli .  Reports  of  their 
fierceness  and  resistlessuess  reached  Jerusalem.  Fear 
and  doubt  settled  on  many  a  mind  and  heart  in  Judah. 
AYould  a  righteous  God  permit  such  an  insatiable  in- 
[13J 


210  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

vader  to  overwhelm  Judah  ?  At  such  a  critical 
moment  Habakkuk  appears  upon  the  scene  with  his 
proi)hetic  message. 

V.  Divisions  and  Contents.— 1.  Ch.  1.  a.  vv.  2-4. 
Habakkuk  expostulates  with  Jehovah  for  permitting 
evil  to  go  so  long  unchecked  in  Judah.  b.  vv.  5-11. 
Jehovah  replies  by  pointing  to  and  describing  the 
Chaldeans  whom  he  has  raised  up  to  chastise  the 
guilty  nation,  c.  vv.  12-17.  Habakkuk  is  amazed 
that  Jehovah  can  use  as  his  instruments  those  cruel 
Chaldeans. 

2.  Ch.  2.  a.  vv.  1-4.  In  answer  to  Habakkuk's  chal- 
lenge of  the  divine  rectitude,  Jehovah  declares  that 
the  Chaldeans  carry  in  themselves  the  seed  of  their 
own  ruin,  while  the  righteous  possess  the  principle  of 
life.  h.  vv.  5-20.  The  truth  that  the  Chaldean  bears 
in  himself  the  germ  of  his  own  ruin  is  expanded  and 
proven  in  the  description  of  the  Chaldean's  drunken- 
ness, ambition,  lust  for  conquest,  cruelty,  injustice, 
bloodshed,  despotism,  intrigue,  idolatry,  c.  Verse  20 
contrasts  the  living  God  with  heathen  idols,  and  so 
forms  the  transition  to 

3.  Ch.  3.  a.  V.  2.  Habakkuk  has  heard  the  an- 
nouncement of  God's  judgment  on  Israel,  and  the  final 
doom  of  the  Chaldeans.  But  the  prophet  fears  that 
a  delay  of  the  latter  will  prove  too  severe  a  test  of 
faith,  and  therefore  prays  that  the  time  may  be  short- 
ened, h.  vv.  3-15.  The  answer  to  the  prophet's 
prayer  is  given  in  the  fuller  revelation  of  Jehovah's 
working  in  the  world,  which  is  expressed  by  the  de- 
scription of  His  Advent  to  redeem  his  ijeople  and 
judge  their  enemies,     c.  vv.   16-19.     Meditating  upon 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


211 


this  transcendent  Theophany  the  prophet  determines 
to  rejoice  and  rest  all  assurance  in  Jehovah. 

VI.  Theology.— The  Apostle  Paul  has  adopted  the 
second  clause  of  Hab.  2 :  4,  as  one  of  the  watchwords 
of  his  theology,— "  But  the  just  shall  live  by  his 
faith,"  or  "  in  his  faithfulness."  The  essence  of  Ha- 
bakkuk's  theology  is 

1.  Faith  in  God  and  his  supreme  government. 

2.  Patience  in  waiting  on  God  and  his  working. 

3.  Rejoicing  in  God  alway. 

VII.  Messianic— The  Messianic  element  in  Ha- 
bakknk  appears  for  the  most  part  in  2:  4,  14  and  Ch. 
3,  setting  forth  the  righteous  life,  the  coming  glory, 
and  the  advent  of  Jehovah  for  the  redemption  of  his 
people. 


ZEPHANIAH. 

I.  Name.- >Se/an?/a/i  =  Zephaniah=  Whom  Jeho- 
vah hid.     The  Book  derives  its  name  from  its  author. 

II.  Biography  and  Ministry.  —  Zephaniah,  who 
lived  in  the  Chaldean  period,  belonged  to  the  King- 
dom of  Judah.  According  to  the  superscription,  1:1, 
he  was  the  great-grandson  of  Amariah,  who  was  the 
son  of  Hezekiah.  This  Hezekiah  was  probably  King 
Hezekiah,  which  would  make  Zephaniah  belong  to  the 
royal  family.  He  probably  lived  and  ministered  in 
Jerusalem.  Zephaniah's  prophetic  ministry  falls  be- 
tween B.  C.  639-609,  and  during  the  reign  of  Josiah. 
He  was  a  contemporary  of  Jeremiah. 

III.  Composition.— Zephaniah  is  generally  conceded 


212  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

to  be  the  author  of  the  Book  bearing  his  name.  As  to 
the  date  of  the  composition  of  Zephaniah's  prophecy, 
it  doubtless  belongs  to  the  beginning  of  Josiah's  reign, 
and  before  the  great  reformation  effected  by  that  king. 
From  allusions  to  the  condition  of  morals  and  religion 
in  Judah  in  1:  4-6,  8,  9,  12;  3:  1-3,  7,  it  may  be  con- 
cluded with  certainty  that  the  period  of  Josiah's  reign 
during  which  Zephaniah  wrote  was  prior  to  the  great 
reformation  of  his,  Josiah's  eighteenth  year  (B.  C. 
621),  in  which  the  idolatrous  practices  condemned  by 
Zephaniah  were  abolished  by  Josiah.  The  design  of 
Zephaniah's  prophecy  is  to  announce  God's  judgment, 
and  the  moral  condition  that  necessitated  it. 

IV.  Historical.— The  historical  occasion  of  Zeph- 
aniah's prophecy  seems  to  have  been  the  irruption  of 
those  mysterious,  marauding  hordes  of  Scythians  who 
poured  down  over  Western  Asia  from  the  steppes  of 
the  North,  spreading  consternation  and  devastation  in 
their  path.  As  Joel  saw  the  locust  plague  to  be  a  vis- 
itation of  judgment  from  Jehovah,  so  Zephaniah  viewed 
the  desolating  invasion  of  the  Scythians.  It  was  a 
visitation  wiierein  Jehovah  was  umnifesting  his  power, 
judging  the  nations,  and  summoning  his  people  to  re- 
pentance. 

V.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  Book  has  a  three- 
fold division. 

1.  Ch.  1.  The  menace.  The  prophecy  opens  with 
an  announcment  of  far-reaching  destruction,  but  es- 
pecially directed  against  the  idolaters  in  Judah  and 
Jerusalem.  Jehovah's  day  of  sacrifice  is  at  hand;  the 
victims,  the  Jewish  people,  and  nations  the  "sancti- 
fied" (1  Sam.  16:  o),  invited  guests.  Three  classes  to 
be  judged  ; — court  officials,  merchants  and  those  sunk 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  213 

in  irreligious  indifferentism.     The  "Day  of  eTehovah  " 
further  developed  and  described. 

2.  Chs.  2:1-3:7.  The  admonition.  The  prophet 
urges  his  people  to  repent  and  so  escape  the  doom 
which  will  overtake,  he  declares,  in  succession  the 
Philistines,  Moab,  Ammon,  Ethiopia,  Nineveh.  Then 
again  the  prophet  turns  again  to  address  Jerusalem, 
describe  her  sins,  and  her  heedlessness  to  warning. 

3.  Ch.  3:8-20.  The  promise.  The  prophet  exhorts 
the  faithful  in  Jerusalem  to  wait  patiently  on  Jehovah 
whom  all  nations  will  yet  serve,  while  the  faithful, 
cleaving  to  God,  will  dwell  in  safety  upon  their 
own  land,  and  be  made  to  rejoice  in  the  coming  restor- 
ation of  Jehovah's  presence. 

VI.  Theology.— Zei^haniah  emphasizes  the  supreme 
lesson  that  Jehovah  is  King  and  Judge;  that  judg- 
ment is  impending ;  and  that  judgment  will  be  uni- 
versal. Force  and  violence  are  temporary ;  truth  and 
righteousness  shall  abide.  Out  of  the  fury  and  fall 
of  world  empires  the  faithful  remnant  shall  see  estab- 
lished the  universal  empire  of  Jehovah. 

VII.  Messianic— Zephaniah  has  no  prophecy  of  a 
distinct  personal  Messiah.  Jehovah  is  the  Saviour. 
He  will  effect  redemption.  The  terrible  judgments 
impending  will  issue  in  salvation  for  Israel  and  the 
world.  The  Messianic  element  in  Zephaniah's  pro- 
phecy, contained  for  the  most  part  in  3 : 8-20,  is  re- 
markable as  containing  a  prediction  of  the  conversion 
not  only  of  tiie  heathen  nations,  but  even  of  those 
who  execute  the  divine  judgments  ui)on  Israel. 


214  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


HAGGAI. 

I.  Name.  -Haggai  =  Festal.  The  Book  derives  its 
name  from  its  author. 

II.  Biography  and  Ministry.— Haggai,  like  Zech- 
ariah  and  Malachi,  lived  and  ministered  in  the  Post- 
Exilian  period.  The  date  of  his  ministry  Haggai 
states  very  definitely  in  1 : 1  where  he  declares  that 
the  word  of  the  Lord  came  to  him  on  the  first  day  of 
the  sixth  month  of  the  second  year  of  the  reign  of 
Darius  (Hyslaspis),  B.  C.  520.  All  the  other  com- 
mnnications  belong  also  to  the  second  year  of  the  reign 
of  Darius,  and  fall  w  ithin  the  limits  of  four  months. 
Apart  from  his  prophecy,  Haggai  is  mentioned  in 
Ezra  5:1,  2  as  prophesying  to  the  Jews  while  they 
were  rebuilding  the  temple,  after  the  return  from 
Babylon  in  the  second  year  of  Darius,  and  as  helping 
Zerubbabel  and  Joshua  the  son  of  Jehozadak,  the 
high  priest,  in  their  work.  Haggai  and  Zechariah 
were  contemporaries  in  the  prophetic  ministry.  Com- 
pare Hag.  1 : 1  and  Zech.  1:1. 

III.  Composition.— Haggai  is  generally  conceded  to 
be  the  author  of  the  Book  bearing  his  liame.  His 
style  is  simjjle,  pi-actical,  and  goes  directly  to  the 
point.  His  prophetic  message  is  addressed  to  the  re- 
stored captives,  and  its  design  is  to  incite  them  to  duty 
and  encourage  them  in  duty,  particularly  in  the  mat- 
ter of  rebuilding  the  temple, — their  national  sanctuary 
and  living  evidence  of  their  national  religion. 

IV.  Historical.— The  decree  of  Cyrus  permitting 
the  Jew^s  to  return  to  their  own  land  (EzraCh.  1),  and 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  215 

to  rebuild  the  temple  at  Jerusalem,  was  followed  by 
the  joyful  compliance  of  a  considerable  number,  some 
50,000  in  all,  who  set  out  to  return  to  their  Holy  Land. 
The  leaders  of  the  returnin.2:  exiles  were  Zerubbabel 
the  son  of  Shealtiel,  and  Joshua  the  son  of  Jehozadak. 
Zerubbabel,  as  the  actual  or  legal  heir  of  Jehoiachin, 
was  the  representative  of  the  house  of  David,  and  had 
been  appointed  governor  of  Judah  by  Cyrus  (Ezr. 
5:14).  Joshua,  who  held  the  office  of  High  Priest, 
was  grandson  of  Seraiah,  the  last  High  Priest  who  had 
ministered  in  the  Temple  at  Jerusalem  before  its  de- 
struction. The  work  of  rebuilding  began  with  the 
erection  of  the  altar  in  its  ancient  place,  and  the  com- 
mencement of  the  erection  of  the  Temple.  But  with 
the  death  of  Cyrus  the  emigration  of  exiles  to  Judah 
ceased,  and  under  the  reign  of  some  of  the  successors 
of  Cyrus,  particularly  Cambyses  and  Pseudo-Smerdis, 
the  work  on  the  Temple  and  city  was  suspended. 
Great  obstacles  to  the  continuance  and  completion  of 
the  work  were  encountered,  owing  to  the  jealousies  of 
the  inhabitants  of  Samaria  and  Edom,  and  constant 
misrepresentations  at  the  court  of  Persia.  Ezra  Ch.  4. 
So  for  some  fifteen  years  the  w^ork  of  rebuilding  was 
arrested,  till  in  the  second  year  of  the  reign  of  Darius 
it  was  resumed  under  the  prophetic  ministry  of  Haggai 
and  Zechariah. 

V.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  prophecy  of  Hag- 
gai consists  of  four  sections,  communications,  arranged 
chronologically. 

1.  Ch.  1.  In  the  second  yenr  of  Darius,  the  first 
day  of  the  sixth  month,  Ha<2gai  appeals  to  the 
people  no  longor  to  postpone  the  work  of  rebuilding 
the  Temple,  declares  that  the  failure  of  their  crops  is 


216  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

due  to  their  having  failed  to  rebuild  the  house  of  the 
Lord,  and  that  the  pleasure  and  presence  of  Jehovah 
will  attend  them  in  performing  this  work. 

2.  Ch.  2: 1-9.  In  the  same  year  on  the  twenty-first 
day  of  the  seventh  month  the  prophet  again  addresses 
the  people  with  words  of  encouragement  assuring  them 
that  this  second  temple,  though  inferior  in  splendor  to 
the  first,  shall  have  greater  glory  than  it,  and  that  Jeho- 
vah will  shake  all  nations,  and  the  most  excellent  of  the 
nations  shall  come  to  it,  and  the  house  shall  be  filled 
with  glory.     Comp.  Heb.  12:  26,  27. 

3.  Ch.  2:10-19.  In  the  same  year  on  the  twenty- 
fourth  day  of  the  ninth  month  the  iDroi^het  addresses 
the  priests  declaring  that  so  long  as  the  Temple  re- 
mains unbuilt  the  people  are  unclean,  and  hence  the 
seasons  are  unfruitful. 

4.  Ch.  2:  20-23.  On  the  same  day,  Haggai  encour- 
ages Zerubbabel,  the  civil  head  of  the  restored  com- 
munity, and  representative  of  David's  line,  with  the 
assurance  that  in  the  approaching  overthrow  of  the 
thrones  and  kingdoms  of  the  earth,  he  will  receive 
special  tokens  of  Jehovah's  favor. 

VI.  Theology  and  Messianic— The  theological 
teachings  of  Haggai  emphasizes 

1.  The  obedience  of  Jehovah's  people  will  ever  se- 
cure Jehovah's  cooperation. 

2.  Jehovah  will  overrule  all  convulsions  among  the 
nations  of  the  earth  to  effect  his  i^urposes,  and  bring 
in  his  reign  of  peace. 

The  Messianic  portion  is  contained  in  Ch.  2:6-9, 
21-23  wherein  Haggai  predicts  that  heaven  and  earth 
will  be  shaken;  kingdoms  overthrown;  instruments 
of  war  destroyed ;  nations  bring  their  treasures  to  the 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  217 

house  of  Jehovah,  whose  latter  glory  will  be  made 
greater  than  the  former ;  Avhile  Zerubbabel,  the  ser- 
vant of  Jehovah,  will  become  His  signet,  according  to 
which  it  is  evident  that  the  Jewish  governor  is  made 
a  type  of  Christ. 


ZECHARIAH. 

I.  ^Same.—Zecharyah  =  Zechariah  =  Whom  Jeho- 
vah remembers.  The  Book  derives  its  name  from  its 
author. 

II.  Biography.— According  to  1 :  1  of  his  prophecy 
Zechariah  was  the  son  of  Berechiah,  the  son  of  Iddo. 
From  Neh.  12:16  it  appears  that  Zechariah  was  a 
priest,  and  that  he  went  up  from  Babylon  to  Jerusa- 
lem with  Zernbbabel.  In  Ezra  5 : 1,  2  he  is  spoken  of 
as  prophesying  along  with  Haggai,  and  aiding  in  the 
rebuilding  of  the  Temple.  In  this  passage  he  is  called 
simply  Iddo,  probably  because  his  father  was  already 
dead  when  Ezra  wrote,  and  his  grandfather  was  his 
nearest  living  ancestor.  Zechariah  lived  and  minis- 
tered between  B.  C.  520-510.  How  much  longer  he 
lived,  and  whether  his  prophetic  ministry  extended 
over  a  greater  period  than  four  or  five  years,  is  not 
known.  Haggai  was  Zechariah's  contemporary  i)ro- 
phet ;  Joshua  was  High  Priest ;  Zerubbabel  was  gov- 
ernor of  the  restored  communitj^  of  Jews  in  Judah ; 
Tattenai  was  general  Persian  governor  of  the  pro- 
vince ;  and  Darius  was  King. 

III.  Ministry.— According  to  2 : 1  Zechariah  was  a 
young  man  when  he  was  called  to  the  prophetic  office. 


218  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

In  the  beginning  of  his  prophecy  he  states  that  the 
word  of  the  Lord  came  to  him  in  the  eighth  month  of 
the  second  year  of  Darins,  two  months  after  Haggai 
received  his  first  divine  communication.  Besides  this 
Zechariah  gives  two  other  dates  of  divine  communica- 
tions, vis.  the  twenty-fourth  day  of  the  eleventh  month 
in  the  same  year  (Ch.  1:7),  and  the  fourth  day  of  the 
ninth  month  of  the  fourth  year  of  Darius  (Ch.  7:1); 
— these  years  were  B.  C.  520  and  518.  As  in  the  case 
of  Haggai,  so  with  Zechariah,  the  first,  local,  present 
and  practical  object  of  their  preaching  was  to  incite 
and  encourage  the  people  in  rebuilding  the  Temple 
service.  This  preaching  of  these  two  prophets  had  its 
desii-rd  effect.  The  rebuilding  af  the  Temple  pro- 
gressed rapidly.  Tattenai,  the  Persian  governor,  re- 
fei'red  the  matter  of  the  rebuilding  to  Darius,  but  did 
not  interfere  with  the  work.  The  reference  to  Darius 
led  to  the  discoverj^  of  the  decree  of  Cyrus  in  the  ar- 
chives at  Ecbatana;  and  Darius  issued  a  decree  direct- 
ing Tattenai  to  furnish  materials  for  the  work,  and  to 
provide  the  Jews  with  animals  and  other  requisites  for 
sacrifice.  In  less  than  four  and  a  half  years  from  the 
recommencement  of  the  work  the  Temple  was  com- 
pleted and  dedicated  on  the  third  day  of  the  twelfth 
month  of  the  sixth  year  of  Darius,  B.  C.  516.  But  it 
must  be  remembered  that  while  Haggai  and  Zechariah 
in  the  exercise  of  their  prophetic  ministry  directed 
their  words  and  efforts  primarily  to  the  rebuilding  of  the 
Temple,  and  the  restoration  of  the  Temple  service,  still  it 
was  by  nomeans  with  a  formal,  ceremonial,  unspiritual 
conception  of  that  service,  and  by  no  means  in  any 
spirit  of  national  exclusiveness  and  religious  bigotrj'. 
These  prophets  themselves  predicted  that  the  glory  of 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  219 

that  Temple  was  to  be  its  catholicity.  They  saw  not 
only  the  nations  of  their  time  bringing  offeiings  for  the 
rebuilding  of  that  Temple,  bnt  like  Isaiah  and  Micah, 
they  saw  all  the  nations  of  the  future  flowing  thither 
to  the  worship  of  Jehovah.  There  in  that  place  they 
saw  was  to  be  consummated  the  final  reconciliation  of 
man  to  God  and  man  to  man.  Looking  forward  to 
that  coming  Messianic  reconciliation  Haggai  preaches, 
"In  this  place  will  I  give  peace,  saith  Jehovah  of 
hosts."  And  Zechariah  points  the  finger  of  prophecy 
forward,  beyond  the  material  temple  of  Zerubbabel, 
to  the  glorious  outline  of  a  spiritual  Temple,  which 
the  priestly  King  of  David's  line  will  build. 

IV.  Authorship— Date.— Zechariah  is  the  author  of 
the  entire  Book  that  bears  his  name;  it  is  generally 
conceded  that  this  Zecliariah  is  the  author  of  Chs. 
1-8.  In  more  modern  times,  however,  the  authorship 
and  date  of  Chs.  9-14  have  been  violently  assailed. 
Concerning  the  origin  of  these  chapters  three  princi- 
pal hypotheses  obtain,  viz.: 

1.  The  traditional  view.  According  to  this  view 
the  Book  of  Zechariah  is  a  unit,  and  was  wiitten  by 
Zechariah,  the  contemporary  of  Zerubbabel. 

2.  This  view  ascribes  Chs.  9-14  to  a  pre-exilic 
origin.  That  is,  Chs.  9-11  were  written  shortly  be- 
fore the  downfall  of  Samaria  ?22  B.  C,  and  Chs.  12- 
14  before  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  586  B.  C. 

3.  The  Post-Zecharian  hypothesis.  This  ascribes 
Chs.  9-14  to  a  late  Persian  or  an  early  Greek  or  Mac- 
cabean  date. 

Some  of  the  principal  objections  to  the  arguments 
adduced  in  support  of  the  second  hypothesis  are  as 
follows : 


220  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

1.  The  exile  in  both  parts  of  the  Book  of  Zechariah 
is  represented  as  a  fact,  an  event  of  the  past,  and  the 
restoration  from  the  exile  both  of  Ephraira  and  Jndah, 
though  incomplete,  has  already  begnn. 

2.  The  alleged  authors  of  Zechariah  Chs.  9-14  dis- 
sociate themselves  from  any  definitely  named  person, 
or  any  specific  event,  known  to  be  pre-exilic. 

3.  If  Chs.  9-14  were  of  pre-exilic  origin  then  cer- 
tain passages  in  these  chapters  would  entirely  fail  to 
be  understood  by  a  people  standing  face  to  face  with 
the  calamities  of  722  and  586  B.  C.  Thus  there  is  no 
reference  to  an  approaching  army  or  to  alljdng  with 
foreigners,  while  victory  and  prosperity  are  promised 
rather  than  defeat  and  calamity  announced. 

4.  The  historical  allusions  in  Chs.  9-14  point  rather 
to  post-exilic  than  pre-exilic  times. 

5.  The  names  given  to  the  Theocracy  in  Chs.  9-14 
do  not  imi)ly  a  pre-exilic  date  for  the  entire  section, 
for  Israel  and  Judah  were  both  represented  in  the 
post-exilic  congregation,  and  as  7iames,  were  both 
applicable  to  the  post-exilic  Theocracy. 

6.  The  national  sins  according  to  Chs.  9-14  are 
spoken  of  as  having  been  committed  in  the  past,  be- 
fore the  exile,  and  which  now  Israel  was  exhorted  not 
to  repeat.  The  enemies  of  Israel  mentioned  in  Chs. 
9-14  do  not  fix  the  date  of  these  prophecies  as  being 
pre-exilic. 

7.  The  point  to  which  the  Messianic  development 
has  reached  in  Chs.  9-14  indicates  a  post-exilic  rather 
than  a  pre-exilic  date.  Thus  in  regard  to  the  Messianic 
person,  e.  g.  Ch.  9:9,  10;  11:12,  13;  12:10  sq. ;  13:7. 
Again  in  regard  to  the  Messianic  times  or  Zechariah's 
Eschatology.     The  description  of  the  incorporation  of 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  2'21 

the  heathen  world  into  the  Kingdom  of  God  in  Chs. 
9-14  is  one  of  the  most  remarkable  in  the  Old  Testa- 
ment, and  seems  to  presuppose  all  that  has  gone  be- 
fore. 

8.  The  prophet  Zechariah  in  Chs.  0-14  shows  a 
familiarity  with  Ezekiel  and  Jeremiah  as  well  as  the 
so-called  Deutero-Isaiah. 

Some  of  the  principal  objections  to  the  arguments 
adduced  in  support  of  the  Post-Zecharian  hypothesis 
are  as  follows : 

1.  The  argument  from  language  and  style  favors 
the  Zecharian  rather  than  the  post-Zecharian  author- 
ship. Thus  there  is  a  remarkable  freedom  from  Ara- 
maic expressions.  The  usage  of  the  full  instead  of 
the  shorter  form  of  the  name  David  cannot  be  used  as 
an  argument  inasmuch  as  the  shorter  form  occurs 
also  in  Ecclesiastes  1:1,  probably  the  latest  Book 
in  the  Old  Testament.  The  same  is  true  also  in  re- 
gard to  the  usage  of  the  abbreviated  instead  of  the 
fuller  form  of  the  first  person  pronoun,  when  we  com- 
pare the  similar  usage  in  Lamentations,  Ecclesiastes, 
Esther,  Ezra,  Nehemiah,  1  and  2  Chronicles  and 
Daniel.  The  employment  of  the  Infinitive  absolute 
to  set  forth  the  finite  verb  is  even  more  striking  in 
Haggai  and  Zechariah  Chs.  1-8  than  in  Zechariah 
Chs.  9-14. 

2.  Against  the  argument  from  historical  data  ad- 
duced in  favor  of  a  Greaco-Maccabean  date,  it  is  to  be 
noted, 

That  the  temjjle  was  still  in  process  of  construc- 
tion. This  is  evident  from  the  Messianic  and  Eschato- 
logical  character  of  these  prophecies;  from  the  fact 
that  the  prophet  bases  his  exhortations  for  the  present 


222  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

on  the  history  of  the  past;  from  the  fact  that  the  pro- 
phet makes  Israel's  chief  interests  center  in  Jerusa- 
lem; and  from  the  fact  that  certain  allusions  are  best 
explained  in  these  times. 

In  proof  of  the  Zecharian  authorship  of  Chs.  9-14, 
and  in  further  disproof  of  hypotheses  number  2  and  3 
it  is  to  be  noted: 

1.  The  fundamental  ideas  of  both  parts  of  the  Book 
are  the  same. 

2.  There  are  peculiarities  of  thought  that  are  com- 
mon to  both  parts  of  the  Book. 

3.  Certain  peculiarities  of  diction  and  style  argue 
in  favor  of  the  unity  of  the  Book  and  the  Zecharian 
authorship. 

4.  Chapters  1-8  show  a  familiarit}^  with  the  same 
prophetical  Books  as  Chs.  9-14. 

5.  Chapters  9-14  presuppose  the  exile  not  only  of 
Ephraim[but  also  of  Judah.  Thus  Ch.  9:9,  11,  12, 
where  Judah  is  represented  as  having  been  partly  re- 
stored to  its  land,  and  is  to  expect  more  complete 
restoration.  In  Chs.  1-8  the  representation  is  that  of 
Judah  being  overrun  by  a  foreign  enemy  and  the 
temple  desecrated.  In  9 : 9  Judah  is  represented  as 
being  without  a  king  and  is  therefore  bidden  to  rejoice 
at  the  approaching  advent  of  the  Messianic  King. 

6.  Other  admittedly  exilian  and  post-exilian  pro- 
phets and  writings  seem  also  to  imply  the  still  con- 
tinued existence  of  the  two  kingdoms  as  much  as 
Zechariah  himself.  Thus  e.  g.  note  Jeremiah  31 :  18- 
20,  27,  31.  And  yet  in  spite  of  this,  Ephraim  had 
gone  into  captivity  a  hundred  years  before  this. 

7.  If   Chs.    9-14   belong  to   pre-exilic    times,    how 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  223 

comes  it  that  there  is  no  mention  made  in  them  of  the 
Chaldeans '? 

8.  It  is  trne  that  in  the  last  part  of  the  Book  are 
fonnd  predictions  relative  to  the  captivity  of  Jerusa- 
lem; but  the  entire  description  makes  it  totally  un- 
suitable to  refer  this  to  the  destruction  and  captivity 
of  Jerusalem  by  the  Chaldeans.  It  evidently  refers 
to  times  long  subsequent  to  that  event,  and  is  closely 
connected  with  the  advent  of  the  Messiah. 

V.  Historical.— See  under  III  Ministry. 

VI.  Divisions  and  Contents.— The  Book  of  Zechar- 
iah  is  divided  into  two  parts;  viz.  Parti,  Chs.  1-8, 
and  Part  2,  Chs.  9-14.     Part  1,  Chs.  1-8,  includes 

1.  Ch.  1:6.  Introduction ;  a  warning  voice  from 
the  past. 

2.  Chs.  1:7-6:8.  A  series  of  visions  designed  for 
encouragement  as  to  the  present,  and  instruction  as  to 
the  future;  including — a.  1 :  7-17.  Vision  of  the  divine 
chariots  and  horses  in  the  valle}^  of  myrtles  represent- 
ing a  time  of  peace  and  opportunity  for  rebuilding  the 
city  and  temple,  h.  1:18-21.  Four  horns  symboliz- 
ing the  nations  opposed  to  Israel,  have  their  strength 
broken  by  four  smiths,  c.  Ch.  2.  The  man  with  the 
measuring  line.  The  significance  is  that  the  coming 
Jerusalem  will  be  of  too  wide  an  extent  to  be  confined 
by  walls,  will  have  an  unlimited  population,  will  have 
Jehovah  for  its  defence,  and  many  nations  will  join 
themselves  to  Israel,  d.  Ch.  3.  Joshua,  the  High 
Priest  appears  before  the  altar  burdened  with  the  sins 
of  the  people.  Satan  accuses  him,  but  he  is  acquitted, 
and  given  rule  over  the  Temple,  with  the  right  of 
priestly  access  to  Jehovah.  He  receives  the  promise  of 
the  advent  of  Messiah,  and  restored  blessing,     e.  Ch. 


224  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

4.  The  vision  of  the  golden  candlestick  and  the  two 
olive  trees,  symbolizing  that  all  obstacles  should  be  re- 
moved, and  the  restored  commnnit}-,  the  chosen  people 
of  God,  should  ever  receive  sufficient  supplies  of  divine 
grace.  /.  5 : 1-4.  The  vision  of  the  flying  roll  sym- 
bolizing that  the  swift  curse  of  God  shall  exterminate 
sinners,  and  the  land  should  be  purified,  g.  5:5-11. 
Israel's  guilt,  personified  as  a  woman,  is  cast  into  an 
ephah-measure,  heavily  covered,  transported  to  Baby- 
lonia, where  it  is  to  remain,  as  in  fact  it  did,  idolatry 
having  ceased  in  Israel  with  the  return  from  the  exile. 
h.  6 : 1-8.  The  vision  of  the  fonr  chariots  seems  to  re- 
fer to  the  time  of  the  end,  and  the  execution  of  God's 
judgments  in  the  earth. 

3.  Ch.  6:9-15.  Symbolical  action.  The  prophet  is 
commanded  to  crown  the  High  Priest,  Joshua.  By  this 
act  the  two  offices  of  priest  and  king  were  united  in 
his  person,  and  he  became  the  type  of  One  greater 
than  himself  who  was  still  to  come,  the  royal  priest, 
the  Branch  of  the  house  of  David,  the  Messiah. 

4.  Chs.  7,  8.  Prophecies  didactic  and  predictive; 
didactic  relating  to  present  obedience,  justice,  mercy, 
truth  ;  and  predictive  relating  to  near  and  remote  bless- 
ings. 

Part  2.     Chs.  9-14,  includes 

1.  Ch.  9:1-8.  Surrounding  nations  destroyed; 
Jehovah  protects  his  people;  enemies  shall  no  more 
invade  their  land. 

2.  Chs.  9:9-10:12.  The  humble,  suffering,  peace- 
ful, delivering,  strengthening,  victorious  advent  of  the 
Messianic  King, 

3.  Ch.  11.     An  allegory,  describing  the  rejection  of 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  '^^5 

the  divinely  appointed  Good  Shepherd  by  His  ungrate- 
ful flock,  and  the  fatal  consequences  to  the  flock. 

4.  Chs.  12-14.  Contain  prophecies  respecting 
Judah  and  Jerusalem  and  the  Messiah's  Kingdom. 
They  treat  of  Israel's  restoration,  redemption  and  re- 
establishment  as  God's  centre  for  earthly  and  univer- 
sal blessing.  Judgment,  repentance,  forgiveness  and 
purifying  are  all  secured  to  Israel  through  the  gracious 
work  of  the  Messiah.  The  last  chapter  introduces  the 
universal  peace  and  blessing  and  glory  by  the  personal 
return  of  the  Messiah,.  Jesus  Christ. 

VU.  Theolog-y— Messianic. — Zechariah's  teaching 
emphasizes  especially 

1.  An  obedient,  spiritual  service  of  Jehovah  on  the 
part  of  a  holy  people. 

2.  The  redemption  of  Israel  and  the  nations  through 
the  workings  of  the  spirit  and  grace  of  Jehovah. 

3.  The  final  and  universal  Messianic  sovereignty  of 
Jehov^ah  over  the  whole  earth. 

Messianic  prophecy  in  Zechariah  is  especially  re- 
markable for  its  fulness.     It  treats  of 

1.  Chs.  2,  8.     The  Glory  of  the  New  Jerusalem. 

2.  Chs.  3:8-4:14  and  6:9-15.  The  Coronation  of 
the  Priest-King. 

3.  Chs.  9 :  9 ;  10.     The  King  of  Peace. 

4.  Ch.  11 :  7-14.     The  Rejected  Shepherd. 

5.  Ch.  12: 1-9.     The  Unique  Day. 

6.  Chs.  12 :  10-13 :  9.     The  Smitten  Shepherd. 

7.  Ch.  14.  The  final  Conflict,  Triumph  and  Em- 
pire. 


[14J 


226  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 


MALACHI. 

I.  Name.— Malachi  =  M}^  Messenger.  Probably  a 
contracted  form  of  Malachijah  =  Messenger  of  Jeho- 
vah. So  Abi  (2  Ki.  18:2)  is  contracted  from  Abijah 
(2  Chr.  29:1). 

II.  Biography  and  Ministry.— Respecting  the  per- 
son and  life  of  Malachi,  the  last  of  the  Old  Testament 
prophets,  nothing  is  known  outside  the  Book  that 
bears  his  name.  The  date  oi  Malachi's  ministry  prob- 
ably falls  in  the  year  B.  C.  435-410.  Nehemiah,  cup 
bearer  to  Artaxerxes  at  Susa,  having  heard  that  the 
gates  of  Jerusalem  had  been  burnt,  and  breaches  made 
in  its  walls  (Neh.  1:2,  3),  obtained,  a  few  months 
later,  the  desire  of  his  heart,  viz.  the  permission  of 
Artaxerxes  to  go  to  Jerusalem  and  restore  the  impaired 
city.  Arrived  at  Jerusalem  he  not  only  repaired  the 
walls  and  gates  of  the  city,  but  complaint  having  been 
made  to  him  of  serious  social  evils  and  religious  delin- 
quencies, he  effected  various  radical  reforms.  Then 
Nehemiah  was  recalled  to  the  Persian  Court.  When 
once  more  he  returned  to  Jerusalem,  i.  e.  upon  his 
second  visit  (see  Chronology  under  Ezra),  he  found 
that  many  of  the  reforms  he  had  effected  upon  his  first 
visit  had  been  undone.  Malachi  probably  exercised 
his  prophetic  ministry  during  the  interval  between 
Nehemiah's  first  and  second  visits  to  Jerusalem,  and 
possibly  for  a  time  while  Nehemiah  was  making  his 
second  visit.  This  date  agrees  better  with  the 
terms  of  1 :  8  where  the  allusioji  to  the  governor  points 
to  the  i)resence  of  a  foreign  governor  rather  than  Neh- 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  227 

emiah  who  refused  to  avail  himself  of  his  official  allow- 
ances. Neh.  5 :  14  sq.  Besides,  the  evils  that  Nehe- 
miah  found  on  his  second  visit  are  for  the  most  part 
precisely  the  same  as  those  denounced  by  Malachi. 
Nehemiah  found  selfishness  and  irreverence  on  the 
part  of  the  high  priest;  a  general  neglect  of  the  temple 
service;  a  failure  to  pay  the  tithes;  a  violation  of 
the  Sabbath ;  and  mixed  marriages.  And  so  we  find 
Malachi  denouncing  the  negligence  of  the  priests  and 
people  in  the  matter  of  the  temple  service;  the  rob- 
bery of  God  by  the  withholding  of  tithes  and  offerings ; 
the  divorce  of  Israelite  wives  and  contracting  mar- 
riages with  foreign  women.  Nehemiah  does  not  speak 
of  divorce,  and  Malachi  does  not  speak  of  Saobath 
breaking,  but  otherwise  the  correspondence  is  so  close 
as  to  lead  to  the  conclusion  that  they  belong  to  the 
same  date. 

III.  Composition.— Malachi  is  generally  conceded 
to  be  the  author  of  the  Book  bearing  his  name. 
Standing  midway  between  the  old  age  and  the  new 
age,  Malachi's  style  at  once  bears  a  strong  resemblance 
to  the  manner  of  the  older  prophets,  while  it  also 
bears  marks  of  the  transitional  state.  He  has  peculi- 
arities of  expression.  His  diction  shows  the  decline 
of  poetic  prophecy.  He  is  less  rhetorical  while  being 
none  the  less  argumentative.  His  chief  literary  char- 
acteristic is  a  dialectic  treatment  by  means  of  question 
and  answer.  He  states  briefly  the  truth  that  is  neces- 
sary to  be  enforced ;  then  he  states  the  objection  that 
this  truth  is  lii^ely  to  provoke;  and  finally  he  refutes 
the  objection,  substantiates  his  original  proposition, 
and  pronounces  in  connection  therewith  warning  or 
promise. 


228  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

IV.  Historical.— See  under  II  Biography  and  Min- 
istry. 

V.  Divisions  and  Contents.— Ch.  1 : 1-5.  Malachi 
addresses  Israel.  As  in  the  case  of  his  prophetic  pre- 
decessors, the  basis  of  his  appeal  to  Israel  is  Jehovah's 
relation  to  the  nation,  .  Jehovah  had  loved  them ;  had 
chosen  Jacob  and  rejected  Esau.  The  proof  of  this 
lay  in  the  contrasted  experiences  and  destinies  of 
Israel  and  Edom.  Israel  had  been  restored  to  his  own 
land,  bnt  Edom's  heritage  lay  desolate  beyond  restora- 
tion. 

2.  Chs.  1:6-2:9.  Israel  is  utterly  indifeerent  of 
Jehovah's  love  for  them,  and  utterly  neglectful  of 
Jehovah's  due  from  them.  Hence  Malachi's  prophecy 
consists  largely  of  a  reproof  of  the  sins  of  his  contem- 
poraries. The  first  reproof  is  addressed  to  the  priests. 
They  offered  or  permitted  the  people  to  offer  blemished 
or  unclean  animals  for  sacrifice,  and  so  the  service  of 
Jehovah  had  been  brought  into  contempt.  Still  Jeho- 
vah's name  was  held  in  honor  throughout  the  world, 
and  acceptable  worship  was  being  offered  him  among 
the  Gentiles.  But  these  priests  who  had  corrupted 
themselves  and  the  offerings  were  threatened  with 
curse  and  punishment.  Their  course  had  been  just 
the  opposite  of  the  Levite  as  the  keeper  of  divine 
knowledge  and  the  interpreter  of  the  Law. 

3.  Ch,  2:10-16.  The  prophet's  next  reproof  is  ad- 
dressed to  the  people.  He  denounces  them  on  account 
of  the  heartlessness  and  heinousness  of  their  conduct 
in  divorcing  their  Israelite  wives,  and  contracting  for- 
eign marriages. 

4.  Chs.  2:17-3:6.  There  were  sceptics  among  the 
people  who  denied  the  divine  government  and  justice, 


INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES.  2'29 

and  who  doubted  whether  God  would  ever  come  to 
judge  betw^een  the  evil  and  the  good.  To  these  scep- 
tics the  prophetic  message  is  addressed  that  the  time 
speedily  approaches  when  Jehovah,  the  Judge  whom 
they  thoughtlessly  seek  shall  suddenly  come  to  his 
temple  in  the  person  of  the  Angel  of  the  Covenant. 
He  will  separate  between  the  righteous  and  unrighteous, 
and  purify  the  ungodly  nation. 

5.  Ch.  3 :  7-21  (3 :  7-4 :  3).  They  had  robbed  God  by 
withholding  tithes  and  offerings,  and  so  had  been 
visited  of  God  with  a  judgment  upon  their  lands  and 
products.  But  a  blessing  was  promised  in  the  future 
if  they  would  faithfully  discharge  these  duties  in  a 
God-fearing  service.  They  complained  that  it  was 
vain  to  serve  God.  But  the  time  would  come  when 
God  would  discriminate  between  those  who  served  him 
and  those  who  served  him  not.  Destruction  would  be 
the  portion  of  the  one,  blessing  and  triumph  the 
portion  of  the  other. 

6.  Ch.  3:22-24  (4:4-6).  The  prophecy  concludes 
with  an  appeal  to  obey  the  requirements  of  the  Mosaic 
Law,  and  with  a  promise  of  the  advent  of  Elijah  the 
prophet  to  move  the  people  to  repentance  against  the 
day  of  Jehovah,  and  so  avert  the  curse  which  other- 
wise might  smite  the  earth. 

VI.  Theology  and  Messianic— The  theological  doc- 
trines emphasized  by  Malachi  are 

1.  Jehovah's  love  for  his  people. 

2.  Jehovah's  requirement  of  supreme  obedience. 

3.  Jehovah  cometfc. 

The  Messianic  element  in  Malachi  is  contained  in  its 
closing  section,  viz.  2:17-3:24  (2:17-4:6).  Both 
treat   of    the   coming   of    the   messenger,    the   second 


'^30  INTRODUCTION    OUTLINES. 

Elijah,  to  prepare  the  way  for  the  coming  of  the  Lord, 
himself  the  Angel  of  the  Covenant.  The  messenger 
who  should  come  and  prepare  the  way  for  the  advent 
of  the  Lord  in  3:1,  is  one  and  the  same  with  Elijah 
the  prophet  in  3:  23  (4:  5),  the  mediator  between  the 
old  and  the  new,  the  herald  of  the  day  of  judgment, 
and  this  messenger  and  second  Elijah,  was,  according 
to  our  Lord's  teachings,  John  the  Baptist.  In  teach- 
ing us  that  Jchn  is  the  messenger  of  3:1%  and  the 
second  Elijah,  Christ  teaches  us  also  that  he  himself 
is  the  Lord,  Jehovah,  and  the  Angel  of  the  Covenant. 
The  messenger  of  3:1"  is  to  be  distinguished  from  the 
messenger  the  Angel  of  the  Covenant  of  3:  1''.  As  the 
Angel  of  Jehovah  was  strictly  Jehovah  himself  to  Israel 
of  old,  so  the  Angel  of  the  Covenant  is  the  Lord, 
Jehovah,  Messiah  who  cometh  for  judgment  and  for 
me  rev. 


LITERATURE    AND    AUTHORITIES.  231 


LITERATURE 


AND 


AUTHORITIES  CONSULTED. 

(PARTIAL   LIST.) 


Introduction, 

Davidson's  Introduction  to  the  Old  Testament. 

Keil's  Introduction  to  the  Old  Testament. 

Home's  Introduction  to  the  Holy  Scriptures. 

Bleek's  Introduction  to  the  Old  Testament. 

Harman's  Introduction  to  the  Holy  Scriptures. 

Driver's  Introduction  to  the  Literature  of  the  Old  Testament. 

The  Commentaries,  etc.,  etc. 

Philology. 

See  Introduction  above. 
Schaff's  Theological  Propaedeutic. 
Weidner's  Exegetical  Theology. 
Bissell's  Biblical  Antiquities. 
Clarke's  Shemitic  Alphabets. 
By-Paths  of  Bible  Knowledge  (Series). 
Briggs'  Biblical  Study. 
Bible  Cyclopaedias,  etc. 

Criticism. 

Green's  Moses  and  the  Prophets. 

Green's  Higher  Criticism  of  the  Pentateuch. 

Green's  Unity  of  Genesis. 

Green's  Hebrew  Feasts. 


232  LITERATURE   AND   AUTHORITIES. 

Bissell's  The  Pentateuch,  its  Origin  and  Structure. 
Bissell's  Genesis  in  Colors. 
Davidson's  and  Driver's  Introductions. 
Briggs'  Higher  Criticism  of  the  Hexateuch. 
Anti-Higher  Criticism  by  different  writers. 
Sayce's  Higher  Criticism  and  the  Monuments. 
Zenos'  Elements  of  Higher  Criticism,  etc. 

Commentaries. 

(On  the  whole  or  greater  portions  of  the  Old  Testament.) 
Keil  and  Delitzsch. 
Lange. 

Speaker's  Commentary. 
Pulpit  Commentary. 
Expositor's  Bible. 
OreUi. 

Cambridge  Bible  for  Schools  and  Colleges. 
Ellicott. 
Hengstenberg. 
Pusey. 

(On  separate  Old  Testament  Books.) 
Delitzsch  Commentar  liber  die  Genesis. 
Jacobus  on  Genesis. 
C.  H.  H.  Wright  on  Genesis. 
J.  G.  Murphy  on  Genesis,  Exodus  and  Leviticus. 
Bush  on  Exodus. 
Hengstenberg  on  Exodus. 
Ginsburg  on  Leviticus. 
Kalisch  on  the  Prophecies  of  Balaam. 
On  Numbers  and  Deuteronomy,  see 
Keil,  Lange  and  Schaff. 
Crosby  on  Joshua. 
Bush  on  Judges. 
Cassell  on  Judges  and  Ruth. 
Morison  on  Ruth. 
Wright's  Ruth  in  Hebrew. 
Driver's  Hebrew  Text  of  Samuel. 
Edersheim's  The  Temple. 
Edersheim's  Israel  under  Samuel,  Saul  and  David. 


LITERATURE   AND    AUTHORITIES.  233 

Stanley's  Sinai  and  Palestine. 

Stanley's  Lectures  on  the  History  of  the  Jewish  Church. 

Krummacher's  Elijah  and  Elisha. 

Ryle  on  Ezra. 

Hunter's  After  The  Exile. 

Haley  on  Esther. 

Lewis  on  Job. 

Davidson  on  Job. 

Cox  on  Job. 

Dillmann  on  Job. 

Perowne  on  The  Psalms. 

DeWitt  on  The  Psalms. 

Hengstenberg  on  The  Psalms. 

Ewald  on  The  Psalms. 

Stuart  on  The  Proverbs. 

Arnot  on  The  Proverbs. 

Cheyne  on  The  Proverbs. 

Hengstenberg  on  Ecclesiastes. 

Stuart  on  Ecclesiastes. 

Ginsburg  on  Ecclesiastes. 

Cheyne  on  Ecclesiastes. 

Wright  on  The  Book  of  Koheleth. 

Stuart  on  The  Song  of  Songs. 

Ewald  on  The  Song  of  Songs. 

Ginsburg  on  The  Song  of  Songs. 

Delitzsch  on  The  Canticles. 

Alexander  on  Isaiah. 

Ewald  on  Isaiah. 

Cheyne  on  Isaiah. 

Smith,  Orelli  and  other  general  Commentaries  on  Jeremiah 
and  The  Lamentations. 

Cowles  on  Ezekiel  and  Daniel. 

Fairbairn  on  Ezekiel. 

Hengstenberg  on  Ezekiel. 

Hitzig  on  Ezekiel. 

Stuart  on  Daniel. 

Pusey  on  Daniel. 

Wuensche's  Hosea. 

Drake  on  Jonah  and  Hosea. 


234  LITERATURE   AND   AUTHORITIES. 

Credner  on  Joel. 

See  general  Commentaries  on  Amos. 

Caspar!  on  Obadiah. 

Randolph's  Obadiah  and  Habakkuk. 

Fairbairn's  Jonah. 

Martin's  Jonah. 

W.  Wright's  Jonah. 

Caspari  and  general  Commentaries  on  Micah. 

See  the  general  Commentaries  on  Nahum,  Habakkuk  and 
Zephaniah. 

Moore,  Wright,  Kohler  and  general  Commentaries  on  Hag- 
gai,  Zechariah  and  Malachi. 

(These  separate  Commentaries  are  in  addition  to  the  general 
and  standard  Commentaries  mentioned  above. ) 

A  few  among  various  miscellaneous  works  of  especial  value 
to  the  Old  Testament  student  are  as  follows: 

Cremer's  Biblico-Theological  Lexicon. 

Oehler's  Old  Testament  Theology. 

Elliott's  Old  Testament  Prophecy. 

Lewis'  Six  Days  of  Creation. 

Geikie's  Hours  of  the  Bible. 

Curtiss'  The  Levitical  Priests. 

Godet's  Biblical  Studies. 

Fairbairn's  Typology. 

Jukes's  Types  of  Genesis. 

Seiss's  Holy  Types. 

Girdlestone's  Hebrew  Synonyms. 

Trumbull's  Blood  Covenant. 

The  Polychrome  Bible. 

The  Warburtonian  Lectures  (Series). 

Tomkin's  Times  of  Abraham. 

Works  of  the  Palestine  Exploration  Survey  and  of  the  Egyp- 
tian Exploration  Fund,  etc.,  etc. 


INDEX.  235 


NDEX. 


PAGES. 

Preface 3 

Introductory  Statement  njKDn  Old  Testament  Philology  5-22 
Section  I.     The  Original  Languages  of  the  Old  Tes- 
tament   5 

Section  11.     The  Shemitic  Languages 5 

Section  III.     Alphahet  and  Alphabetical  Writing, .  7 

Section  IV.     The  Hebrew  Language 9 

Section  V.     Hebrew  Language  and  Literature    in 

the  Mosaic  Period. 10 

Section  VI.     Hebrew   Language   and  Literature  in 

the  Davidic  and  Solomonic  Period 12 

Section  VII.     Hebrew  Language  and  Literature  in 

the  Exilian  and  Post-Exilian  Period 14 

Section  VIII.     Moabitish,  Old  and  Late  Phoenician.  16 

Section  IX.     The  Aramaic  or  North  Shemitic 18 

Section  X.     The  Arabic  or  South  Shemetic 21 

Genesis 23-37 

Genealogical  Tables  to  Genesis 38 

Exodus 39-42 

Table  of  Sacred  Seasons,  Feasts,  Sacrifices 43-45 

Leviticus 45-49 

Numbers 49-53 

Deuteronomy 53-56 

Joshua 56-63 

Judges 63-67 

Ruth 68-69 

First  and  Second  Samuel 69-75 

Table  of  The  Kings 76-77 

First  and  Second  Kings 78-83 


23(J  INDEX. 

First  and  Second  Chronicles 83-87 

Ezra 88-91 

Nehemiah 91-94 

Esther 94-96 

Hebrew  Poetry 97-99 

Job 99-110 

The  Psalms 110-118 

The  Proverbs 118-131 

Ecclesiastes 121-128 

The  Song  of  Songs 128-138 

Prophet-Prophecy 138-141 

Table  of  the  Prophets , 142 

Isaiah 143-157 

Jeremiah 158-164 

The  Lamentations 165-167 

Ezekiel 167-172 

Daniel 172-177 

Hosea 177-183 

Joel 183-187 

Amos 187-191 

Obadiah 191-194 

Jonah 194-199 

Micah 199-205 

Nahum 205-208 

Habakkuk 208-211 

Zephaniah 211-213 

Haggai 214-217 

Zechariah 217-225 

Malachi 226-230 

Literature 231-234 

Index 235-236 


WORKS  BY  THE  SAME  AUTHOR. 


An  Arabic  Manual.  The  Elements  of  Arabic  Grammar. 
Published  by  Charles  Scribner's  Sons.  Second 
edition. 

The  American  Revised  Version  of  the  Book  of  Psalms. 
Edited.  Published  by  Fords,  Howard  and  Hul- 
bert. 

Outlines  of  the  Archaeology  of  the  Old  Testament. 

Outlines  of  Special  Introduction  to  the  Books  of  the 
Old  Testament.     Second  Edition. 

IN  PREPARATION. 

An  E]xposition  of  The  Song  of  Songs. 
Studies  in  Messianic  Prophecy. 


^*^''^iv%iip^Pi., 


K^^K 


:^$:Xn 


1^! 


mm. 


m 


m^-. 
^'. 


